Carel PRK300D0E0, PRK300D0F0, PRK300D3E0, PRK300D3F0, PRK300L0E0, PRK300L0F0, PRK300L3F0, PRK300M0E0, PRK300M0F0, PRK300M3F0 User Manual

Document
pRack pR300
compressor rack controller
User manual
NO POWER
&amp; SIGNAL
CABLES
TOGETHER
READ CAREFULLY IN THE TEXT!
H i g h
E f f i c i e n c y
S o l u t i o n s
ENG
DISPOSAL
IMPORTANT
CAREL bases the development of its products on decades of experience in
HVAC, on the continuous investments in technological innovations to products,
procedures and strict quality processes with in-circuit and functional testing on
100% of its products, and on the most innovative production technology available
on the market. CAREL and its subsidiaries nonetheless cannot guarantee that all
the aspects of the product and the software included with the product respond
to the requirements of the ﬁnal application, despite the product being developed
according to start-of-the-art techniques.
The customer (manufacturer, developer or installer of the ﬁnal equipment) accepts
all liability and risk relating to the conﬁguration of the product in order to reach
the expected results in relation to the speciﬁc ﬁnal installation and/or equipment.
CAREL may, based on speciﬁc agreements, act as a consultant for the positive
commissioning of the ﬁnal unit/application, however in no case does it accept
liability for the correct operation of the ﬁnal equipment/system.
INFORMATION FOR USERS ON THE CORRECT HANDLING OF WASTE
ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONIC EQUIPMENT (WEEE)
In reference to European Union directive 2002/96/EC issued on 27 January 2003
and the related national legislation, please note that:
1. WEEE cannot be disposed of as municipal waste and such waste must be
collected and disposed of separately;
2. the public or private waste collection systems deﬁned by local legislation must
be used. In addition, the equipment can be returned to the distributor at the
end of its working life when buying new equipment;
3. the equipment may contain hazardous substances: the improper use or
incorrect disposal of such may have negative eﬀects on human health and on
the environment;
4. the symbol (crossed-out wheeled bin) shown on the product or on the
packaging and on the instruction sheet indicates that the equipment has been
introduced onto the market after 13 August 2005 and that it must be disposed
of separately;
5. in the event of illegal disposal of electrical and electronic waste, the penalties
are speciﬁed by local waste disposal legislation.
The CAREL product is a state-of-the-art product, whose operation is speciﬁed in the
technical documentation supplied with the product or can be downloaded, even
prior to purchase, from the website www.CAREL.com.
Each CAREL product, in relation to its advanced level of technology, requires setup
/ conﬁguration / programming / commissioning to be able to operate in the best
possible way for the speciﬁc application. The failure to complete such operations,
which are required/indicated in the user manual, may cause the ﬁnal product to
malfunction; CAREL accepts no liability in such cases.
Only qualiﬁed personnel may install or carry out technical service on the product.
The customer must only use the product in the manner described in the
documentation relating to the product.
Warranty on the materials: 2 years (from the date of production, excluding
consumables).
Approval: the quality and safety of CAREL INDUSTRIES Hqs products are
guaranteed by the ISO 9001 certiﬁed design and production system.
In addition to observing any further warnings described in this manual, the
following warnings must be heeded for all CAREL products:
• Prevent the electronic circuits from getting wet. Rain, humidity and all types of
liquids or condensate contain corrosive minerals that may damage the electronic
circuits. In any case, the product should be used or stored in environments that
comply with the temperature and humidity limits speciﬁed in the manual.
• Do not install the device in particularly hot environments. Too high temperatures
may reduce the life of electronic devices, damage them and deform or melt the
plastic parts. In any case, the product should be used or stored in environments
that comply with the temperature and humidity limits speciﬁed in the manual.
• Do not attempt to open the device in any way other than described in the
manual.
• Do not drop, hit or shake the device, as the internal circuits and mechanisms
may be irreparably damaged.
• Do not use corrosive chemicals, solvents or aggressive detergents to clean the
device.
• Do not use the product for applications other than those speciﬁed in the
technical manual.
WARNING: separate as much as possible the probe and digital input signal
cables from the cables carrying inductive loads and power cables to avoid
possible electromagnetic disturbance.
Never run power cables (including the electrical panel wiring) and signal
cables in the same conduits.
NO POWER
&amp; SIGNAL
CABLES
TOGETHER
READ CAREFULLY IN THE TEXT!
All of the above suggestions likewise apply to the controllers, serial boards,
programming keys or any other accessory in the CAREL product portfolio.
CAREL adopts a policy of continual development. Consequently, CAREL reserves
the right to make changes and improvements to any product described in this
document without prior warning.
The technical speciﬁcations shown in the manual may be changed without prior
warning.
Key icone
NOTE:
The liability of CAREL in relation to its products is speciﬁed in the CAREL general
contract conditions, available on the website www.CAREL.com and/or by speciﬁc
agreements with customers; speciﬁcally, to the extent where allowed by applicable
legislation, in no case will CAREL, its employees or subsidiaries be liable for any
lost earnings or sales, losses of data and information, costs of replacement
goods or services, damage to things or people, downtime or any direct, indirect,
incidental, actual, punitive, exemplary, special or consequential damage of any
kind whatsoever, whether contractual, extra-contractual or due to negligence, or
any other liabilities deriving from the installation, use or impossibility to use the
product, even if CAREL or its subsidiaries are warned of the possibility of such
damage.
IMPORTANT:
TUTORIAL:
3
to bring attention to a very important subject; in
particular, regarding the practical use of the various
functions of the product.
to bring critical issues regarding the use of the
pRack pR300 to the attention of the user.
some simple examples to accompany the user in
conﬁguring the most common settings.
pRack +0300025EN rel. 1.3 - 17.12.2015
ENG
Content
1. INTRODUCTION
1.1
1.2
1.3
2. HARDWARE CHARACTERISTICS AND INSTALLATION
2.1
2.2
2.3
2.4
9
pRack pR300 S, M, D, L board description ......................................................................9
Technical speciﬁcations ................................................................................................. 11
pRack pR300 S, M, D, L board dimensions.......................................................... 16
pRack pR300 general connection diagram ........................................................ 17
3. INSTALLATION
3.1
3.2
3.3
3.4
3.5
3.6
3.7
22
General installation instructions ................................................................................ 22
Power supply ......................................................................................................................... 22
Universal inputs/outputs................................................................................................ 22
Connecting the digital inputs ..................................................................................... 24
Connecting the analogue outputs .......................................................................... 25
Connecting the digital outputs.................................................................................. 25
pLAN electrical connections ........................................................................................ 26
4. START UP
4.1
27
Starting the ﬁrst time ........................................................................................................ 27
5. USER INTERFACE
5.1
29
5.2
5.3
5.4
6.
7
Main features ............................................................................................................................7
Components and accessories ........................................................................................7
Conﬁguration of the system and conﬁguration of the inputs ....................
and outputs ...............................................................................................................................8
29
Graphic terminal ........................................................................................................................
Description of the display .............................................................................................. 29
Password ................................................................................................................................... 31
Description menu ............................................................................................................... 31
FUNCTIONS
6.1
6.2
6.3
6.4
6.5
6.6
6.7
6.8
33
Unit On-Oﬀ.............................................................................................................................. 33
Control ....................................................................................................................................... 33
Compressors........................................................................................................................... 36
Fans .............................................................................................................................................. 42
Energy saving ........................................................................................................................ 44
Accessory functions........................................................................................................... 44
Settings...................................................................................................................................... 50
Managing the default values ....................................................................................... 50
7. PARAMETERS TABLE
51
8. ALARMS
75
8.1
8.2
8.3
Alarm management .......................................................................................................... 75
Compressor alarms ............................................................................................................ 75
Pressure and prevent alarms ........................................................................................ 76
9. SUPERVISORY AND COMMISSIONING SYSTEMS
9.1
9.2
10. UPDATING THE SOFTWARE
10.1
10.2
10.3
10.4
10.5
78
PlantVisor PRO and PlantWatch PRO supervisory systems ....................... 78
Commissioning software ............................................................................................... 78
79
Updating using pRack Manager ................................................................................ 79
Updating using SmartKey.............................................................................................. 79
Pendrive: operating instructions ............................................................................... 79
Conﬁguring pCOWeb/pCOnet from a system screen ................................ 83
Saving parameters between diﬀerent software versions .......................... 84
11. APPENDIX
85
5
pRack +0300025EN rel. 1.3 - 17.12.2015
ENG
pRack +0300025EN rel. 1.3 - 17.12.2015
6
ENG
1. INTRODUCTION
For each size the following versions are available:
• with built-in terminal, without terminal
1.1 Main features
pRack pR300 is the evolution of the pR100 electronic controller. The
consolidated software for management of compressor racks is combined
with new functions, on a totally upgraded hardware platform. Below are
the main functions (new and consolidated) and compressor management
features on pRack pR300.
1.1.1
All pRack pR300 models are equipped with:
• integrated RS485 serial interface
• anthracite gray plastic cover
• connector kit
• USB.
pR300 functionality list
pRack pR300 models
Direct management via Fieldbus, using either the built-in driver
(PRK300D*) or external driver, of one or two valves for the operation of heat exchangers typically used in subcritical systems (CO2)
Code
PRK300S0F0
PRK300S0E0
Up to 2 suction line and 2 condensing line
Scroll, reciprocating, digital scroll and screw compressors management
Up to 12 scroll compressors, reciprocating for line
Main features Up to 2 screw compressors for line 1, maximum one screw compressors line
Fino a 2 compressori Bitzer CRII (massimo 1 per linea)
Up to 16 fans for line
Inverter for suctione and condensing line
Generic functions easily conﬁgurable (ON/OFF, modulations,
alarms, scheduler)
Heat recovery
S, M, D, L version (based on pRack hardware)
Hardware
External display (pGDE) or built-in display
Up to 12 piston compressors per line, a maximum of 4 diﬀerent sizes
Up to 4 alarms per compressor
Compressors Inverter management, even with modulation inside the dead zone
Pump down
Control of overheating in suction
Languages
Italian, English, German, French, Spanish, Russian, Portoguese, Swedish
Temperature: &deg;C, &deg;F
Unit of
Pressure: barg, psig (all pressure values are also converted to
temperature)
measure
Date format settable between: dd/mm/yy, mm/dd/yy, yy.mm.dd
Proportional band (P, PI) available for compressors and fans
Control
Neutral zone available for compressors and fans
FIFO
LIFO
Compressor
rotation
Timed
Fixed (the ON/OFF order can be set as required)
Scheduling available: heating/cooling, 4 daily time bands, 5 special
periods (e.g.: closing period), 10 special days (e.g.: holidays)
Scheduling by
Schedulable functions: set point compensation for compressors
calendar
and fans, split condenser (heating/cooling only), anti noise, heat
recovery, generic functions
Compensation from digital input, from scheduling, ﬂoating based
Setpoint
on supervisor parameter (compressors) or outside temperature
(fans)
Prevent
High pressure, including activation of heat recovery or ChillBooster
Automatic and manual management
Conﬁgurable compressor alarms
Alarms
Double Signal on digital outputs for high or low priority alarms
Log from application
Supervisor
Carel
protocol
Modbus&pound;
PRK300M0F0
PRK300M0E0
PRK300D0F0
PRK300D0E0
PRK300L0F0
PRK300L0E0
PRK300S3F0
PRK300S3E0
PRK300M3F0
PRK300M3E0
PRK300D3F0
PRK300D3E0
PRK300L3F0
PRK300L3E0
PRK300S3FK
PRK300M3FK
PRK300D3FK
PRK300L3FK
Tab. 1.c
Accessories:
Tab. 1.a
The pRack pR300 is available in 4 hardware sizes listed in the table (for the
detailed description of each size, electrical characteristics and installation,
refer to Chapter 2):
Hardware sizes:
Small
Medium
Medium + Driver
Large
Available ana- Available
log inputs digital inputs
5
8
8
10
8
14
14
18
Available
analog
outputs
4
4
4
6
Code
Description
PGDERK0FX0
CONVONOFF0
pGD evolution user terminal for pRack pR300T
Module to convert a
0...10 V analog output to an SPDT digital output
RS485 serial connection board
USB/RS485 serial convertor with telephone connector
USB/RS485 serial converter with 3-way terminal
Smart Key programming key
Connection cable for terminal 1=0.8m
Connection cable for terminal 1=1.5m
Connection cable for terminal 1=3 m
Ratiometric pressure probes 0…5 Vdc
PCOS004850
CVSTDUTLF0
CVSTDUMOR0
PCOSO0AKY0
S90CONN002
S90CONN000
S90CONN001
SPKT*R* and
SPKC00*
SPK*C*, SPK1*,
SPK2*, SPK3*
NTC*
NTC*HT*
EVD0000E50
EVDIS00D*0
E2VCABS*00
1.2 Components and accessories
Size
Description
pRack pR300 small, USB, no display, BMS/FBUS opto, connector
kit,
pRack pR300 small, USB, no display, BMS/FBUS opto, 2 SSR,
connector kit,
pRack pR300 medium, USB, no display, BMS/FBUS opto,
connector kit,
pRack pR300 medium, USB, no display, BMS/FBUS opto, 2 SSR,
connector kit,
pRack pR300 medium, EVD EVO embedded for 2 univ. EXV, USB,
no display, BMS/FBUS opto, connector kit,
pRack pR300 medium, EVD EVO embedded for 2 univ. EXV, USB,
no display, BMS/FBUS opto, 2 SSR, connector kit,
pRack pR300 large, USB, no display, BMS/FBUS opto, connector
kit
pRack pR300 large, USB, no display, BMS/FBUS opto, 6 SSR,
connector kit,
pRack pR300 small, USB, display built-in, BMS/FBUS opto,
connector kit,
pRack pR300 small, USB, display built-in, BMS/FBUS opto, 2 SSR,
connector kit,
pRack pR300 medium, USB, display built-in, BMS/FBUS opto,
connector kit,
pRack pR300 medium, USB, display built-in, BMS/FBUS opto, 2
SSR, connector kit
pRack pR300 medium, EVD EVO embedded for 2 univ. exv, USB,
display built-in, BMS/FBUS opto, connector kit
pRack pR300 medium, EVD EVO embedded for 2 univ. exv, USB,
display built-in, bms/fbus opto, 2 SSR, connector kit
pRack pR300 large, USB, display built-in, BMS/FBUS opto,
connector kit
pRack pR300 large, USB, display built-in, BMS/FBUS opto, 6 ssr,
connector kit
pRack pR300 small, USB, external display, BMS/FBUS opto,
connector kit
pRack pR300 medium, USB, external display, BMS/FBUS opto,
connector kit
pRack pR300 medium, EVD EVO embedded for 2 univ. EXV, USB,
external display, BMS/FBUS opto, connector kit
pRack pR300 large, USB, external display, BMS/FBUS opto,
connector kit
Available
digital
outputs
8
13
13
18
Tab. 1.b
Active pressure probes 4…20 mA
Pressure probe NTC -50T90&deg;C
Pressure probe NTC -0T150&deg;C
EVD EVO universal driver for Carel valves, RS485/ModbusTM
Display for EVD EVO
EVD-valve connection cable
Tab. 1.d
7
pRack +0300025EN rel. 1.3 - 17.12.2015
ENG
Example 4: 2 suction lines on board (scroll or piston compressors), 2 high
pressure lines on the board):
1.3 Conﬁguration of the system and
conﬁguration of the inputs and outputs
pRack pR300 has the same system, input and output conﬁguration
management as the standard pRack pR100. It is available 22
conﬁgurations, but it is more ultilised those described in Appendix A.1.
I/O
Note: each input/output is completely conﬁgurable with the only
requirements being those set by the system conﬁguration. For
example, the suction pressure probe on line 1 can be arbitrarily conﬁgured
to any one of the analog inputs in the pLAN control board with address 1
compatible with the type of probe.
I/O
pR300
Refer Cap. 4, to have more ionformation about selection of conﬁguration
system and pre-conﬁguration and see Appendix A.1.
I/O
System conﬁgurations available
pRack pR300 can manage system conﬁgurations with up to 2 suction lines
(maximum 12 scroll or piston compressors for lines 1 and 2, maximum 2
screw compressors for line 1 and maximum 1 BitzerCRII compressor per
line), up to 2 condenser lines (maximum 16 fans per line). When there
are two suction lines, the 2 lines can be managed by the same pRack
board or by separate boards. The condenser lines can be managed by
the board controls the suction lines or by separate boards, depending on
the number of inputs/outputs available. For each suction and condenser
line, pRack pR300 can manage a modulating device (inverter, Digital
Scroll&reg; compressor, compressor with continuous control or BitzerCRII
compressor). pRack pR300 manages up to 1 line with screw compressors,
and the board can control up to 2 compressors.
I/O
Fig. 1.c
Example 4: 2 suction lines on separate boards (scroll or piston
compressors), 2 high pressure lines (on the ﬁrst suction line board):
I/O
I/O
2
Example 1: 1 suction line with scroll or piston compressors, 1 high
pressure line:
C8
C7
C7
C4
3
2
NC8
NO8
C4
NO7
C1
NO6
NO5
NO4
C1
1
J26 FBus2
B M S card
IDC1
ID8
ID7
ID6
ID4
Y4
ID3
ID2
ID1
Y3
Y1
VG0
VG
GND
U5
GND
U4
+VDC
J5
Y2
J4
J3
GND
U3
U2
G0
U1
G
J2
+5 VREF
J24
GND
+Vterm
IDC1
ID8
ID7
ID6
ID5
ID4
Y4
ID3
ID2
ID1
Y3
J1
ID5
FieldBus card
J5
Y2
Y1
VG0
VG
GND
U5
GND
U4
+VDC
J15
J14
4
B M S card
J4
J3
GND
U3
U2
G0
G
+5 VREF
GND
+Vterm
J2
J13
J25 BMS2
pR300
FieldBus card
J24
NO3
J12
J11 pLAN
J10
1
J26 FBus2
pR300
J1
NO2
J15
NO1
C8
C7
C7
3
NC8
C4
J14
4
J25 BMS2
NO8
C4
J13
J10
Some examples of managed system conﬁgurations are described below,
while for the complete list of conﬁgurations and its features refer to
Appendix A1.
NO7
C1
NO6
NO5
C1
J12
J11 pLAN
NO4
NO3
NO2
NO1
pLAN
U1
1.3.1
I/O
I/O
Fig. 1.d
3
2
C8
C7
C7
4
Example 5: 2 suction lines on separate boards with scroll or piston
compressors, 2 high pressure line on separate boar
NC8
C4
J10
J25 BMS2
NO8
NO7
C4
NO6
J14
J13
J15
1
J26 FBus2
pR300
I/O
pLAN
J12
J11 pLAN
4
J25 BMS2
3
2
3
2
NC8
C8
NO8
C7
C7
C4
NO7
NO6
NO5
C4
NO4
C1
J15
1
J26 FBus2
B M S card
IDC1
ID8
ID7
ID6
C4
ID4
ID2
NO6
ID3
Y4
ID1
NO5
Y3
J5
Y2
VG0
VG
GND
U5
GND
U4
+VDC
Y1
J4
J3
GND
U2
J2
U1
+5 VREF
J24
GND
G0
G
+Vterm
IDC1
ID8
ID7
ID6
ID5
ID4
ID3
ID2
ID1
Y4
Y3
J1
ID5
FieldBus card
J5
Y2
Y1
VG0
VG
GND
U5
GND
U4
+VDC
NO3
4
B M S card
J4
J3
GND
U3
U2
U1
G0
G
+5 VREF
GND
+Vterm
J2
J14
J13
J25 BMS2
pR300
FieldBus card
J24
NO2
J12
J11 pLAN
J10
pR300
J1
NO1
C1
C8
NC8
C7
NO8
J15
1
J26 FBus2
U3
pLAN
NO7
J14
J13
J10
I/O
C7
C4
NO6
NO5
NO4
C4
C1
NO3
NO2
C1
IDC1
ID8
ID7
ID6
ID5
ID4
ID3
ID2
Y4
Y3
ID1
J5
Y2
Y1
VG0
VG
GND
U5
GND
U4
+VDC
I/O
B M S card
J4
J3
GND
U3
U2
J2
U1
+5 VREF
G0
G
J24
GND
+Vterm
FieldBus card
J1
NO1
J11 pLAN
NO5
C1
J12
NO4
C1
NO3
NO2
NO1
I/O
Fig. 1.a
J12
J11 pLAN
4
3
2
3
2
NC8
C8
NO8
C7
C7
NO7
C4
C1
J15
1
J26 FBus2
B M S card
IDC1
ID8
ID7
ID6
ID4
ID3
ID2
Y4
ID1
Y3
J5
Y2
VG0
VG
GND
U5
GND
U4
+VDC
Y1
J4
J3
GND
U3
U2
J2
U1
+5 VREF
J24
GND
G0
G
+Vterm
IDC1
ID8
ID7
ID6
ID5
ID4
ID3
ID2
ID1
Y4
Y3
J1
ID5
FieldBus card
J5
Y2
Y1
VG0
VG
GND
U5
GND
U4
+VDC
NO4
4
B M S card
J4
J3
GND
U3
U2
U1
G0
+5 VREF
GND
+Vterm
G
I/O
J2
J14
J13
J25 BMS2
pR300
FieldBus card
J24
NO3
J12
J11 pLAN
J10
1
J26 FBus2
pR300
J1
NO2
J15
NO1
C1
C8
NC8
NO8
J14
J13
J10
J25 BMS2
C7
NO7
C7
C4
NO6
NO5
NO4
C4
C1
NO3
NO2
C1
NO1
pLAN
Example 2: 2 suction lines on the same board with scroll or piston
compressors, 1 high pressure line:
I/O
I/O
Fig. 1.e
pR300
I/O
Note: nel caso di collegamento in pLAN di pi&ugrave; schede pRack pR300,
non &egrave; possibile realizzare reti miste con schede di taglia Compact insieme
a schede di tipo S, M, L, mentre risultano possibili reti miste che utilizzino
combinazioni di queste ultime.
I/O
Important: all the boards connected to the pLAN must have the
same software revision.
Fig. 1.b
pRack +0300025EN rel. 1.3 - 17.12.2015
8
ENG
2. HARDWARE CHARACTERISTICS AND INSTALLATION
2.1 pRack pR300 S, M, D, L board description
pRack pR300 S
14
J12
J11 pLAN
J10
4
3
2
C8
C7
NC8
J15
J14
J13
J25 BMS2
NO8
C7
NO7
C4
NO6
NO5
C4
NO4
C1
C1
NO3
15
NO2
13
12
11
NO1
10
1
J26 FBus2
16
17
18
pR300
IDC1
ID8
ID6
ID4
ID3
Y4
ID2
ID1
Y2
Y3
8
7
6
NO11
5
Y1
VG0
VG
GND
U5
GND
3
4
J5
ID7
3
U4
+VDC
GND
U3
U2
U1
2
J4
J3
NO10
1
J2
+5 VREF
J24
GND
G
G0
+Vterm
J1
B M S card
ID5
FieldBus card
Fig. 2.a
pRack pR300 M
J10
4
J25 BMS2
J26 FBus2
16
17
3
2
C13
NC13
NO13
C12
NC12
NO12
C9
C8
C9
J17
J16
J15
J14
J13
NC8
NO8
C7
C7
NO7
C4
NO6
NO5
NO4
C4
C1
NO3
J12
J11 pLAN
NO9
15
14
C1
13
NO2
12
11
NO1
10
J18
1
18
pR300
1
2
3
B M S card
3
5
6
7
ID14H
ID14
IDC13
ID13
ID13H
IDC9
J8
ID12
ID10
GND
3
ID9
U8
U7
U6
IDC1
ID8
ID7
8
ID11
J7
J6
ID6
ID5
ID4
ID3
ID2
ID1
Y4
Y3
J5
Y2
VG0
VG
GND
U5
GND
U4
+VDC
4
Y1
J4
J3
GND
U3
U2
J2
U1
+5 VREF
J24
GND
G0
G
J1
+Vterm
FieldBus c a r d
9
8
Fig. 2.b
Legende:
Rif.
1
Description
Power supply connector [G(+), G0(-)]
+Vterm: power supply for additional terminal
2
+5 VREF power supply for ratiometric probes
3
Universal inputs/outputs
4
+VDC: power supply for active probes
5
Button for setting pLAN address, second display, LED
VG: power supply at voltage A(*) for opto-isolated analogue output
6
VG0: power to opto-isolated analogue output, 0 Vac/Vdc
7
Analogue outputs
8
ID: digital inputs for voltage A (*)
ID..: digital inputs for voltage A (*)
9
IDH..: digital inputs for voltage B (**)
10
pLAN telephone connector for terminal/downloading application
(*) Voltage A: 24 Vac or 28 to 36 Vdc; (**) Voltage B: 230 Vac - 50/60 Hz.
Rif.
11
Description
pLAN plug-in connector
12
Reserved
13
14
15
Reserved
Reserved
Relay digital outputs
16
BMS2 connector
17
18
FieldBus2 connector
Jumpers for selecting FieldBus/ BMS
Tab. 2.a
9
pRack +0300025EN rel. 1.3 - 17.12.2015
ENG
pRack pR300 D
14
J26FBus2
16
17
2
1
4
24
NC13
23
3
ID14H
DI1
S4
ID14
IDC13
ID13
ID13H
S2
S3
S1
VREF
IDC9
ID11
ID9
GND
J7
ID12
G
G0
8
U8
J6
U7
U6
IDC1
ID8
ID7
ID6
GND
C D
A B
DI2
J29
ID10
VBAT
7
6
ID5
ID4
ID3
Y4
ID2
ID1
Y3
Y2
Y1
VG0
VG
GND
5
3
C13
21
J5
J4
U5
GND
U4
+VDC
GND
3
2
20
J30
B M S ca rd
J3
U3
U1
U2
J2
+5 VREF
GND
+Vterm
G0
G
J24
3
J28
4
1
J27
18
22
J1
NO13
C12
NC12
C9
NO12
NO11
C9
NO9
NO10
C8
1
pR300
FieldBus ca r d
J18
J17
4
2
2
3
1
4
J25 BMS2
3
J10
J16
J15
J14
J13
NC8
C7
NO8
C7
NO7
C4
NO6
NO5
C4
J12
J11 pLAN
NO4
C1
C1
15
NO3
13
12
NO2
11
NO1
10
J8
9
8
Fig. 2.c
Legende:
Ref.
1
Description
Power supply connector [G(+), G0(-)]
+Vterm: power supply for additional terminal
2
+5 VREF power supply for ratiometric probes
3
Universal inputs/outputs
4
+VDC: power supply for active probes
5
Button for setting pLAN address, second display, LED
VG: power supply at voltage A(*) for opto-isolated analogue output
6
VG0: power to opto-isolated analogue output, 0 Vac/Vdc
7
Analogue outputs
8
ID: digital inputs for voltage A (*)
9
ID..: digital inputs for voltage A (*); IDH..: digital inputs for voltage B (**)
10
pLAN telephone connector for terminal/downloading application
11
pLAN plug-in connector
12
Reserved
(*) Voltage A: 24 Vac or 28 to 36 Vdc; (**) Voltage B: 230 Vac - 50/60 Hz.
Ref.
13
Description
Reserved
14
Reserved
15
16
17
Relay digital outputs
BMS2 connector
FieldBus2 connector
18
Jumpers for selecting FieldBus/ BMS
20
21
22
23
24
Electronic valve A connector
Electronic valve B connector
Connector for external Ultracap module (accessory)
Valve driver analogue and digital inputs
Valve status signal LED
Tab. 2.b
N.C. Model
J18
C16
NO18
NO17
NO16
C16
C13
NC12
NO13
C12
C9
NO12
NO11
NO10
NO9
C9
C8
NO8
NC8
C15
1
J26 FBus2
J17
J16
NC15
2
C14
3
NC14
4
J15
NO15
J10
J25 BMS2
C7
NO7
C7
C4
NO6
NO5
J14
J13
NO14
J12
J11 pLAN
NO4
C4
C1
NO3
C1
NO2
NO1
J22
NC13
15
C16
14
NC18
13
12
NC17
11
C16
10
NC16
pRack pR300 L
J21
J22
J23 FBus2
15
15
19
17
18
9
3
7
N.O. Model
16
8
pR300
1
2
3
3
6
8
3
U10
GND
ID17
IDC13
ID14
ID14H
IDC17
GND
ID13
ID18
U9
ID13H
IDC9
ID12
ID11
ID10
ID9
GND
U8
J6
U7
IDC1
U6
ID8
ID7
J7
ID6
ID5
ID4
ID3
ID2
ID1
Y4
Y3
7
Y6
Y5
ID16
ID16H
ID15
IDC15
ID15H
J20
J5
Y2
VG0
VG
GND
5
Y1
J4
U5
GND
U4
+VDC
4
J19
B M S card
J3
GND
U3
U2
J2
U1
+5 VREF
J24
GND
G0
G
J1
+Vterm
FieldBus car d
8
J8
9
Fig. 2.d
Legende:
Ref. Description
1
Power supply connector [G(+), G0(-)]
+Vterm: power supply for additional terminal
2
+5 VREF power supply for ratiometric probes
5
Button for setting pLAN address, second display, LED
VG: power supply at voltage A(*) for opto-isolated analogue output
6
VG0: power to opto-isolated analogue output, 0 Vac/Vdc
7
Analogue outputs
8
ID: digital inputs for voltage A (*)
9
ID..: digital inputs for voltage A (*); IDH..: digital inputs for voltage B (**)
10 pLAN telephone connector for terminal/downloading application
(*) Voltage A: 24 Vac or 28 to 36 Vdc; (**) Voltage B: 230 Vac - 50/60 Hz.
pRack +0300025EN rel. 1.3 - 17.12.2015
Ref.
11
Description
pLAN plug-in connector
12, 13, 14
Reserved
15
Relay digital outputs
16
BMS2 connector
17
18
19
FieldBus2 connector
Jumpers for selecting FieldBus/ BMS
FieldBus2 connector
Tab. 2.c
10
ENG
2.2 Technical speciﬁcations
2.2.1
Physical speciﬁcations
Dimensions
Plastic case
Built-in terminal
SMALL
MEDIUM, LARGE,
BUILT-IN DRIVER
Assembly
Material
Flammability
Ball pressure test
Resistance to creeping current
Colour
PGD1 (132x64 pixel) with backlit keypad
Operating conditions
Storage conditions
Ingress protection
Environmental pollution
Other features
Class according to protection against electric shock
PTI of the insulating materials
Period of stress across the insulating parts
Type of action
Type of disconnection or microswitching
Heat and ﬁre resistance category
Ageing characteristics (operating hours)
Number of automatic operating cycles
Overvoltage category
13 DIN modules 110 x 227,5 x 60 mm
18 DIN modules 110 x 315 x 60 mm
18 DIN modules 110 x 315 x 75 mm
ﬁtted on DIN rail in accordance with DIN 43880 CEI EN 50022
technopolymer
V2 (UL94) and 850 &deg;C (in accordance with IEC 60695)
125 &deg;C
≥ 250 V
White RAL 9016
PRK300*3**, PRK300*0**(w/o built-in terminal): -40T70 &deg;C, 90% RH non-condensing(*)
PRK300*3*0 (with built-in terminal): -20T60 &deg;C, 90% RH non-condensing
(*) with Ultracap module ﬁtted: -40T60&deg;C
PRK300D*** (w/o built-in terminal): -40T70 &deg;C, 90% RH non-condensing
PRK300D*** (with built-in terminal): -30T70 &deg;C, 90% RH non-condensing
Models with USB port and/or with Ultracap module: IP20 on the front panel only
Models without USB port and without Ultracap module: IP40 on the front panel only
2
to be integrated into Class I and/or II appliances in the versions without valve driver,
class I in the versions with valve driver
PCB: PTI 250 V; insulating material: PTI 175
long
1C; 1Y for SSR versions
microswitching
Category D (UL94-V2)
80,000
100,000 (EN 60730-1); 30,000 (UL 873)
category II
Tab. 2.d
2.2.2
Electrical speciﬁcations
Power supply
SMALL, MEDIUM, LARGE: use a dedicated 50 class II safety transformer VA.
BUILT IN DRIVER: use a dedicated 100 VA class II safety transformer.
Vac
P (Vac)
SMALL
24 Vac (+10/-15%), 45 VA
MEDIUM
50/60 Hz protected
LARGE
by an external 2.5 A
(EXTRALARGE)
type T fuse
Vdc
P (Vdc)
28 to 36 Vdc
30 W
(-20/+10%) protected
by an external 2.5 A
type T fuse
BUILT-IN DRIVER
90 VA
(DRIVER VALVE INTEGRATED)
Important: only power “PRK300TD***” with alternating current. The power transformer secondary must be earthed.
Not allowed
Terminal block
with male/female plug-in connectors
Cable cross-section
min 0.5 mm2 - max 2.5 mm2
CPU
32 bit, 100 MHz
Non-volatile memory (FLASH)
2 M byte Bios + 11 Mbyte application program
Data memory (RAM)
3.2 Mbyte (1.76 Mbyte Bios + 1.44 Mbyte application program)
T buﬀer memory (EEPROM)
13 kbyte
P parameter memory(EEPROM) 32 kbyte (not available to the pLAN)
Clock with battery
standard, precision 100 ppm
Battery
CR2430 3 Vdc lithium button battery (size 24x3 mm)
Software class and structure
Class A
Category of immunity to voltage Category III
surges (EN 61000-4-5)
Device not designed to be hand-held when powered
Tab. 2.e
11
pRack +0300025EN rel. 1.3 - 17.12.2015
ENG
Universal inputs/outputs U...
- 0 to 20 mA /4 to 20 mA inputs from probes powered by the
controller
- 0 to 5 V signals from ratiometric probes powered by controller
Input precision: &plusmn; 0.3 % f.s.
Time constant for each input: 0.5 s
Classiﬁcation of measuring circuits (CEI EN 61010-1): category I
Digital inputs w/o optical isolation,
Lmax = 30 m
(maximum number)
4
max tot 4
- 0 to 20 mA /4 to 20 mA inputs powered externally
5
5
4
8
6
(max 4 on U1...U5,
3 on U6...U8)
7
(max 4 on U1...U5,
3 on U6...U8)
6
SMALL MEDIUM/ BUILT-IN
DRIVER/EXTRALARGE
5
8
max 2 4
(max 2 on U1...U5,
max 2 on U6...U8)
- voltage-free contacts
- fast digital inputs
type: voltage-free contact
max current: 10 mA
max frequency 2kHz and resolution &plusmn;1 Hz
4 (2 on U1...U5,
1 on U6...U8, 1 su U9...U10)
6
max tot 10
- 0 to 1 Vdc/0 to 10 Vdc signals powered externally
5
3 (2 on U1...U5,
1 on U6...U8)
6
10
max tot 9
- 0 to 1 Vdc/0 to 10 Vdc signals from probes powered by controller
2
max tot 8
- CAREL NTC probes (-50T90&deg;C; R/T 10 kΩ&plusmn;1% at 25&deg;C);
- HT NTC (0T150&deg;C); - PTC (600Ω to 2200Ω)
- PT500 (-100T400&deg;C) - PT1000 (-100T400&deg;C)
- PT100 probes (-100T200&deg;C)
SMALL MEDIUM/ BUILT-IN
LARGE
DRIVER/EXTRALARGE
5
8
10
max tot 7
Analogue inputs,
Lmax = 30 m
(maximum number)
max tot 5
2.2.3
6
(max 4 on U1...U5,
3 on U6...U8,
2 on U9...U10)
9
(max 4 on U1...U5,
3 on U6...U8,
2 on U9...U10)
6
LARGE
10
6
(max 2 on U1...U5,
max 2 on U6...U8,
2 on U9...U10)
Important:
• for active probes powered externally (0 to 1 V, 0 to 10 V, 0 to 20 mA, 4 to 20 mA ), to avoid irreparably damaging the controller, implement adequate current
protection measures that must ensure &lt; 100 mA;
• the ratiometric probes can only be powered by the controller;
• on power-up, the universal inputs/outputs remain shorted to GND for around 500 ms until the end of the conﬁguration procedure.
Analogue outputs w/o optical isolation
(maximum number), Lmax = 30 m
0 to 10 Vdc (maximum current 2 mA)
PWM (output 0/3.3 Vdc, maximum current 2 mA, frequency: 2kHz
asynchronous)
SMALL MEDIUM/ BUILT-IN
LARGE
DRIVER/EXTRALARGE
5
8
10
5
8
10
Tab. 2.f
2.2.4
Power supply to probes and terminals
can be used to power any active probes using the 24/21 Vdc &plusmn; 10% (P+5*/P+3*) available at terminal +VDC (J2). The maximum current available is
150 mA, protected against short-circuits.
+5Vref
to power the 0 to 5V ratiometric probes, use the 5 Vdc (&plusmn; 5%) available at terminal +5VREF(J24). The maximum current available is 60 mA.
P+3**********: 21 Vdc &plusmn; 10%; P+5**********: 24 Vdc &plusmn; 10%
Vterm
Used to power an external terminal as an alternative to the one connected to J10, Pmax = 1.5 W
Important: if the length exceeds 10 m, use shielded cable with the shield connected to earth. In any case, the max length allowed is 30 m.
+Vdc
Tab. 2.g
2.2.5
Digital inputs ID... IDH...
Type
Lmax
Optically-isolated
30 m
Minimum digital input pulse
detection time
SMALL
MEDIUM/ BUILT-IN DRIVER/EXTRALARGE
LARGE
Normally open (open-closed-open)
Normally closed (closed-open-closed)
Power supply to the inputs
External
Maximum number
Classiﬁcation of measuring
Category I: 24 Vac/Vdc (J5, J7, J20)
circuits (CEI EN 61010-1)
Category III: 230 Vac (J8, J19)
Digital input current draw at 24 Vac/Vdc
Digital input current draw at 230 Vac
no. of optically-isolated no. of optically-isolated inputs, 24 Vac/Vdc or 230 Vac
inputs, 24 Vac or 24 Vdc - 50/60 Hz
8
None
12
2
14
4
200 ms
400 ms
IDH...: 230 Vac (+10/-15%) 50/60 Hz
ID...: 24 Vac (+10/-15%) 50/60 Hz o 28 to 36 Vdc (+10/-20%)
5 mA
5 mA
Tab. 2.h
Note:
• separate as much as possible the probe and digital input cables from cables to inductive loads and power cables, so as to avoid possible electromagnetic
disturbance. Never run power cables (including the electrical panel cables) and signal cables in the same conduits;
• the two 230 Vac or 24 Vac/Vdc inputs on terminals J8 (ID13, ID14) or J19 (ID15, ID16) have the same common pole and therefore both will operate at
230 Vac or 24 Vac/Vdc. There is basic insulation between the two inputs; there is reinforced insulation between the inputs and the rest of the controller;
• ID1...ID8, ID9 to ID12, ID17, ID18 have functional insulation from the rest of the controller;
• for DC voltage inputs (24 Vdc) either the + or the - can be connected to common terminal;
• the rating of the external contact connected to the digital inputs must be at least 5 mA.
pRack +0300025EN rel. 1.3 - 17.12.2015
12
ENG
2.2.6
Analogue outputs Y...
Type
Lmax
Maximum number
Power supply
Precision
Resolution
Settling time
Maximum load
0 to 10 V optically-isolated on Y1...Y6
30 m
SMALL, MEDIUM/ BUILT-IN DRIVER
LARGE
external
Y1...Y6
8 bit
Y1...Y6
1 kΩ (10 mA)
4
Y1...Y4, 0 to 10 V
6
Y1...Y6, 0 to 10 V
24 Vac (+10/-15%) or 28 to 36 Vdc on VG(+), VG0(-)
&plusmn; 2% full scale
from 1 s (slew rate 10 V/s) to 20 s (slew rate 0.5 V/s) selectable via SW
Tab. 2.i
Warnings:
• for lengths &gt; 10 m, only use shielded cable, with the shield connected to earth;
• a 0 to 10 Vdc analogue output can be connected in parallel to other outputs of the same type, or alternatively to an external source of voltage. The higher
voltage will be considered. Correct operation is not guaranteed if actuators with voltage inputs are connected;
• power the VG-VG0 analogue outputs at the same voltage on G-G0: Connect G0 to VG0 and G to VG. This is valid for both alternating and direct current
power supplies.
2.2.7
Digital outputs NO..., NC...
Type
Maximum no
Relay. Minimum contact current: 50 mA.
8: SMALL; 13: MEDIUM/ BUILT-IN DRIVER; 18: LARGE;
The relay outputs have diﬀerent features depending on the model of controller. The outputs can be divided into groups. The relays belonging
to the same group (individual cell in the table) have basic insulation and therefore must have the same voltage. Between groups (cells in the
Insulation distance
table) there is double insulation and consequently these may have diﬀerent voltages. There is also double insulation between each terminal of
the digital outputs and the rest of the controller.
Relays with the same insulation
Makeup of the
groups
Number of
changeover
contacts
Model
1
SMALL
1...3
Type of relay
Type A
MEDIUM/ BUILT-IN DRIVER
1...3
Type of relay
Type A
LARGE NO
1...3
Type of relay
Type A
LARGE NC
1...3
Type of relay
Type A
1: SMALL (relay 8)
3: MEDIUM (relay 8, 12, 13)
5: LARGE NO/NC (relay 8, 12, 13, 14 e 15)
2
4...6
Type A
4...6
Type A
4...6
Type A
4...6
Type A
3
7
Type A
7
Type A
7
Type A
7
Type A
4
8
Type A
8
Type A
8
Type A
8
Type A
5
9...11
Type A
9...11
Type A
9...11
Type A
Group
6
12
Type A
12
Type A
12
Type A
7
13
Type A
13
Type A
13
Type A
8
14...15
Type A
14...15
Type A
9
16...18
Type A
16...18
Type C
10
-
11
-
Note: the output relays have diﬀerent features, depending on the model of controller.
Rated data
Relay type A
Approval
Relay rated data
Switchable power Relay type B
Approval
Relay rated data
Relay type C
Approval
SPDT, 2000 VA, 250 Vac, 8A resistive
UL 873
2 A 250 Vac resistive, 2A FLA, 12 LRA, 250 Vac, C300 pilot duty (30,000 cycles)
EN 60730-1
2 A resistive, 2A inductive, cosφ=0.6, 2(2)A (100,000 cycles)
SPST, 1250 VA, 250 Vac, 5A resistive
UL 873
1 A 250 Vac resistive, 1A FLA, 6 LRA, 250 Vac, C300 pilot duty (30,000 cycles)
EN 60730-1
1 A resistive, 1A inductive, cosφ=0.6, 1(1)A (100,000 cycles)
SPDT, 1250 VA, 250 Vac, 5A resistive
UL 873
1 A 250 Vac resistive, 1A FLA, 6 LRA, 250 Vac, C300 pilot duty (30,000 cycles)
EN 60730-1
1 A resistive, 1A inductive, cosφ=0.6, 1(1)A (100,000 cycles)
Tab. 2.a
2.2.8
SSR outputs (in models where featured)
Maximum number
Working voltage
Load current (MAX)
Impulsive load current (MAX)
2: SMALL (ouputs 7, 8); 2: MEDIUM (ouputs 7, 12); 6: LARGE (ouputs 7, 8, 12, 13, 14, 15)
24 Vac/Vdc
1A
1.2 A
Tab. 2.j
Warnings:
• if the load requires higher current, use an external SSR;
• to power external resistive loads via SSRs, use the same power supply as the pRack (supplied to terminals G-G0), which must be dedicated and not shared by other
devices (contactors, coils, etc..);
• the groups that the digital outputs are divided into have two common pole terminals to simplify wiring;
• make sure that the current running through the common terminals does not exceed the rated current of an individual terminal, that is, 8 A.
13
pRack +0300025EN rel. 1.3 - 17.12.2015
ENG
2.2.9
Serial port - Use AWG 20-22 twisted pair shielded cable for the +/-
Serial
Serial ZERO
Serial ONE
Serial TWO
Serial THREE
Serial FOUR
Type/connectors
pLAN/J10, J11
Features
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
BMS 1 Serial Card
•
•
FieldBus 1 Serial Card •
•
•
•
BMS 2 / J25
•
•
•
•
•
FFieldBus 2 / J26 (and •
•
J23 on Large and
•
Extralarge version)
•
•
Integrated on main board
HW driver: asynchronous half duplex RS485 pLAN
Not optically-isolated
Connectors: 6-pin telephone jack + 3-pin plug-in p. 5.08
Maximum length: 500 m
Max data rate: 115200 bit/s
Maximum number of connectable devices: 3
Not integrated on main board
HW driver: not featured
Can be used with all pRack family optional BMS cards
Not integrated on main board
HW driver: not present
Can be used with all pRack family optional FieldBus cards
Integrated on main board
HW driver: asynchronous half duplex RS485 Slave
Optically-isolated
3-pin plug-in connector p. 5.08
Maximum length: 1000 m
Max data rate: 384000 bit/s
Integrated on main board
J23: not optically-isolated
J26: optically-isolated
3-pin plug-in connector p. 5.08
J23 and J26 are independent.
Tab. 2.k
Note: in industrial/residential environments, for distances &gt; 10 m, shielded cable is required, with the shield connected to earth. In residential environments (EN
55014), irrespective of the cable length, on versions without valve driver, the connection cable between the controller and the terminal and the serial cable must be
shielded and connected to earth at both ends.
2.2.10 Model with electronic expansion valve driver
Valve compatibility
Motor connection
Digital input
connection
Sonde
CAREL: E*V****
ALCO: EX4; EX5; EX6; EX7; EX8 330 Hz (recommended by CAREL); EX8 500 Hz (from ALCO speciﬁcations)
SPORLAN: SEI 0.5-11; SER 1.5-20; SEI 30; SEI 50; SEH 100; SEH175
Danfoss: ETS 12.5-25B; ETS 50B; ETS 100B; ETS 250; ETS 400 CCM 40, CCM 10-20-30, CCMT 2-4-8
CAREL: two CAREL EXV as for EVD EVOLUTION TWIN
SPORLAN: SER(I) G, J, K
Shielded 4-wire cable CAREL P/N E2VCABS*00, or AWG22 shielded 4-wire cable Lmax =10 m,
or AWG14 shielded 4-wire cable Lmax 50 m
Digital input to be activated with voltage-free contact or transistor to GND.
Closing current 5mA; maximum length &lt; 10 m
Maximum length 10 m or less than 30 m with shielded cable
S1 ratiometric pressure probe (0 to 5 V)
electronic pressure sensor (4 to 20 mA)
combined ratiometric pressure probe (0 to 5 V)
4 to 20 mA input (max. 24 mA)
S2 low temperature NTC
high temperature NTC
resolution 0.1 % fs
resolution 0.5 % fs
resolution 0.1 % fs
resolution 0.5 % fs
10 kΩ at 25 &deg;C, -50T90 &deg;C
50 kΩ at 25 &deg;C,-40T150 &deg;C
combined NTC
0 to 10 V input (max 12 V)
S3 ratiometric pressure probe (0 to 5 V):
electronic pressure sensor (4 to 20 mA)
combined ratiometric pressure probe (0 to 5 V)
4 to 20 mA input (max. 24 mA)
S4 low temperature NTC
high temperature NTC
10 kΩ at 25 &deg;C,-40T120 &deg;C
resolution 0.1 % fs
resolution 0.1 % fs
resolution 0.5 % fs
resolution 0.1 % fs
resolution 0.5 % fs
10 kΩ at 25 &deg;C,-50T105 &deg;C
10 kΩ at 25 &deg;C,-40T150 &deg;C
combined NTC
Power to active
probes (VREF)
Emergency power
supply
10 kΩ at 25 &deg;C, -40T120 &deg;C
measurement error: 2% fs maximum; 1% typical
measurement error: 8% fs maximum; 7% typical
measurement error: 2 % fs maximum; 1 % typical
measurement error: 8 % fs maximum; 7 % typical
measurement error: 1&deg;C in the range -50T50 &deg;C; 3&deg;C in the range +50T90 &deg;C
measurement error: 1.5 &deg;C in the range -20T115&deg;C, 4 &deg;C in range outside of
-20T115 &deg;C
measurement error: 1&deg;C in the range -40T50 &deg;C; 3&deg;C in the range +50T90 &deg;C
measurement error: 9% fs maximum; 8% typical
measurement error: 2% fs maximum; 1% typical
measurement error: 8% fs maximum; 7% typical
measurement error: 2 % fs maximum; 1 % typical
measurement error: 8 % fs maximum; 7 % typical
measurement error: 1 &deg;C in the range -50T50 &deg;C; 3&deg;C in the range 50T90 &deg;C
measurement error: 1.5 &deg;C in the range -20T115 &deg;C; 4 &deg;C in range outside of
-20T115 &deg;C
measurement error 1 &deg;C in the range -40T50 &deg;C; 3&deg;C in the range +50T90 &deg;C
programmable output: +5 Vdc &plusmn;2% or 12 Vdc &plusmn;10%, Imax = 50 mA
optional Ultracapacitor module (PCOS00UC20 or EVD0000UC0). If the controller operates constantly at temperatures near the upper limit of
60&deg;C it’s recommended to use the external module EVD0000UC0, where possible located in the coolest point of the panel. The PCOS00UC20
and EVD0000UC0 modules can be connected at the same time to the same controller, thus doubling the energy available to close the valves.
Important: The module only powers the valve driver and not the controller.
Tab. 2.l
pRack +0300025EN rel. 1.3 - 17.12.2015
14
ENG
2.2.11 Meaning of the inputs/outputs on the pRack pR300 S, M, L boards
Version
S, M, L
M, L
S, M, L
M, L
L
Connector
J1-1
J1-2
J2-1
J2-2
J2-3
J2-4
J2-5
J3-1
J3-2
J3-3
J3-4
J4-1
J4-2
J4-3
J4-4
J4-5
J4-6
J5-1
J5-2
J5-3
J5-4
J5-5
J5-6
J5-7
J5-8
J5-9
J6-1
J6-2
J6-3
J6-4
J7-1
J7-2
J7-3
J7-4
J7-5
J8-1
J8-2
J8-3
J8-4
J8-5
J9
J10
J11-1
J11-2
J11-3
J12-1
J12-2
J12-3
J12-4
J12-5
J13-1
J13-2
J13-3
J13-4
J13-5
J14-1
J14-2
J14-3
J15-1
J15-2
J15-3
J16-1
J16-2
J16-3
J16-4
J16-5
J17-1
J17-2
J17-3
J18-1
J18-2
J18-3
J19-1
J19-2
J19-3
J19-4
J19-5
J20-1
J20-2
J20-3
J20-4
J20-5
Signal
G
G0
B1
B2
B3
GND
+VDC
B4
BC4
B5
BC5
VG
VG0
Y1
Y2
Y3
Y4
ID1
ID2
ID3
ID4
ID5
ID6
ID7
ID8
IDC1
B6
B7
B8
GND
ID9
ID10
ID11
ID12
IDC9
ID13H
ID13
IDC13
ID14
ID14H
RX-/TXRX+/TX+
GND
C1
NO1
NO2
NO3
C1
C4
NO4
NO5
NO6
C4
C7
NO7
C7
NO8
C8
NC8/--C9
NO9
NO10
NO11
C9
NO12
C12
NC12/--NO13
C13
NC13
ID15H
ID15
IDC15
ID16
ID16H
Y5
Y6
B9
BC9
B10
Description
+24 Vdc or 24 Vac power supply
power supply reference
universal analogue input 1 (NTC, 0 to 1 V, 0 to 5 V ratiometric, 0…10 V, 0…20 mA, 4…20 mA)
universal analogue input 2 (NTC, 0 to 1 V, 0 to 5 V ratiometric, 0…10 V, 0…20 mA, 4…20 mA)
universal analogue input 3 (NTC, 0 to 1 V, 0 to 5 V ratiometric, 0…10 V, 0…20 mA, 4…20 mA)
common for analogue inputs
21 Vdc power supply for active probes (maximum current 200 mA)
passive analogue input 4 (NTC, PT1000, ON/OFF)
common for analogue input 4
passive analogue input 5 (NTC, PT1000, ON/OFF)
common for analogue input 5
power to optically-isolated analogue output, 24 Vac/Vdc
power to optically-isolated analogue output, 0 Vac/Vdc
analogue output no. 1, 0…10 V
analogue output no. 2, 0…10 V
analogue output no. 3, 0…10 V
analogue output no. 4, 0…10 V
digital input no. 1, 24 Vac/Vdc
digital input no. 2, 24 Vac/Vdc
digital input no. 3, 24 Vac/Vdc
digital input no. 4, 24 Vac/Vdc
digital input no. 5, 24 Vac/Vdc
digital input no. 6, 24 Vac/Vdc
digital input no. 7, 24 Vac/Vdc
digital input no. 8, 24 Vac/Vdc
common for digital inputs from 1 to 8 (negative pole for DC power supply)
universal analogue input 6 (NTC, 0 to 1 V, 0 to 5 V ratiometric, 0…10 V, 0…20 mA, 4…20 mA)
universal analogue input 7 (NTC, 0 to 1 V, 0 to 5 V ratiometric, 0…10 V, 0…20 mA, 4…20 mA)
universal analogue input 8 (NTC, 0 to 1 V, 0 to 5 V ratiometric, 0…10 V, 0…20 mA, 4…20 mA)
common for analogue inputs
digital input no. 9, 24 Vac/Vdc
digital input no. 10, 24 Vac/Vdc
digital input no. 11, 24 Vac/Vdc
digital input no. 12, 24 Vac/Vdc
common for digital inputs from 9 to 12 (negative pole for DC power supply)
digital input no. 13, 230 Vac
digital input no. 13, 24 Vac/Vdc
common for digital inputs 13 and 14 (negative pole for DC power supply)
digital input no. 14, 24 Vac/Vdc
digital input no. 14, 230 Vac
8-pin telephone connector for connecting a display terminal (not used)
6-pin telephone connector for connecting the standard pGDE user terminal
RX-/TX- connector for RS485 connection to the pLAN network
RX+/TX+ connector for RS485 connection to the pLAN network
GND connector for RS485 connection to the pLAN network
common for relays: 1, 2, 3
normally open contact, relay no. 1
normally open contact, relay no. 2
normally open contact, relay no. 3
common for relays: 1, 2, 3
common for relays: 4, 5, 6
normally open contact, relay no. 4
normally open contact, relay no. 5
normally open contact, relay no. 6
common for relays: 4, 5, 6
common for relay no. 7
normally open contact, relay no. 7/ normally open contact, relay no. 7 SSR 24 Vac/Vdc (*)
common for relay no. 7
normally open contact, relay no. 8/ only S-board: normally open contact, relay no. 8 SSR 24 Vac/Vdc, S board only (*)
common for relay no. 8
normally closed contact relay no. 8/ only S-board: not used, S board only (*)
common for relay: 9, 10, 11
normally open contact, relay no. 9
normally open contact, relay no. 10
normally open contact, relay no. 11
common for relay: 9, 10, 11
normally open contact, relay no. 12/ normally open contact, relay no. 12 SSR 24 Vac/Vdc (*)
common for relay no. 12
normally closed contact relay no. 12/ not used (*)
normally open contact, relay no. 13 / normally open contact, relay no. 13 SSR 24 Vac/Vdc (*)
common for relay no. 13
normally closed contact relay no. 13 / not used (*)
digital input no. 15, 230 Vac
digital input no. 15, 24 Vac/Vdc
common for digital inputs 15 and 16 (negative pole for DC power supply)
digital input no. 16, 24 Vac/Vdc
digital input no. 16, 230 Vac
digital input no. 5 0…10 V
digital input no. 6 0…10 V
passive analogue input 9 (NTC, PT1000, ON/OFF)
common for analogue input 9
passive analogue input 10 (NTC, PT1000, ON/OFF)
15
pRack +0300025EN rel. 1.3 - 17.12.2015
ENG
Version
Connector
J20-6
J20-7
J20-8
J20-9
J21-1
J21-2
J21-3
J21-4
J21-5
L
J21-6
J22-1
J22-2
J22-3
J22-4
J22-5
J23-1
J23-2
J23-3
J23-1
L
J23-2
J23-3
J24-1
J24-2
J24-3
J25-1
S, M, L, D
J25-2
J25-3
J26-1
J26-2
J26-3
J27-1
J27-2
J27-3
J27-4
J28-1
J28-2
J28-3
J28-4
J29-1
J29-2
D
J29-3
J29-4
J29-5
J29-6
J29-7
J29-8
J30-1
J30-2
J30-3
(*) depending on model
Signal
BC10
ID17
ID18
IDC17
NO14
C14
NC14/--NO15
C15
NC15/--C16
NO16
NO17
NO18
C16
EE+
GND
EE+
GND
+V term
GND
+5 Vref
EE+
GND
EE+
GND
1
2
3
4
1
2
3
4
GND
VREF
S1
S2
S3
S4
DI1
DI2
VBAT
G0
G
Description
common for analogue input 10
digital input no. 17, 24 Vac/Vdc
digital input no. 18, 24 Vac/Vdc
common for digital inputs 17 and 18 (negative pole for DC power supply)
normally open contact, Relais no. 14/ normally open contact, Relais no. 14 SSR 24 Vac/Vdc (*)
common for Relais no. 14
normally closed contact Relais no. 14/ not used (*)
normally open contact, Relais no. 15/ normally open contact, Relais no. 15 SSR 24 Vac/Vdc (*)
common for Relais no. 15
normally closed contact Relais no. 15/ not used (*)
common for Relais: no. 16, 17, 18
normally open contact, Relais no. 16
normally open contact, Relais no. 17
normally open contact, Relais no.18
common for Relais: no. 16, 17, 18
E- terminal for RS485 connection to the I/O expansion modules (not used)
E+ terminal for RS485 connection to the I/O expansion modules (not used)
GND terminal for RS485 connection to the I/O expansion modules (not used)
E- terminal for RS485 connection to the I/O expansion modules (not used)
E+ terminal for RS485 connection to the I/O expansion modules (not used)
GND terminal for RS485 connection to the I/O expansion modules (not used)
additional power supply terminal Aria (not used)
power supply common
power supply for 0/5 V ratiometric probes
E- terminal for RS485, BMS2 connection
E+ terminal for RS485, BMS2 connection
GND terminal for RS485, BMS2 connection
E- terminal for RS485, FIELDBUS 2 connection
E+ terminal for RS485, FIELDBUS 2 connection
GND terminal for RS485, FIELDBUS 2 connection
ExV connection, stepper motor power supply
ExV connection, stepper motor power supply
ExV connection, stepper motor power supply
ExV connection, stepper motor power supply
ExV connection, stepper motor power supply
ExV connection, stepper motor power supply
ExV connection, stepper motor power supply
ExV connection, stepper motor power supply
Earth for the signals
Active probe power supply
Probe 1 (pressure) or external signal 4…20mA
Probe 2 (temperature) or external signal 0…10V
Probe 3 (pressure) or external signal 4…20mA
Probe 4 (temperature)
Digital input 1
Digital input 2
Emergency power supply
Electrical power supply
Electrical power supply
Tab. 2.m
2.3 pRack pR300 S, M, D, L board dimensions
45
110
44
pR300
B
A
Fig. 2.e
A
B
B - with USB port and/or built-in terminal
B - with Ultracap module
Small
227,5
60
70
-
Medium
315
60
70
-
Buit-in driver
315
60
70
75
Large
315
60
70
-
Tab. 2.n
pRack +0300025EN rel. 1.3 - 17.12.2015
16
ENG
2.4 pRack pR300 general connection diagram
Small
24 Vac/230 Vdc
0 Vac/Vdc
24 Vac/230 Vac
0 Vac/Vdc
24 Vac/230 Vac
0 Vac/Vdc
J10
4
3
2
White
C8
GND
U5
J3
U4
+VDC
GND
U3
U1
White
Green
ID
GND
ID8
IDC1
U2
+VDC
GND
U3
U2
U1
Black
-
GND
+
ID7
ID6
ID5
ID4
ID3
ID2
Y4
ID1
Y1
VG0
VG
GND
U5
GND
U4
+VDC
Y3
4-20 mA Probe:
Ratiometric probe:
+VDC
GND
U3
U2
U1
J5
Y2
J4
J2
NC8
C7
1
RS485
BMS connections
B M S card
J3
GND
U3
U1
Ntc/Pt1000
U2
J2
+5 VREF
J24
GND
G0
G
24 Vac/Vdc
0 Vac/Vdc
+Vterm
FieldBus card
J15
J26 FBus2
pR300
J1
NO8
C7
J14
J13
J25 BMS2
NO7
C4
NO6
NO5
C4
J12
J11 pLAN
NO4
C1
NO3
NO2
C1
NO1
24 Vac/230 Vac
0 Vac/Vdc
pGDE pRack
Black
Green
(max 6 active probes)
Universal inputs
U1-U2-U3-U4-U5
(*)
*NOT USED Refer to technical leaﬂet to diﬀerent 4 -20 mA sensors model
ID
24 Vac/Vdc
0 Vac/Vdc
17
OUT 4
OUT 1
OUT 2
OUT 3
AO/DO
24 Vac/ Vdc
0 Vac/Vdc
pRack +0300025EN rel. 1.3 - 17.12.2015
ENG
Medium
24 Vac/230 Vdc
0 Vac/Vdc
24 Vac/230 Vac
0 Vac/Vdc
24 Vac/230 Vac
0 Vac/Vdc
J12
J11 pLAN
J10
4
3
2
C13
NC13
NO13
C12
NC12
NO12
C9
NO11
NO10
C9
NO9
C8
NC8
C7
1
-
GND
+
Black White
ID
GND
U5
GND
J3
U4
+VDC
GND
U3
U2
U1
White
Green
ID14H
ID14
IDC13
ID13
ID13H
IDC9
J8
ID12
ID11
ID10
ID9
GND
J7
U8
U7
U6
IDC1
J6
4-20 mA Probe:
+VDC
GND
U3
U2
Ratiometric Probe:
ID8
ID7
ID6
ID5
ID4
ID3
ID2
Y4
ID1
Y3
J5
Y2
Y1
VG0
VG
GND
U5
GND
RS485
BMS connections
J4
J3
U4
+VDC
GND
U3
U1
J18
J26 FBus2
B M S card
U1
GND
U3
U2
U1
J2
+VDC
Ntc/Pt1000
U2
J2
+5 VREF
GND
G0
G
24 Vac/Vdc
Vac/Vd
Vac
/Vdcc
0V
ac/Vdc
ac/
Vdc
dc
Vac/Vdc
+Vterm
FieldBus card
J24
J17
J16
J15
pR300
J1
NO8
C7
J14
J13
J25 BMS2
NO7
C4
NO6
NO5
C4
NO4
C1
NO3
NO2
C1
NO1
pGDE pRack
Black
Green
(*)
*NOT USED Refer to technical leaﬂet to diﬀerent 4 -20 mA sensors model
or
24 Vac/Vdc
24 Vac/Vdc
0 Vac/Vdc
pRack +0300025EN rel. 1.3 - 17.12.2015
18
0 Vac/Vdc
230 Vac
0 Vac/Vdc
ENG
Large
24 Vac/230 Vac
0 Vac/Vdc
C13
C16
NO18
NO17
NO16
NC13
NO13
C12
NC12
C9
NO 2
NO1
NO11
NO1
10
C9
C8
NO9
C16
NC15
J18
J23 FBus2
GND
U10
GND
ID17
ID13
IDC13
ID14
ID14H
IDC9
ID12
ID11
ID10
J8
GND
U4
U5
J3
+VDC
GND
ID
GND
ID9
U3
U1
U2
Bianco
Verde
ID18
U9
ID13H
Y6
Y5
ID16H
GND
J7
U8
ID16
IDC15
U6
J6
U7
ID15H
ID15
IDC1
J20
Sonda 4-20 mA:
+VDC
GND
U3
U1
U2
Bianco
ID8
ID7
ID6
ID5
ID4
ID3
ID2
Y4
ID1
Y3
Y2
Y1
VG0
VG
GND
U5
GND
J5
Sonda raziometrica:
Nero
J19
IDC17
-
GND
+
J22
RS485
BMS connections
J4
J3
U4
Nero
Verde
(*)
IDC17
ID18
ID17
GND
J20
U10
GND
U9
Y6
Y5
*NON USATO Per altri tipi di sensori 4 -20 mA fare riferimento al relativo foglio di istruzioni
or
24 Vac/Vdc
IDC17
ID17
ID18
GND
J20
U10
U9
Y6
Y5
GND
24 Vac/Vdc
0 Vac/Vdc
230 Vac
0 Vac/Vdc
0 Vac/Vdc
0 Vac/Vdc
OUT 5
OUT 6
+VDC
GND
U3
NC8
J21
B M S card
+VDC
GND
U3
U2
J2
U2
U1
+5 VREF
GND
J2
Ntc/Pt1000
U1
G0
G
24 Vac/Vdc
0 Vac/Vdc
+Vterm
FieldBus card
J24
C15
C7
1
NC14
2
J17
J16
NO15
3
J26 FBus2
pR300
J1
NO8
NO7
C7
4
C14
J10
J25 BMS2
J15
J14
J13
NO14
J12
J11 pLAN
C4
NO6
C1
NO3
NO2
C1
NO1
24 Vac/230 Vac
0 Vac/Vdc
pGDE pRack
19
pRack +0300025EN rel. 1.3 - 17.12.2015
ENG
Built-in Driver
CAREL ExV valve A
pGDE pRack
verde/green
marrone/brown
giallo/yellow
bianco/white
verde/green
marrone/brown
giallo/yellow
bianco/white
CAREL ExV valve B
shield
2
C13
NC1
13
NO1
13
C12
NC1
12
NO12
C9
NO11
NO1
10
C9
NO9
C8
NC8
C7
GND
U5
U4
GND
J3
+VDC
GND
U3
U2
U1
+VDC
Bianco
DI2
DI1
ID
4-20 mA Probe:
Verde
ID14H
ID14
IDC13
ID13
IDC9
ID13H
J8
ID12
ID11
ID10
ID9
GND
U8
U7
U6
IDC1
ID8
ID7
J6
S4
S3
S2
S1
VREF
GND
G
VBAT
C D
A B
G0
GND
+
Bianco
GND
U3
U2
U1
Nero
J29
J30
J7
ID6
ID5
ID4
ID3
ID2
Y4
ID1
Y3
Y1
VG0
VG
GND
U5
GND
U4
+VDC
+VDC
GND
U3
U2
U1
J2
J28
J5
Y2
J4
Ratiometric probe:
Ntc/Pt1000
J27
1
RS485
BMS connections
B M S card
J3
GND
U3
U1
U2
J2
+5 VREF
J24
GND
G0
G
24 Vac/Vdc
0 Vac/Vdc
+Vterm
FieldBus card
J1
18
1
3
2
4
3
J17
J16
J26 FBus2
pR300
J1
NO8
C7
4
J15
1
3
2
4
J10
J25 BMS2
NO7
C4
NO6
J14
J13
-
J12
J11 pLAN
NO5
C4
C1
NO3
NO2
C1
NO1
shield
Nero
Verde
(*)
*NOT USED Refer to technical leaﬂet to diﬀerent 4 -20 mA sensors model
Connection with other diﬀerent valve model
4
2
4
COMA
NOA
Key:
1 green
2 brown
6
1
5
4
3
3 white
4 red
pRack +0300025EN rel. 1.3 - 17.12.2015
3
5
2
3
5
5 black
6 blue
20
ratiometric pressure
transducer driver B
NTC driver B
1
1
3
ALCO
EX5/6
EX7/8
DANFOSS
ETS/CCM/CCMT
NTC driver A
Sporlan
SEI / SEH / SER
ratiometric pressure
transducer driver A
G
G0
VBAT
DI1
S4
S3
S2
S1
VREF
GND
J29
ENG
External Driver (suitable for S/M/L/D)
J10
4
3
2
C8
-
GND
+
IDC1
ID8
ID7
ID6
ID5
ID4
ID3
ID2
Y4
ID1
Y3
Y1
VG0
VG
GND
J5
Y2
J4
U5
GND
U4
+VDC
GND
24 Vac
RS485
BMS connections
B M S card
J3
U3
U1
U2
J2
+5 VREF
J24
GND
+Vterm
230 Vac
35 VA
TRADRFE240
(dedicated)
shield
2
4
NOA
3
198 serial address
1
G
G0
VBAT
G0
VBAT
G
2 AT
COMA
G0
G
J1
NC8
C7
1
J26 FBus2
pR300
FieldBus card
J15
J14
J13
J25 BMS2
NO8
C7
NO7
C4
NO6
NO5
C4
J12
J11 pLAN
NO4
C1
NO3
NO2
C1
NO1
pGDE pRack
DI1
DI2
S4
S2
S3
S1
VREF
GND
Ultracap Technology
GND Tx/Rx
Connection with other diﬀerent valve model
1
1
3
4
2
4
COMA
NOA
Key:
1 green
2 brown
6
1
5
4
3
3 white
4 red
ALCO
EX5/6
EX7/8
DANFOSS
ETS/CCM/CCMT
3
5
2
3
5 black
6 blue
21
5
NTC driver A
ratiometric pressure
transducer driver B
NTC driver B
Sporlan
SEI / SEH / SER
ratiometric pressure
transducer driver A
G
G0
VBAT
pRack +0300025EN rel. 1.3 - 17.12.2015
ENG
3.
INSTALLATION
• in residential environments, the connection cable between the pRack
3.1 General installation instructions
3.1.1
pR300 and the terminal must be shielded;
• there is no limit to the number of cables that can be connected to an
Installation procedure
individual terminal. The only limitation concerns the maximum current
crossing each terminal: this must not exceed 8 A;
• the maximum cross-section of the cable that connected to a terminal
is 2.5 mm2 (12 AWG);
• the maximum value of the twisting torque to tighten the screw on the
terminal (torque tightening) is 0.6 Nm;
Environmental conditions
Avoid assembling the pRack pR300 and the terminal in environments with the
following characteristics:
• temperature and humidity that do not conform to the rated operating
data of the product;
• strong vibrations or knocks;
• exposure to aggressive and polluting atmospheres(e.g.: sulphur and
•
•
•
•
•
Important:
• Installation must be performed according to the standards and
ammonia fumes, saline mist, smoke) so as to avoid corrosion and/or
oxidation;
strong magnetic and/or radio frequency interference (therefore avoid
installing the units near transmitting antennae);
exposure of the pRack pR300 to direct sunlight and to the elements
in general;
large and rapid ﬂuctuations in the room temperature;
environments containing explosives or mixes of ﬂammable gases;
exposure to dust (formation of corrosive patina with possible oxidation
and reduction of insulation).
legislation in force in the country where the device is used;
• for safety reasons the equipment must be housed inside an electrical
panel, so that the only accessible part is the display and the keypad;
• in the event of malfunctions, do not attempt to repair the device, but
rather contact the CAREL service centre;
• the connector kit also contains the stick-on labels.
3.1.3
Positioning the instrument inside the panel
The position of the instrument in the electrical cabinet must be chosen
so as to guarantee correct physical separation of the instrument from
the power components (solenoids, contactors, actuators, inverters, …)
and the connected cables. Proximity to such devices/cables may create
random malfunctions that are not immediately evident. The structure of
the panel must allow the correct ﬂow of cooling air.
3.1.2
3.2 Power supply
Power supply to the
pRack pR300 S, M;
L (controller with
terminal connected)
Power supply to
the pRack pR300
Compact
Wiring procedure
When laying the wiring, “physically “ separate the power part from the control
part. The proximity of these two sets of wires will, in most cases, cause
problems of induced disturbance or, over time, malfunctions or damage
to the components. The ideal solution is to house these two circuits in two
separate cabinets. Sometimes this is not possible, and therefore the power
part and the control part must be installed inside the same panel. For the
control Signals, it is recommended to use shielded cables with twisted wires.
•
•
•
•
•
•
Important:
controller using a class 2 safety transformer - 100 VA for the models
with built-in driver, and 50 VA for the pRack S, M, L models;
• the power supply to the pRack pR300 controller and terminal (or
pRack pR300 controllers and terminals) should be separated from the
power supply to the other electrical devices (contactors and other
electromechanical components) inside the electrical panel;
• if the power transformer secondary is earthed, check that the earth wire
corresponds to the wire that runs to the controller and enters terminal
G0. This applies to all the devices connected to the pRack pR300;
• a yellow LED indicates that power is connected to the pRack pR300.
each screw and insert the cable ends, then tighten the screws. When
the operation is completed, slightly tug the cables to check they are
suﬃciently tight;
separate as much as possible the sensor Signal, digital input and serial
line cables from the cables carrying inductive loads and power cables
to avoid possible electromagnetic disturbance. Never insert power
cables (including the electrical cables) and probe Signal cables in
the same conduits. Do not install the sensor cables in the immediate
vicinity of power devices (contactors, circuit breakers or similar);
reduce the path of the sensor cables as much as possible, and avoid
spiral paths that enclose power devices;
avoid touching or nearly touching the electronic components ﬁtted
on the boards to avoid electrostatic discharges (extremely damaging)
from the operator to the components;
if the power transformer secondary is earthed, check that the earth wire
corresponds to the wire that runs to the controller and enters terminal
G0; this applies to all the devices connected to the pRack pR300;
do not secure the cables to the terminals by pressing the screwdriver
with excessive force, to avoid damaging the pRack pR300;
for applications subject to considerable vibrations (1.5 mm pk-pk
10/55 Hz), secure the cables connected to the pRack pR300around 3
cm from the connectors using clamps;
if the product is installed in industrial environments (application of the EN
61000-6-2 standard) the length of the connections must be less than 30 m;
all the very low voltage connections (analogue and 24 Vac/Vdc digital
inputs, analogue outputs, serial bus connections, power supplies)
must have reinforced or double insulation from the mains network;
pRack +0300025EN rel. 1.3 - 17.12.2015
DC power supply: 48 Vdc (36 Vmin…72 Vmax)
AC power supply: 24 Vac +10/-15 %, 50/60 Hz
Maximum current P=11W, P=14VA, Imax=700mA
• power supplies other than those speciﬁed seriously damage the system;
• in the installation, it is recommended to supply just one pRack pR300
• Use cable ends suitable for the corresponding terminals. Loosen
•
28…36 Vdc +10/-20% or24 Vac +10/-15% 50…60 Hz;
Maximum current P= 15 W (power supply Vdc). P=40 VA
(Vac)
Tab. 3.a
If the control cables have to cross over the power cables, the intersections
must be as near as possible to 90 degrees, always avoiding running the
control cables parallel to the power cables.
•
Anchoring the pRack pR300
The pRack pR300is installed on a DIN rail. To fasten the unit to the DIN rail,
press it lightly against the rail. The rear tabs will click into place, locking
the unit to the rail. Removing the unit is just as Simple, using a screwdriver
through the release slot to lever and lift the tabs. The tabs are kept in the
locked position by springs.
3.3 Universal inputs/outputs
Universal inputs/outputs are distinguished by the letter U...
They can be conﬁgured from the application program for many diﬀerent
uses, such as the following:
• passive temperature probes: NTC, PTC, PT100, PT500, PT1000;
• active pressure/temperature/humidity probes;
• ratiometric pressure probes;
• current inputs, 0 to 20 mA or 4 to 20 mA;
• voltage inputs, 0 to 1 Vdc or 0 to 10 Vdc;
• voltage-free contact digital inputs and fast digital inputs;
• analogue outputs, 0 to 10 Vdc;
• PWM outputs.
Important:
• the universal inputs/outputs cannot be used as digital outputs.
22
ENG
Max. number of connectable analogue inputs
3.3.2
The maximum number of analogue inputs that can be connected to the
universal inputs/outputs depends on the type used.
For information on the maximum number of probes that can be
connected see the table at the beginning of this paragraph.
The pRack pR300 can be connected to 2-wire PT1000 sensors for all high
temperature applications; the operating range is: -100 to 200 &deg;C.
The inputs must be pre-conﬁgured for PT1000 Signals from the user
terminal or using the default value installation procedure.
The connection diagram is shown below:
Max. number of inputs connectable to
universal inputs/outputs
pCO5+
6
GND
U5
GND
U4
Tab. 3.c
Important: for correct measurement by the PT1000 sensor, each
sensor wire needs to be connected to a dedicated terminal, as
shown in Fig. 3.b.
Note: the two wires of the PT1000 sensors are equivalent, as they
have no polarity, therefore it is not necessary to follow any speciﬁc
order when connecting to the terminal block.
3.3.3
Connecting current pressure probes
For information on the maximum number of probes that can be
connected see the table at the beginning of this paragraph pRack pR300
can be connected to all CAREL SPK* series active pressure probes or any
other pressure sensors available on the market with 0 to 20 mA or 4 to 20
mA Signal. The inputs must be set for 0 to 20 mA or 4 to 20 mA signals
from the user terminal or using the default value installation procedure.
The connection diagram is shown below:
pR300
Fig. 3.a
GND
U5
J3
GND
J2
U1
+5VREF
J24
GND
+Vterm
G
G0
J1
GND
U5
GND
J3
U4
+VDC
GND
U3
U2
J2
U1
GND
+5VREF
+Vterm
G0
G
+VDC
PT1000 probe cable
1
2
pR300
Terminals
GND
U1...U10, S2, S4
GND
Terminals
GND
U1...U10
6
For information on the maximum number of probes that can be
connected see the table at the beginning of this paragraph.
The analogue inputs are compatible with 2-wire NTC sensors.
The inputs must be set for NTC Signals from the user terminal or using the
default value installation procedure. The connection diagram is shown
below:
Hardware Version
S, M, D, L
U3
Fig. 3.b
Hardware Version
S, M, D, L
Connecting universal NTC temperature sensors
J24
U2
U1
GND
+Vterm
+5VREF
G
6:
(max 4 su U1...U5,
3 on U6...U8,
2 on U9...U10)
9:
(max 4 on U1...U5,
3 on U6...U8,
2 on U9...U10)
Note: The table shows the maximum number of inputs that can be
connected. For example, a Small controller can be connected to a maximum
of ﬁve 0 to 1 Vdc inputs from controller-powered probes and a maximum of
ﬁve 0 to 1 Vdc inputs from externally powered probes. In any case, the
maximum number of inputs of both kinds that can be connected is 5.
J1
J3
10
Tab. 3.a
3.3.1
J2
U4
5
7:
(max 4 on U1...U5,
3 on U6...U8)
J24
+VDC
4
6:
(max 4 on U1...U5,
3 on U6...U8)
J1
GND
4
8
6
U3
- 0 to 5 V signals from
controller-powered
ratiometric probes
5
6
U2
- 0 to 20 mA/4 to 20 mA
inputs from externally
powered probes
5
pR300
G
Tot. max. 5
- 0 to 20 mA/4 to 20 mA
inputs from controllerpowered probes
3 (2 on U1...U5,
1 on U6...U8)
Tot. max. 10
- 0 to 1 Vdc/0 to 10 Vdc
signals from controllerpowered probes
- 0 to 1 Vdc/0 to 10 Vdc
signals from externally
powered probes
10
4 (2 on U1...U5,
1 on U6...U8,
1 on U9...U10)
Tot. max. 8
2
8
Tot. max. 7
- PT100 probes
Tot. max. 4
Analogue inputs
- NTC/PTC/PT500/PT1000
5
probes
Large
G0
Medium/ Built-in
driver/ Extralarge
Small
Tot. max. 9
Type of signal
Connecting PT1000 temperature sensors
Fig. 3.c
Hardware
Version
S, M, D, L
NTC probe cable
1
2
Terminals
Probe wire colour Description
+VDC
U1...U10, S1, S3
brown
white
Tab. 3.b
Power supply
Signal
Tab. 3.d
Note: the two wires of the NTC sensors are equivalent, as they have
no polarity, therefore it is not necessary to follow any speciﬁc order
when connecting to the terminal block.
Important: do not connect the green wire.
23
pRack +0300025EN rel. 1.3 - 17.12.2015
ENG
3.3.4
Connecting 0 to 5 V ratiometric pressure probes
Important:
For information on the maximum number of probes that can be
connected see the table at the beginning of this paragraph. pRack pR300
can be connected to any other pressure probes available on the market
with 0 to 5 V ratiometric sensor. The inputs must be set for 0 to 5 V Signals
from the user terminal or using the default value installation procedure.
The connection diagram is shown below:
• the maximum current available at the digital input is 5 mA (thus the
rating of the external contact must be at least 5 mA).
• these inputs are not optically-isolated.
3.3.7
Remote connection of the analogue inputs
The Sizes of the cables for the remote connection of the analogue inputs
are shown in the following table:
GND
U5
U4
GND
J3
+VDC
GND
U3
U2
J2
U1
GND
J24
+5VREF
+Vterm
G0
G
J1
Type of input Size [mm2] for
length up to 50 m
Size [mm2] for
length up to 100 m
NTC
PT1000
current
voltage
1.0
1.5
0.5
0.5
0.5
0.75
0.25
0.25
Tab. 3.h
Fig. 3.d
Hardware Terminals
Version
S, M, D, L
+5 V ref
GND
U1...U10, S1, S3
Probe wire
colour
black
green
white
If the product is installed in industrial enviroment (in compliance for
the EN 61000-6-2 standard) the length of the connections must be less
than 30m. In any case you should never exceed this length to have no
measurement errors.
Description
power supply
power supply reference
Signal
Tab. 3.e
3.3.5
3.4 Connecting the digital inputs
Connecting 0 to10 V active probes
The pRack pR300 features digital inputs for connecting safety devices,
alarms, device status and remote switches. These inputs are all optically
isolated from the other terminals at 24 Vac, 24 Vdc and some at 230 Vac
for M, D, L models.
Note: separate the sensor Signal and digital input cables as much
as possible from the inductive load and power cables, to avoid possible
electromagnetic disturbance.
Important:
GND
U5
GND
J3
U4
GND
U3
U1
U2
J2
+5VREF
J24
GND
+Vterm
G0
G
J1
+VDC
For information on the maximum number of probes that can be
connected see the table at the beginning of this paragraph. pRack pR300
can be connected to 0 to10 V sensors. The inputs must be set for 0 to10
V Signals from the user terminal or using the default value installation
procedure. The connection diagram is shown below:
• if the control voltage is drawn in parallel with a coil, ﬁt a dedicated RC
ﬁlter in parallel with the coil (the typical ratings are 100 Ω, 0.5 μF, 630 V).
• If connecting the digital inputs to safety systems (alarms), remember
that: the presence of voltage across the contact must be the normal
operating condition, while no voltage must represent an alarm
situation. This will ensure that any interruption (or disconnection) of
the input will also be Signalled. Do not connect the neutral in place
of an open digital input. Always interrupt the phase. The 24 Vac/Vdc
digital inputs have a Resistance of around 5 kΩ.
out H
M
out T
+ (G)
Fig. 3.e
Hardware Version
Terminals
+VDC
S, M, L, D
Description
All pRack digital inputs can be powered at 24 Vac and 24 Vdc, while for
models M, D, L only 230 Vac inouts are also available. To maintain the
optical isolation of the digital inputs, a separate power supply must
be used just for the digital inputs. The connection diagrams shown in
these ﬁgures, which while being the more common and the more
convenient, do not exclude the possibility of powering the digital inputs
independently from the power supply to the pRack pR300. In any case,
the inputs only have functional insulation from the rest of the controller.
power supply (any)
reference
Signal
GND
U1...U10
Tab. 3.f
3.3.6
Connecting analogue inputs selected as ON/OFF
24 Vac digital inputs
The following ﬁgure represents an example for connecting the 24 Vac
digital inputs on pRack models S, M, L.
GND
U5
GND
J3
U4
+VDC
GND
U3
U1
U2
J2
+5VREF
J24
GND
G0
G
J1
+Vterm
For information on the maximum number of probes that can be
connected see the table at the beginning of this paragraph. The pRack
pR300 allows some analogue inputs to be conﬁgured as voltage-free
digital inputs, not optically-isolated. The inputs must be pre-conﬁgured
as voltage-free digital inputs from the user terminal or using the default
value installation procedure.
G
G0
Fig. 3.f
Hardware Version
S, M, D, L
Terminals
GND
U1...U10
Digital input cable
1
2
Tab. 3.g
pRack +0300025EN rel. 1.3 - 17.12.2015
Fig. 3.g
24
ENG
24 Vdc digital inputs
The following ﬁgure represents an example for connecting the 24 Vdc
digital inputs on pRack models S, M, L.
Hardware Version
S, M, D
L
+
–
Fig. 3.h
230 Vac digital inputs
pRack M, D, L models have up to two groups of inputs powered at 230
Vac 50/60 Hz +10/-15%; each group features two inputs. The groups have
double insulation between them and can have diﬀerent voltages.
Module for converting a 0…10 V analogue output to an SPDT digital
output (code CONVONOFF0)
The module is used to convert a 0…10 V analogue output to an ON/OFF relay
output. The control Signal (at the input terminals, optically-isolated from the
rest of the module), to ensure the switching of the relay from OFF to ON, must
have a maximum amplitude of 3.3 V. The relay is SPDT, with max current of
10 A and max inductive load of 1/3 HP. The mechanical dimensions of the
module are 87x36x60 mm (2 DIN modules) with IP20 index of protection.
Important: within each group the inputs must be powered at the
same voltage to avoid short-circuits or powering lower voltage
inputs at 230 Vac.
The range of uncertainty of the switching threshold is from 43 to 90 Vac.
It is recommended to use a 100 mA fuse in series with the digital inputs.
The following ﬁgure represents an example for connecting the 230 Vac
digital inputs on pRack models M, D, L.
ID18
DC17
ID17
GND
U10
Y6
Y5
U9
GND
J20
ID16H
ID16
IDC15
ID15
ID15H
Optional modules
Module for converting a PWM analogue output to a liner 0…10 V and
4…20 mA analogue output (code CONV0/10A0)
The module is used to convert a PWM output (5 V pulses) to a liner 0…10
V and 4…20 mA analogue output (code CONV0/10A0). The control Signal
(at the input terminals optically-isolated from the rest of the module)
must have a maximum amplitude of 5V and a period between 8 ms and
200 ms. The 0…10 V output voltage can be connected to a maximum
load of 2 k:, with a maximum ripple of 100 mV. The 4…20 mA current
output can be connected to a maximum load of 280 :, with maximum
overshoot of 0.3 mA. The mechanical dimensions of the module are
87x36x60 mm (2 DIN modules) with IP20 index of protection.
24 Vdc
3.6 Connecting the digital outputs
3.6.1
Electromechanical relay digital outputs
The pRack pR300 features digital outputs with electromechanical relays.
For ease of installation, the common terminals of some of the relays have
been grouped together.
The following ﬁgure illustrates a connection example. If the following this
diagram is used, the current at the common terminals must not exceed
the rating (nominal current) of a single terminal (8 A).
110/230 - 24 Vac
Fig. 3.i
3.4.8
Reference
VG0
VG0
Tab. 3.i
3.5.2
J19
Terminals
Y1, Y2, Y3, Y4
Y1, Y2, Y3, Y4, Y5, Y6
Remote connection of the digital inputs
Important note: do not connect other devices to the digital inputs
IDn inputs.
The Sizes of the cables for the remote connection of the digital inputs are
shown in the following table:
Size (mm2) for length up to 50 m Size (mm2) for length until 100 m
0,25
0,5
Fig. 3.k
If the product is installed in industrial environments (application of the EN
61000-6-2 standard) the length of the connections must be less than 30 m.
This length shouldn’t be exceeded in any case, to avoid measurement errors.
The relays are divided into groups, according to the degree of insulation.
Inside each group, the relays have just basic insulation and thus must have
the same voltage (generally 24V ac or 110 to 230 Vac). Between the groups
there is double insulation and thus the groups can have diﬀerent voltages.
There is also double insulation from the rest of the controller.
3.5 Connecting the analogue outputs
3.5.1
Connecting 0…10 V analogue outputs
Changeover outputs
Some relays feature changeover outputs, the number of changeover
outputs depends on whether or not there are solid state relays (SSR) and
consequently varies depending on the models.
The pRack pR300 provides 0…10 V optically-isolated analogue outputs,
powered externally at 24 Vac/Vdc.
The ﬁgure below shows the electrical connection diagram; the 0V (zero)
of the power supply is also the reference for the output voltage:
Hardware version
Changeover relay reference,
without SSR model
PRK300**F* models
S
8
M, D
8, 12, 13
L
8, 12, 13, 14, 15
ID18
ID17
GND
U10
U9
GND
Y6
Y5
J20
Terminal
J15
J15, J17, J18
J15, J17, J18, J21
Tab. 3.j
3.6.2
Vout
Vout
Vout
Vout
Vout
Vout
24 Vac/Vdc
0V
Solid state relay (SSR) digital outputs
The pRack pR300 also features a Version with solid state relays (SSR) on
some models for controlling devices that require an unlimited number of
switching cycles and thus would not be supported by electromechanical
relays (e.g. screw compressor valves).
Fig. 3.j
25
pRack +0300025EN rel. 1.3 - 17.12.2015
ENG
3.6.4
Important: the SSRs can control resistive loads powered at 24 Vac/Vdc.
For details see paragraph 2.2.8.
The ﬁgure shows a connection example for resistive loads.
Remote connection of the digital outputs
The Sizes of the cables for the remote connection of the digital outputs
are shown in the following table:
Size [mm2]
0,5
1,5
2,5
24 Vac
AWG
20
15
14
Current [A]
2A
6A
8A
Tab. 3.m
If the product is installed in industrial environments (application of the EN
61000-6-2 standard) the length of the connections must be less than 30
m. This length shouldn’t be exceeded in any case.
3.7 pLAN electrical connections
Fig. 3.l
If the selected system conﬁguration involves the connection of more than
one pRack pR300 board in a pLAN, AWG20/22 twisted pair shielded cable
must be used, with capacitance between the wires less than 90 PF/m.
The maximum length of the pLAN network is 500 m with AWG22 twisted
pair shielded cable.
The boards should be connected in parallel with reference to plug-in
connector J5 (pRack Compact) or J11 (versions S, M, L).
The following ﬁgure illustrates correct applications for inductive loads.
external SSR
NO17
NO18
C16
C15
J21
J26 FBus2
C9
NO11
C9
NO9
NO10
J16
NO16
C8
NC8
J15
NC15
C7
1
NO15
2
NC14
3
C14
4
NO14
J14
J10
J25 BMS2
NO8
C7
C4
NO7
NO6
C4
C1
NO5
J13
J12
J11 pLAN
NO4
C1
NO3
NO2
NO1
input
load
management
J22
Important: follow the network polarity: RX/TX+ on one board must
be connected to RX/TX+ on the other boards; the same applies to RX/TX-.
pR300
ID16H
ID16
IDC15
ID15
ID15H
ID11
ID10
GND
U8
U7
J6
ID9
IDC1
U6
ID8
ID7
J7
ID5
ID4
ID3
ID2
ID1
Y4
Y3
J5
Y2
Y1
VG0
VG
GND
U5
GND
U4
+VDC
GND
The ﬁgure shows the diagram for more than one board connected in
a pLAN network; this is a typical application with more than one board
connected inside the same electrical panel.
J19
B M S card
J4
J3
U3
U1
U2
J2
+5 VREF
G0
GND
+Vterm
G
J24
ID6
FieldBus card
J1
AWG 20/22
AWG 20/22
NC1
2
NO1
NO2
NO13
C9
C12
C1
NO12
C9
NO9
NO11
NO10
C16
NO18
C16
NO17
C15
NC15
NO16
C8
NC8
C7
NO8
NC14
C7
U9
GND
U10
ID13
IDC1
VG 3
Y6
Y5
ID13H
ID16H
IDC9
ID12
GND
ID11
U5
GND
+VDC
U8
GND
ID10
GND
J7
J3
ID9
U4
ID16
IDC15
ID15
IDC1
U1
J20
FieldBus card
J2
J6
U7
U3
U6
U2
ID15H
+5 VREF
J24
ID6
GND
ID7
+Vterm
ID4
G0
ID3
G
ID2
Y4
ID1
Y3
ID5
J5
J1
Y2
VG0
VG
GND
U5
GND
U4
+VDC
Y1
J4
J3
GND
U3
U2
J2
U1
+5 VREF
GND
G0
+Vterm
G
J24
J23 FBu
J22
J19
B M S c ar d
J2
J1
J1J1
72
J16
J21
J26 FBus2
pR300
FieldBus card
J22
NO15
C14
C4
NO7
NO14
C4
NO6
C1
NO5
NO4
J15
J11 pLAN
2 1
J10
ID8
C16
NO17
NO18
NO16
NO3
C1
NC12
C12
C9
NO12
NO11
NO9
C16
3
pR300
J17
J21
J26 FBus2
J14
4
J25 BMS2
J16
C15
C14
C9
J15
NO10
C8
NC8
NO8
C7
1
NC14
2
NO15
3
NO14
4
J25 BMS2
NO7
C7
C4
NO6
C4
NO5
C1
NO3
NO1
NO4
J14
J10
J13
J10
input
load
management
NC15
24 Vac/Vdc
C1
NO2
J13
J12
J11 pLAN
external SSR
NO2
J12
J11 pLAN
Dedicated or the same of
G-G0 but not in common
with other external load
NO1
Fig. 3.m
pR300
U9
Y6
Y5
ID16H
ID16
IDC15
ID15
ID15H
GND
Fig. 3.a
ID13H
ID13
IDC9
ID12
ID11
ID10
GND
U8
ID9
J6
U7
U6
IDC1
ID8
ID7
J7
ID6
ID5
ID4
ID3
ID2
ID1
Y4
Y3
J5
Y2
VG0
VG
GND
Y1
J4
U5
GND
U4
+VDC
J19
B M S card
J3
GND
U3
U2
J2
U1
+5 VREF
J24
GND
G0
G
J1
+Vterm
FieldBus card
Important: pLAN connections are possible in which more than one
board is powered by diﬀerent transformers; for further details see
pRack system general manual: +030220335.
Fig. 3.n
The table below shows the reference outputs for pRack models ﬁtted
with SSR outputs.
Hardware version
S
M, D
L
Reference relay SSR
7, 8
7, 12
7, 8, 12, 13, 14, 15
Terminal
J14, J15
J14, J17
J14, J15, J17, J18, J21
3.7.1
Tab. 3.k
Important: the SSR relay load is powered at 24 Vac/Vdc, thus all the
other terminals in the group must be powered at 24 Vac/Vdc due to the
absence of double insulation within the group.
3.6.3
The connection can be made using 6-wire telephone cables (connector
J4 for Compact models or J10 for S, M, L) or shielded twisted pair cables
with 3-pin plug-in connectors (connector J5 for Compact models or J11
for S, M, L), as shown in the table
Summary table of digital outputs according to
the Versions available
NO
NC
Hardware
version
contacts contacts
PRK300**E* Models
S
6
M, D
9
L
12
PRK300**F* Models
S
7
M, D
10
L
13
-
Changeover
contact
n.ro
outputs
relay in SSR
2 (8, 13)
-
8
13
18
2 (7, 8)
2 (7, 12)
6 (7, 12, 13, 14, 15)
1 (8)
3 (8, 12, 13)
5 (8, 12, 13, 14, 15)
8
13
18
-
Cable type
6-pin phone
(J10)
AWG24
AWG20/22
Power supply distance
10 m
Power supply
Taken from pRack (150 mA)
200 m
500 m
Taken from pRack (150 mA)
Separate, via TCONN6J000
Tab. 3.n
For further details on connecting the terminals, see the pRack system
general manual: +030220335.
Tab. 3.l
pRack +0300025EN rel. 1.3 - 17.12.2015
Connecting the terminals
pRack pR300 uses PGD1 terminals, either built-in or external connected
via pLAN. Up to 2 external terminals can be connected, with pLAN
addresses 31 and 32.
26
ENG
4. START UP
4.1.1
4.1 Starting the ﬁrst time
Pre-conﬁgurations
After having correctly installed pRack, a number of preliminary operations
are required to conﬁgure the installation.
Start up
Select Config.Item:
PRE-CONFIGURATION
Tutorial: the pRack pR300 conﬁguration procedure varies according
to the complexity of the installation:
A. systems with only one board and maximum one external terminal.
In this case, simply connect the terminal (if not built-in), power up the
board and select one of the conﬁguration solutions described below.
B. systems with more than one board in pLAN or two external
terminals. IIn this case, the additional operations described in
Appendix A. 2 need to be completed before proceeding with
conﬁguration.
Choose one from the
configuration in the
list
Fig. 4.a
This solution is used to choose between fourteen conﬁgurations preloaded in the pRack pR300 software. For the description of the preconﬁgurations see the table below, while for the complete description of
each conﬁguration see Appendix A1.
pRack pR300 automatically conﬁgures the inputs and outputs as described
in paragraph 4.1.4; for details on the inputs and outputs associated with
each pre-conﬁguration, see the quick guide code +040000070.
The procedure for conﬁguring an installation described below is the same
for all system conﬁgurations that feature just one pRack pR300 board,
and for system conﬁgurations with more than one board connected in
a pLAN.
When ﬁrst starting the pRack pR300 board, after waiting around 1 minute,
a screen is shown for choosing the language used to display the program
(English or Italian).
Press ENTER ( ) to change the language displayed, while pressing ESC
displays the following screen.
4.1.2
Wizard
Start up
Select Config.Item:
WIZARD
Note:
• If no option is chosen within a time set by parameter and visible on the
screen, the current language remains selected.
• pRack pR300 is available as standard with English and Italian
Answer the questions
to have a fully
configuration
languages loaded on board. Other languages are available at
ksa.carel.com that can be loaded onto the control using the pRack
Manager software, following the procedure described in Chap. 10.
Fig. 4.b
This solution is used to obtain the recommended conﬁguration for the
speciﬁc installation. By responding to a series of questions, screen by
screen, the user is guided through the selection of the devices present.
Once the guided selection procedure has been completed, the end result
(report) is shown, and if the conﬁguration is suitable the parameters to
start operation of the pRack pR300 can be installed directly, including
those associated with the inputs and outputs as described in parag. 4.1.4.
After having selected the user interface language, the pRack pR300
software shows a screen for choosing between three possible system
conﬁguration solutions, as follows:
• Pre-conﬁgurations
• Wizard
• Advanced conﬁguration.
Important:
Note: after having conﬁgured the parameters using the Wizard, the
conﬁguration can be modiﬁed manually, within the context of the
selected system conﬁguration.
• after having conﬁgured the system, the conﬁguration can be modiﬁed,
it can be modiﬁed by repeating the same procedure, making sure the
Carel default values have been reset as described in paragraph 6.8.2.
• after having conﬁgured the system, power down the controller and
power up again.
Important: before starting the pRack pR300, carefully check the
settings made automatically by the software.
Tutorial: Appendix A.3 shows a conﬁguration example using the
Wizard for an installation with two suction lines.
Summary of pre-conﬁgurations
compressors
type
N&deg;
index
lines
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
RS2
RS3
RS3p
RS3i
RS4
RS4i
SL3d
SL5d
SW1
SW2
d-RS2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
Piston - Scroll
Piston - Scroll
Piston - Scroll
Piston - Scroll
Piston - Scroll
Piston - Scroll
12
d-RS3
2
Pistoni - Scroll
13
d-RS4
2
Pistoni - Scroll
Scroll
Scroll
Screw
Vite
Pistoni - Scroll
N&deg;
capacity step
modulation
No. of
comp.
alarms
2
3
3
3
4
4
3
5
1
2
2
2
3
3
4
4
1
Inverter
Inverter
Digital
Digital
Inverter
Inverter
1
1
2
3
2
3
1
1
2
2
1
1
1
1
3
3
2
2
-
fans
N&deg;
inverter
2
3
1
1
4
1
2
1
2
1
2
Inverter
Inverter
Inverter
Inverter
Inverter
-
3
3
1
1
Inverter
Inverter
Units in the pLAN(as well pRack pR300 Version
as the terminal)
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Small
Small
Medium
Medium
Medium
Large
Medium
Medium
Small
Small
Medium
1
Large
1,2
Medium + Medium
Tab. 4.a
(*) conﬁguration not available in versions 1.0 and 1.1 of the pRack software.
27
pRack +0300025EN rel. 1.3 - 17.12.2015
ENG
4.1.3
Advanced conﬁguration
Start up
Select Config.Item:
ADVANCED CONFIGURATION
It only defines the
structure of the plant
For very expert users
This solution is used to establish the conﬁguration of the pLAN structure
required for correct system operation.
Once the procedure for selecting the various factors that aﬀect the ﬁnal
conﬁguration has been completed, the pRack pR300 software veriﬁes
whether the pLAN conﬁguration is exact and prepares the user interface
for conﬁguration of the parameters that need to be set manually by the
user.
Important: this conﬁguration solution is only recommended for
expert users, as all the system parameters need to be set manually.
4.1.4
Associating the inputs and outputs
When using pre-conﬁgurations and the wizard, pRack pR300 can
automatically associate the board’s inputs and outputs with the various
functions.
For the wizard only, after having conﬁgured the lines, automatic association
can be chosen as an option. If choosing not to use this function, the I/Os
need to be conﬁgured manually, according to requirements.
The criteria applied for automatic association are described below.
Digital outputs
pRack pR300 assigns in order:
• Compressor outputs: ﬁrst the SSR outputs for screw or Digital Scroll™
then the starting outputs, the capacity control valves and the inverter,
if present
• Fan outputs
• Global alarm.
Digital inputs
pRack pR300 assigns in order:
• High and low pressure switches (HP and LP)
• Compressor alarms
• Fan alarms
Note: pRack pR300 can also use certain analogue inputs as digital
inputs, nonetheless the common HP and LP pressure switches are always
associated with actual digital inputs.
Analogue inputs
pRack pR300 assigns in order:
• Pressure or temperature control probes for 1 or 2 lines, according to the
settings made. The types of probe asSigned as default are 4…20 mA
or 0 to 5 V (ﬁrst 4…20 mA, then 0 to 5 V if necessary) for the pressure
probes, NTC for the suction temperature probes and HTNTC for the
condensing temperature probes;
• Suction temperature probe on line 1: if possible this is associated with
input B3, otherwise the ﬁrst free input;
• Discharge temperature probe on line 1;
• Suction temperature probe on line 2;
• Discharge temperature probe on line 2.
Analogue outputs
pRack pR300 assigns in order:
• Compressor inverters for 1 or 2 lines;
• Fan modulating devices for 1 or 2 lines.
pRack +0300025EN rel. 1.3 - 17.12.2015
28
ENG
5.
USER INTERFACE
• the other information shown in menu branch A.a. varies according to
5.1 Graphic terminal
the system conﬁguration. For two line systems, pressing
from the
main screen accesses a diﬀerent screen based on the starting point
(line 1, line 2).
The pRack pR300 user interface is represented by the pGD1 terminal,
panel or built-in versions.
The functions associated with the 6 buttons on the pGD1 terminal are the
same on all the screens and are described in the table below.
Customised main screen
pRack pR300 oﬀers the possibility to conﬁgure the information displayed
on the main screen and the second screen (pressing DOWN) as desired.
For example, information on speciﬁc probes with physical readings
(pressure or temperature), no longer grouped by screen but rather
customised row-by-row on the display. The basic structure comprises two
screens that are scrolled by pressing Up and Down; all the information
can be conﬁgured for display on the main screen relating to pressure or
temperature, the characteristic that is not selected will then be displayed
on the secondary screen, only if signiﬁcant.
Functions of the 6 buttons
Button
Function associated
(ALARM)
displays the list of active alarms and accesses the alarm log
used to enter the main menu tree
(UP)
(DOWN)
(ENTER)
returns to the higher level screen
scrolls a list upwards or increases the value highlighted by
the cursor
scrolls a list downwards or decreases the value
highlighted by the cursor
Main screen
Secondary screen
enters the selected submenu or conﬁrms the set value.
Tab. 5.a
&Icirc;
&Iacute;
The LEDs associated with the buttons have the following meanings.
Meaning of LEDs
LED
Red
Fig. 5.d
Button Meaning
Flashing: active alarms present and not acknowledged
Steady: alarms present and acknowledged
In the example, a suction line with control by pressure has been
conﬁgured, the main screen displays the values read by the suction and
condensing pressure probes, while the superheat is displayed in degrees
centigrade; the secondary screen will show the converted temperatures
of the suction and condensing pressure probe readings, together with
the description of superheat by pressure, which is not displayed as this
information would not be signiﬁcant. By default the main screen will
continue to show the same information as always displayed on the pR100
(depending on the type of conﬁguration: SUCTION&amp;CONDENSER, rather
than SUCTION and the type of control PRESSURE/TEMPERATURE).
Yellow
pRack pR300 on
Green
pRack pR300 powered
Tab. 5.b
5.2 Description of the display
There are three fundamental types of screens shown to the user:
• Main screen
• Customised main screen
• Menu screen
• Screen for displaying/setting the parameters
When starting the ﬁrst time, the main screen will reﬂect the settings
made. Custom conﬁguration of the main screen is then performed
subsequently, as described below:
The conﬁguration is made under Settings -&gt; Language in screen Fb04
Main screen
The main screen is the screen that the software on board pRack pR300
automatically returns to 5 minutes after the last button was pressed.
An example of the main screen is shown in the ﬁgure, highlighting the
ﬁelds and icons used:
1
pRack 14:30 20/01/10
2
4.16barg
Suction:
Condensing 12.06barg
3
Superheat:
Unit OFF by
keyboard
4.7K
On this screen, users can choose whether to conﬁgure the part relating to
the probes, or the bottom bar with the percentages or number of active
peripherals in the circuit. On screen Fb04, go to the ﬁeld underneath “Probe
conﬁguration”, change the value to“CONFIGURE”and press Enter. The following
screen (Fb05) is displayed, which shows the layout of the main screen with the
modiﬁable ﬁelds for each row. The following options are available:
4
Probe
Suction
Condenser
Superheat
L1 – Suction
L2 – Suction
L1 – Condenser
L2 – Condenser
Suction temperature
L1 - Suction temperature
L2 - Suction temperature
Discharge temperature
L1 – Discharge temperature
L2 – Discharge temperature
Auxiliary
L1 - Auxiliary
L2 - Auxiliary
L1 - Superheat
L2 - Superheat
EVD1 - Condenser
EVD2 - Condenser
5
Fig. 5.a
1
2
3
4
5
Time and date
Main values.
Unit status (unit oﬀ ) or compressor and fan status (unit on)
Active alarm Signal and manual operation
Access further information screens (menu branch A.a) by pressing button
Note:
• the information shown on the main screen varies according
to the system conﬁguration (one line, two lines, two lines with
shared condenser) and the type of control value used (pressure or
temperature). For two line systems, a parameter is used to select which
line is shown ﬁrst.
Description
Suction used for single suction line
Condenser used for single condenser line
Superheat used for single suction line
Suction on line 1
Suction on line 2
Condenser on line 1
Condenser on line 2
Suction temperature for single suction line
Suction temperature on line 1
Suction temperature on line 2
Discharge temperature for single suction line
Discharge temperature on line 1
Discharge temperature on line 2
Auxiliary probe for single suction line
Auxiliary probe on line 1
Auxiliary probe on line 2
Superheat on line 1
Superheat on line 2
Condenser line 2 connected to driver 1
Condenser line 2 connected to driver 2
Tab. 5.c
29
pRack +0300025EN rel. 1.3 - 17.12.2015
ENG
After having conﬁgured the required information, choose the
characteristic to be displayed on the main screen, Pressure or Temperature.
Double line conﬁguration
To exit this screen, simply press Esc and return to the Language menu.
Information on bottom bar:
In screen Fb04, go on the ﬁeld underneath the description “Info
conﬁguration”, change the value to “CONFIGURE” and press Enter.
The bottom bar can display information relating to a single line or double
line; for single line, select whether to display L1 or L2.
In conﬁgurations that feature control of two suction lines, 4 diﬀerent
percentages can be shown from the values described in the previous
table The customised main screen is simply an option that is available
following conﬁguration of the main screen in the Wizard.
Menu screen
An example of a menu screen is shown in the ﬁgure below:
Main menu
Single line conﬁguration
5/9=
D.Condensers
E.Other functions
F.Settings
The top right corner shows the selected item and the current password
and
buttons
level (for details see the following paragraph). The
accesses the selected
are used to select the desired menu item, while
item.
Screen for displaying/setting the parameters
An example of a screen for displaying/setting the parameters is shown in
the ﬁgure, also highlighting the ﬁelds and icons used:
As can be seen in the ﬁgure, the bottom part of the screen displays 2
integer values (N1 and N2) and 2 percentages; the icons shown will
depend on the selected information.
Value
L1 –
Compressors
L2 –
Compressors
L1 – Fans
L2 – Fans
L1 – Valves
L2 - Valves
Description Nx
Number of active
compressors on L1
Number of active
compressors on L2
Number of active fans
on L1
Number of active fans
on L2
Number of active
compressors on L1 that
control EVS valves
Number of active
compressors on L2 that
control EVS valves
Description Ix%
Active compressor capacity as % on L1
Active compressor capacity as % on L2
Active fan power as %
on L1
Active fan power as % L1
1
Icon
3
L1-AI Status
Bab01
Suction press.probe
PLB1
B1
4-20mA
2
4.39barg
Upper value: 7.0barg
Lower value: -0.5barg
Calibration: 0.0barg
Percentage of valve capacity request from L1
Fig. 5.b
1
2
3
Percentage of valve capacity request from L2
Menu branch identiﬁer
Screen identiﬁer
Parameter
The screen identiﬁer uniquely identiﬁes the menu branch and the
screen: the ﬁrst characters indicate the menu branch, while the last two
alphanumeric digits identify the order of the screen inside the menu, for
example screen Bab01 is the ﬁrst screen in menu B.a.b.
Note: The information on the screens may vary according to the
password level used to access the menu.
pRack +0300025EN rel. 1.3 - 17.12.2015
30
ENG
5.3 Password
pRack pR300 manages three levels of password:
• User
• Maintenance
• Manufacturer
Each level includes the same rights as the lower levels, that is, the
Manufacturer can access all the screens and parameters, the Maintenance
can access the screens and parameters available in the Maintenance and
User levels, while the User can only access the screens and parameters
available in the User level.
Note: All levels display the main screens and the other information
screens.
a prompt is shown to enter the password, which
When pressing
remains active for 5 minutes after the last button is pressed.
The menu screens show their own password level using an icon at the
top right: 1 line: user, 2 lines: maintenance, 3 lines: manufacturer.
The password level can be changed from menu branch F.d. at any time.
The password can also be changed in the corresponding menu branch.
5.4 Description menu
Main menu – Function tree
The following general rules apply to the user interface:
• The parameters are grouped by functions and where necessary
repeated, for example the status of the compressors inputs/outputs is
visible in both branch C.a.a (Compressors), and in branch B.a (Inputs/
Outputs)
• The parameters are grouped by type of access, ﬁrst User then
Maintenance then Manufacturer
• The most frequently used parameters are indicated ﬁrst, the less
frequently used are last
• Each user only sees the parameters and menu items that are available
for that access level
• Only the screens and parameters corresponding to the selected
system conﬁguration are visible, that is, corresponding to the devices
conﬁgured. The exception to this rule involves the screens relating to
functions that can be enabled/disabled (e.g. set point compensation),
which are visible even when disabled.
Regardless of the current screen displayed, pressing the
accesses the main menu, as shown below:
button
31
pRack +0300025EN rel. 1.3 - 17.12.2015
ENG
A.Unit status
a.Main info
b.Set point
c.On/Off
a.Status
B.In/Out
C.Compressors
a.Line 1 (*)
D.Condensers
b.Line 2 (*)
a.Line 1 (*)
E.Other func.
b.Line 2 (*)
a.Oil
a.Digital in
b.Analog in
c.Digital out
d.Analog out
a.Digital out
b.Analog out
a.Digital out
b.Analog out
a.I/O status
b.Control
c.Op. hours
d.Energy saving
e.Alarms
f.Config.
g.Advanced
….
a.I/O status
b.Control
c.EEV
d.Energy saving
e.Alarms
f.Config.
g.Advanced
….
a.Line 1 (*)
b.Subcool
b.Line 2 (*)
a.Line 1 (*)
c.Economiser
b.Line 2 (*)
a.Line 1 (*)
d.Liquid inj.
b.Line 2 (*)
a.Line 1 (*)
e.Heat recovery
b.Line 2 (*)
a.Line 1 (*)
b.Manual op.
c.Test
f.Generic func.
g.ChillBooster
h.DSS (*)
i.EVS
F.Settings.
a.Clock
b.Languages
c.BMS
d.Password
a.Log
b.Prevent
G.Safety
c.Alarm config.
H.Info
I.Setup
a.Pre-configurations
b.Wizard
c.Advanced config.
d.Default
(*) this menu level is only visible for system conﬁgurations with two lines.
Note:
• The ﬁgure illustrates the maximum menu conﬁguration visible with
the Manufacturer password. If accessing with the User or Maintenance
password, only the menu items available are visible
• For some menu items, access is possible with diﬀerent password levels
(e.g. I/O status), but the information available on the screens changes.
pRack +0300025EN rel. 1.3 - 17.12.2015
32
b.Line 2 (*)
a.Stages
b.Modulation
c.Alarms
d.Time bands
e.I/O status
a.Line 1 (*)
b.Line 2 (*)
a.I/O status
b.Settings
a.Temperature control
b.Manual management
c.I/O status
d.Control
e.Valve configuration
f.Driver configuration
aTime bands
b.Adjust
a.Line 1 (*)
b.Line 2 (*)
a.Line
b.Line
a.Line
b.Line
1
2
1
2
(*)
(*)
(*)
(*)
a.I/O status
b.Settings
….
a.I/O status
b.Settings
c.EEV
….
a.I/O status
b.Settings
c.EEV
….
a.I/O status
b.Settings
….
a.I/O status
b.Settings
….
a.I/O status
b.Settings.
….
ENG
6.
FUNCTIONS
Where not expressly indicated or where it is clear that the description
refers to one speciﬁc line rather than another (e.g.: compressor or fan
management), the descriptions are considered as being common to all
lines; any speciﬁc Situations are described on a case-by-case basis.
pRack pR300 can manage up to 2 suction lines and 2 condenser lines.
Many of the functions described in this chapter apply in the same way
to all the lines (e.g.: control, rotation), while others apply in the same way
to the suction lines (e.g.: oil management). The exception involves the
generic functions that apply, irrespective of line, suction or condenser, to
pRack boards with pLAN addresses from 1 to 4.
Control
Compressors
Energy saving
Accessory functions
Function
Unit On-Oﬀ
P+I control
Control in Neutral zone
Modulation in Neutral zone
Control with backup probes
Rotation
Modulation device
Screw compressors
Reciprocating and scroll compressors
Digital Scroll™ compressors
Bitzer CRII compressors
Fan management
Set point compensation
Floating set point
Oil management
Subcooling
Economizer
Liquid injection
Heat recovery
Generic functions (*)
ChillBooster
DSS
Below is a chart of the main functions described and their ﬁeld of
application:
L1 suction
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
(*)
√
L2 suction
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
(*)
√
L1 condens.
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
(*)
√
-
L2 condens.
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
(*)
√
-
Tab. 6.a
(*) not linked to lines, but rather the pLAN address of the boards
The functions are described in detail in the following paragraphs.
Note: Certain special conditions or functions in the pRack software
cause the unit to shutdown:
• Conﬁguration of some parameters: e.g. inputs/outputs, conﬁguration
of compressors, inverter parameters.
• Installation of default parameters
• Manual management
6.1 Unit On-Oﬀ
The unit can be switched on and oﬀ from:
• User terminal
• Supervisor
• Digital input
On-oﬀ from the user terminal and the conﬁguration parameters are
available under the main menu, branch A.c, and are diﬀerentiated based
on the access level; the User password allows display only.
6.2 Control
pRack pR300 can manage two types of control:
• Proportional band (P, P+I);
• Neutral zone (ﬁxed times, variable times).
On-oﬀ from the supervisor and from the digital input and start-up after
a blackout (with speciﬁc delay, to avoid continuous starts and stops in
the event of instability in the power supply) must be enabled using the
parameters visible only with the Manufacturer password.
Both types of control can be applied to both compressors and
condensers, according to the settings deﬁned during start-up or in main
menu branches C.a.b/C.b.b and D.a.b/D.b.b.
On-oﬀ from the digital input is equivalent to an enabling Signal, that is, if
the digital input is Oﬀ the unit cannot be switched on in any other way,
while if is On, the unit can be switched on or oﬀ in any other way, with
the same priority (the most recent control has precedence, whatever the
origin), as shown in the ﬁgure:
The type of control chosen is independent for each line present, either
suction or condenser.
In addition, pRack pR300 can use as the reference for control either the
pressure or the converted temperature, or the temperature read by probe
if there is no pressure probe, even if reference is only made to pressure
below.
Digital Input
Supervisor
The control set point can be compensated by an oﬀset linked to digital
inputs, probes, supervisor or time bands, for details see paragraph 6.5
relating to compressor and fan energy saving.
Unit On/Off
Both types of control are described below, and are valid for both control
of suction pressure and condensing pressure, and operation with backup
probes and/or probes not working.
User interface
Fig. 6.a
When there are two suction and condenser lines, on-oﬀ is independent for
each line, while when there are two suction lines and one condenser line,
it is independent for the suction lines, while the condenser line stops when
both suction lines are oﬀ, and starts when at least one suction line is on.
33
pRack +0300025EN rel. 1.3 - 17.12.2015
ENG
6.2.1
Proportional band
6.2.2
The operating principle is normal proportional or proportional + integral
control (P, P+I).
Neutral zone
The operating principle is schematised in the following ﬁgure:
Regulation request
The control set point is central, consequently - for proportional control
only - operation is schematised in the following ﬁgure:
Decrease
zone
Regulation request
Neutral
zone
Increase
zone
100%
100%
Differential
Differential
Regulation
probe value
Force off
Diff.
Setpoint
Regulation
probe value
Diff.
Setpoint
Fig. 6.b
Fig. 6.e
For example, for 4 devices with the same capacity and proportional only
control, start-up occurs as shown in the ﬁgure:
Inside the neutral zone the capacity request sent by the controller is
constant (except when there is a modulation device and modulation is
enabled inside the neutral zone, as described in the following paragraph)
and the value satisﬁes the temperature control request in those speciﬁc
operating conditions, therefore within this zone no device is stopped or
started.
Devices activation
C1
C2
Differential
C3
In the decrease zone, the request also decreases at a rate that depends on
the deviation from the set point, and vice-versa in the increase zone the
request increases proportionally to the deviation.
C4
Differential
For the increase and decrease zones, the following can be used:
• Fixed times: the request decreases or increases constantly as time
elapses.
• Variable times: the request decreases or increases more quickly
(according to the settings) as the deviation from the set point increases.
Suction
pressure
Setpoint
Fig. 6.c
Note: The previous ﬁgure shows the increase and decrease with
ﬁxed times.
With P+I control, added to the eﬀect of the proportional action described
above is the integral action, used to achieve a null control error in steady
operation, as shown in the ﬁgure:
For control in Neutral zone, the parameters shown in the ﬁgure must be
set:
NZ timings
Regulation variable
P+I
Decrease
zone
P
Neutral
zone
Increase
zone
Max time 100%
Max time 0%
Setpoint
Min time 0%
time
Min time 100%
Fig. 6.d
The integral action depends on the time and the deviation from the set
point. This modiﬁes the request if the control value does not approach
the set point for some time.
The integral time setting represents how fast integral control is
implemented:
• low values determine fast and intense control action
• high values determine slower and more stable control action
It is recommended to not set a value that is too low for the integral time,
to avoid instability.
Decr. Diff.
Diff.
Incr. Diff.
Regulation
probe value
Setpoint
Fig. 6.f
As well as the decrease and increase diﬀerentials, 4 times need to be set,
two for each zone, which represent the maximum and minimum time
to reach the request, equal to 0% or 100%, for the decrease and increase
respectively.
Note: the set point is in the centre of the activation band, therefore
when reaching the set point some devices are on, even with purely
proportional control.
pRack +0300025EN rel. 1.3 - 17.12.2015
Diff.
Tutorial: the decrease/increase times (minimum and maximum)
represent the time needed to change from maximum to minimum
capacity and vice-versa, and not the time between the deactivation/
activation of the individual device. For example, in the case of 4 devices
with the same capacity, an increase time of 180 s means that one device
is activated every 45 s.
34
ENG
In the situation shown in the ﬁgure, the request sent by the controller
decreases/increases slowly as soon as the controlled value is outside of
the Neutral zone, while it decreases/increases quickly the further the
controlled value moves away from the Neutral zone; in this way the
response of the system is faster when further from steady conditions.
6.2.5
Note: When using ﬁxed times, the maximum and minimum must
be set to the same value. In this case, the request sent by the
controller decreases/increases constantly inside the deactivation/
activation diﬀerential.
6.2.3
Auxiliary control
pRack pR300 oﬀers the possibility to control the compressors on a single
suction line (or L1 for double lines) using an auxiliary probe. Normal
control based on the suction pressure probe reading (or converted
temperature) can be replaced by control based on a diﬀerent probe.
This solution can manage the secondary refrigerant in “water chiller”
or “pumped” systems, oﬀering greater system stability and at the same
time guaranteeing compressor safety via the suction probe, which must
always be installed.
Auxiliary control is enabled under “Compressors -&gt; Control”, selecting the
type of control (by temperature or pressure) and the type of refrigerant,
which may diﬀer from the main one.
Modulation in Neutral zone
pRack pR300 can activate a speciﬁc function inside the Neutral zone if
modulating devices are used (e.g.: inverters).
This function can be enabled in main menu branch C.a.g/C.b.g or D.a.g/
D.b.g.
Modulation in Neutral zone is used to vary the request sent by the
controller inside the Neutral zone proportionally so as to enter the
decrease zone with the minimum request and the increase zone with the
maximum request, meaning a device can be immediately deactivated/
activated when exiting the Neutral zone.
This makes it possible to remain longer inside the neutral zone without
starting or stopping any device.
An example of this operation is shown in the ﬁgure:
The function does not need to be enabled if &quot;water chiller&quot; is set in the
installation Wizard
Regulation request
Neutral zone
100%
as auxiliary control by temperature probe is enabled automatically.
Choosing a &quot;pumped&quot; system, on the other hand, automatically enables
auxiliary control by pressure probe (see Appendix A.2)
Once the auxiliary probe is enabled on screen Cab20, the associated
universal input, the probe type, the correct limits (for pressure probes)
and calibration (if necessary) can be selected under “Inputs Outputs -&gt;
Status -&gt; Analogue inputs”
P1
Regulation probe value
Fig. 6.g
When entering the Neutral zone, the pRack pR300 software calculates
how the request needs to change in order to exit the Neutral zone at
minimum or maximum output, and applies one of the two values
according to the trend in variation in the control variable. For example, at
point P1 in the ﬁgure, the trend of the two requests is represented by the
segments with thin lines, and the request ‘reverses’ because at that point
the control variable has started increasing in value again.
The type of control, band limits or diﬀerentials and the set point need
to be conﬁgured under “Compressors -&gt; Control”, in the same way as for
traditional control.
The limits for the auxiliary probe alarms, are set under “Compressors -&gt;
Alarms” and need to be conﬁgured depending on the type of probe and
refrigerant. When an alarm goes oﬀ, this is saved in the log, with a special
screen shown when pressing the alarm bell.
Note: When exiting the Neutral zone, it is possible that the request
is not at the minimum or maximum value, where limitation is
enabled for of the modulating device variation speed.
6.2.4
Control with backup probes and/or probes not
working
pRack pR300 can use backup control probes that are activated when the
normal control probes are not working.
The backup probes must be enabled in main menu branch C.a.g/C.b.g
or D.a.g/D.b.g.
When diﬀerent pRack boards are used to manage the suction and
condenser lines, the backup suction pressure probe must be connected
to the board that manages the suction line, while the backup condensing
pressure probe can be connected either to the board that manages the
suction line or the board that manages the condenser line.
If the main control probes are not working and no backup probes are
ﬁtted, or the backup probes are also not working, or the corresponding
temperature probes are also not working, ﬁxed values are used for the
control request, set in main menu branch C.a.g/C.b.g or D.a.g/D.b.g.
Note: when auxiliary control is enabled, it is recommended to also
enable the prevent low suction pressure function, see paragraph 8.3.4
(prevent low suction pressure). In case of pumped systems, don't
conﬁgure the second condensing line.
35
pRack +0300025EN rel. 1.3 - 17.12.2015
ENG
6.3 Compressors
6.3.2
pRack pR300 can manage up to 2 suction lines with diﬀerent types of
compressors and capacity modulation devices, applying common types
of device rotation and controlling both the start mode and the safety
times for each type of compressor, as well as a number of accessory
functions.
pRack pR300 can manage 4 diﬀerent types of device rotation:
• FIFO (First In First Out): the ﬁrst device to start is also the ﬁrst to stop
• LIFO (Last In First Out): the last device to start is the ﬁrst to stop
• By time: the device with the least number of operating hours starts and
the device with highest number of operating hours stops
• Custom: the on/oﬀ sequences are deﬁned by the user
The compressor functions and related parameter settings are enabled
from main menu branch C.a/C.b.
Note: Diﬀerent Sizes of compressors can only be managed with
Custom rotation.
These features and functions are described in detail in the following
paragraphs.
6.3.1
The type of rotation is selected and the corresponding parameters set
during the start-up procedure or in main menu branch C.a.f/C.b.f.
The activation thresholds are calculated diﬀerently depending on
whether FIFO, LIFO, time or Custom rotation is used:
Possible compressor conﬁgurations
pRack pR300 can manage diﬀerent types of compressors:
• Reciprocating
• Scroll
• Screw
Moreover, a capacity modulation device is allowed for each suction line,
which may be one of the following, according to the type of compressor:
Device activation threshold calculation
Rotation
FIFO
LIFO
By time
Custom
Compressors and modulation devices
Compressors
Reciprocating
modulation devices
Inverter
Inverter
Digital Scroll™
Inverter
Continuous capacity control
Modulating capacity control
Scroll
Screw
Bitzer CRII
Rotation
Threshold calculation
Static: the range of variation of the control request is divided equally
between the number of stages available
Dynamic: the thresholds are calculated depending on the
capacity eﬀectively available
Tab. 6.d
Example 1: FIFO rotation, 4 compressors of the same capacity
without load stages.
The activation thresholds are 25, 50, 75 and 100 %.
Tab. 6.b
Note: The same modulation device is used on each line.
The maximum number of compressors and load stages per line varied
according to the type of compressor:
Compressors and modulation devices
Compressors
Reciprocating
Scroll
Screw
Bitzer CRII
Maximum No.
12
12
2
2
C2
C1
C3
25%
Load stages
24 total
24 total
4
3
50%
C4
75%
100% Regulation request
Fig. 6.h
Example 2: Custom rotation, 4 compressors with capacities of 10,
20, 30 and 40 kW. The activation thresholds with all the compressors
available are 10, 30, 60, 100 %.
Tab. 6.c
Note: Screw compressors can only be conﬁgured on line 1 and the
board must be dedicated only to line 1. One Bitzer CRII compressor
can be conﬁgured for each line.
The compressor size refers to its capacity and number of load stages or
to the inverter presence, therefore diﬀerent sizes need to be deﬁned
for compressors with the same capacity yet a diﬀerent number of load
stages. The inverter is always associated to size 1.
C1
C2
10%
C3
30%
C4
60%
Tutorial: below is one example of some possible conﬁgurations:
100% Regulation request
Fig. 6.i
• One line, 4 reciprocating compressors with the same capacity, the ﬁrst
If an alarm is active on compressor 3, the recalculated activation
thresholds are 10, 30, 70 %.
with inverter (2 sizes).
• One line, 4 scroll compressors with the same capacity, the ﬁrst Digital
Scroll™ (1 sizes).
• One line, 4 reciprocating compressors with the same capacity, the ﬁrst
two with 4 load stages, the other two not capacity-controlled (2 sizes).
C2
• One line, 4 reciprocating compressors with the same capacity and 4
load stages each (1 size).
• Two lines, line 1 with 2 screw compressors with the same capacity,
the ﬁrst with continuous modulation, line 2 with 4 reciprocating
compressors with two diﬀerent capacities, the ﬁrst two with 4 load
stages, the other two with 2 load stages (1 size on line 1, 2 sizes on
line 2).
• Two lines, line 1 with 4 scroll compressors, the ﬁrst Digital Scroll™, line
2 with 4 reciprocating compressors, the ﬁrst with inverter (1 size line 1,
2 sizes line 2).
pRack +0300025EN rel. 1.3 - 17.12.2015
10%
C4
30%
70%
Regulation request
Fig. 6.j
Activation of the compressors and load stages may be:
• Grouped (CpppCppp): ﬁrst all the load stages are activated on one
compressor before starting the next one
• Balanced (CCpppppp): ﬁrst all the compressors are started at minimum
capacity and then the corresponding load stages are activated, one for
each compressor, in sequence.
36
ENG
6.3.3
Rotation with modulation devices
Example 2: range of modulating device capacity variation lower
than the capacity of the compressors: two compressors without
capacity control, with the same capacity, 30 kW each, modulating device
with variable capacity between 20 and 40 kW.
It can be seen that the capacity delivered does not exactly follow the
required capacity, rather acts in steps, so as to avoid swings.
pRack pR300 can also manage compressor rotation when a capacity
modulation device is ﬁtted (inverter, Digital Scroll™ or continuous control).
The type of modulating device is selected and the corresponding
parameters set during the start-up procedure or in main menu branch
C.a.f/C.b.f and C.a.g/C.b.g
Actual capacity (kW)
The modulating device is always the ﬁrst to start and the last to stop
irrespective of the type of rotation, the other devices start or stop
according to the type of rotation selected.
100
Note: The compressor with modulation device is also assumed to
be the ﬁrst.
60
80
40
The trend in capacity delivered by the modulation device depends on
the capacity of the compressor with the modulating device compared to
the other compressors available.
20
Three cases can be identiﬁed:
• compressors all with the same capacity and range of capacity variation
of the modulating device greater than or equal to the capacity of the
compressors
• compressors all with the same capacity and range of capacity variation
of the modulating device less than the capacity of the compressors
• compressors with diﬀerent capacities
Regulation request
Step compressors capacity
Inverter capacity
Total capacity
Fig. 6.l
Esempio 3: range of modulating device capacity variation in
between the capacity of the compressors, all diﬀerent sizes: two
compressors without capacity control, capacities 15 kW and 25 kW,
modulating device with variable capacity between 10 and 30 kW.
In the ﬁrst case, the modulating device manages to continuously cover
the range of variation of the control request, while in the second case
some discontinuous variations remain. The behaviour in the third case
varies according to the capacities involved, and in any case reﬂects one
of the two previous cases.
Actual capacity (kW)
70
To conﬁgure the compressor capacity when an inverter is used, the
minimum and maximum operating frequencies need to be set relating
to the minimum and maximum value of the analogue output and the
rated capacity delivered at rated frequency (50 Hz), so that the pRack
pR300 software can calculate the capacity the compressor can deliver
with the inverter and use this value for control. In addition, for inverters
the variation in capacity delivered can be limited by setting the increase
and decrease times. If these times have already been conﬁgured on the
inverter, the higher time set has priority.
50
30
10
Regulation request
Step compressors capacity
Inverter capacity
Total capacity
Example 1: range of modulating device capacity variation higher than
the capacity of the compressors:
Fig. 6.m
two compressors without capacity control, with the same capacity, 20
kW each, modulating device with variable capacity between 30 and 60
kW. The ﬁgure shows the trend when the request sent by the controller
increases and then decreases continuously between 0 and 100 %. It can
be seen that the capacity delivered exactly follows the required capacity,
except when below the minimum capacity of the modulating device.
6.3.4
Starting
pRack pR300 can manage diﬀerent types of compressor starting:
• Direct
• Part-winding
• Star/delta
The type of starting can be selected and the related parameters set in
main menu branch C.a.f/C.b.f.
Actual capacity (kW)
100
For part-winding starting, the delay in activating the digital output that
controls the second winding needs to be set:
80
60
Compressor request
40
Line
20
Part-winding
Regulation request
Step compressors capacity
Inverter capacity
Total capacity
Delay
Fig. 6.n
Fig. 6.k
For star/delta starting, the star time, the delay between the activation of
the line and star digital input, and between the delta and star digital input
all need to be set, as shown in the ﬁgure:
37
pRack +0300025EN rel. 1.3 - 17.12.2015
ENG
6.3.8
Compressor request
Line
Part-winding
Delta
Star-line delay
Delay
Start-delta
delay
Fig. 6.o
6.3.5
Note: the function can be activated on a maximum of 6
compressors.
Safety times
pRack pR300 can manage common safety times for each compressor:
• Minimum on time
• Minimum oﬀ time
• Minimum time between consecutive starts
6.3.9
Enabling / disabling is managed in main menu branch C.a.f/C.b.f., while
manual management and the output test can be activated in main menu
branch B.b or B.c.
Note: for two lines, a further delay can be set between starts of the
compressors on diﬀerent lines, so as to avoid Simultaneous starts.
See paragraph 6.6.6 for the detailed description of the synchronisation
function for two lines (DSS).
Enabling / disabling is used to temporarily exclude the compressors from
operation, to allow, for example, repair or replacement. The disabled
compressors are also excluded from rotation.
Note: enabling is the only compressor manual operating mode
that can be activated when the unit is on.
Balancing
pRack pR300 can control any balance valves in parallel with the
compressors.
This function can be used to activate a communicating solenoid valve
between compressor suction and discharge, for a set time, before each
individual compressor starts. In this way, the suction and discharge
pressure can be balanced and the compressor can be started in more
favourable conditions.
The balancing function can be enabled and the related activation time
set in main menu branch C.a.f/C.b.f.
6.3.7
Both manual management and the output test are enabled by parameter
and remain active for a set time after the last button is pressed, after
which the unit returns to normal operating mode.
Manual management is used to switch the compressors on or oﬀ
without observing the control needs, however still considering any safety
devices (alarms, safety times, starting procedures) and respecting the set
conﬁguration of the inputs/outputs.
The activation screen resembles the one shown in the ﬁgure and is used
to override the outputs relating to the operation of the selected device,
e.g. compressor 1:
Economizer
pRack pR300 can activate the economizer function to boost compressor
eﬃciency by injecting vapour. Some of the liquid is taken from the
condenser, expanded through a valve and then sent to a heat exchanger
to cool the liquid leaving the condenser. The resulting superheated
vapour is injected into a special section of the compressor.
Manual mng.
Bba02
Digital output board1
Compressor 1
Force to:
The function can be enabled and the related parameters set in main
menu branch C.a.f.
The function can be enabled and the related parameters set in main
menu branch C.a.f.
The economizer is only eﬃcient for high compressor activation capacities,
typically over 75 %, therefore the economizer function control valve is
only activated when exceeding a set threshold.
As the economizer tends to increase the condensing pressure, this needs
to be controlled to ensure the high condensing pressure alarm is not
generated. In addition, the injection of vapour decreases the discharge
temperature and so this value also needs to be monitored.
Consequently, the three conditions for activation of the economizer
function are:
• Capacity above a set threshold
• Condensing pressure below a set threshold (with reset diﬀerential)
• Discharge temperature above a set threshold (with reset diﬀerential)
OFF
The output test is used to activate or deactivate the outputs (where
necessary setting an output percentage for the analogue outputs),
without observing any type of safety feature.
The activation screen resembles the one shown in the ﬁgure and is used
to override the outputs on the pRack boards, in the order they physically
appear on the board (without links to the devices):
Test DO
Bca10
Digital output board1
Note: the function can be activated on a maximum of 6
compressors.
pRack +0300025EN rel. 1.3 - 17.12.2015
Manual operation
pRack pR300 can manage 3 diﬀerent compressor manual operating
modes:
• Enabling / disabling
• Manual management
• Output test
In addition, pRack pR300 can manage the speciﬁc times for Digital Scroll™
compressors and screw compressors; for the descriptions see paragraphs
6.3.10 and 6.3.11. The related parameters can be set in main menu branch
C.a.f/C.b.f.
6.3.6
Liquid injection
As an alternative to the economizer, pRack pR300 can manage the
injection of liquid into the compressors (the two functions are alternative,
as the point of vapour injection into the compressor is the same).
The function can be enabled and the related parameters set in main
menu branch E.d.a.b/E.d.b.b.
Liquid injection is used to protect the compressor, and in fact decreases
the discharge temperature.
Operation is Similar to the economizer function, with the diﬀerence that
the expanded liquid is not sent to a heat exchanger, but rather directly
into the compressor. The function is only activated when the compressor
is on and the discharge temperature exceeds a set threshold (with
diﬀerential).
D01
NO
OFF
D02
NO
OFF
Important: manual mode and the output test can only be
activated with the unit oﬀ.
Both manual mode and above all the output test must be used with
special care and by expert personnel to avoid damage to the devices.
38
ENG
• if high pressure prevention is enabled with activation/deactivation
6.3.10 Digital Scroll™ compressors
of the devices, the Digital Scroll™ compressor delivers the minimum
possible capacity.
pRack pR300 can use a Digital Scroll&yen; compressor&auml; as the modulating
device for suction lines (one for each line). This type of compressor
features special operation, and is controlled by pRack pR300 as follows.
The related parameters can be set in main menu branch C.a.f/C.b.f.
The capacity is modulated by opening/closing a valve with PWM; when
the valve is ON the compressor delivers minimum capacity, while when
the valve is oﬀ the compressor delivers maximum capacity. In the
following description and ﬁgure, ON and OFF refer to the status of the
compressor, while operation of the valve is the exact opposite:
Starting procedure
pRack pR300 can manage the speciﬁc starting procedure for Digital
Scroll™ compressors, as represented as in the following ﬁgure:
4s
180s
60s
50s
100s
Request
Compressor power request
Compressor PWM
modulation
10%
Valve
67%
Fixed cycle time
ON
OFF
Compressor
Startup
2s
13s
10s
15s
5s
Fig. 6.q
15s
There are three stages:
1. balance: the PWM valve is activated for 4 s, so that the compressor
delivers minimum capacity;
2. compressor activation with 50 % capacity for 3 minutes;
3. forced operation at 100 % for 1 minute.
Variable cycle time
ON
OFF
2s
18s
8s 5s
20s
time
4s
During the starting procedure, the request sent by the controller is
ignored and only at the end of the procedure does the capacity delivered
start reﬂecting the request. If the request is cancelled during the starting
procedure, the compressor stops at the end, then the minimum ON time
for these types of compressors is set to 244 s. The starting procedure
is performed when the compressor is started, while it can be disabled
for a set time by parameter for subsequent starts, if the compressor has
not remained oﬀ for a minimum set time. After this time has elapsed the
procedure is performed again during the following start.
12s
Fig. 6.p
The following data are provided by the manufacturer of the compressor:
• minimum ON time 2 s
• maximum cycle time 20 s
• optimum cycle time 12 s
Note: the safety times for Digital Scroll™ compressors are
established by the manufacturer, and are as follows:
• Minimum ON time: 244 s (starting procedure)
• Minimum OFF time: 180 s
• Minimum time between restarts: 360 s
There are three possible operating modes:
• Fixed cycle time
• Variable cycle time
• Optimised cycle time
Based on the operating mode selected, pRack pR300 calculates the valve
activation percentage that satisﬁes the required capacity.
Alarms
pRack pR300 can manage, in addition to the common alarms for all types
of compressors (see chapter 8 for details), some speciﬁc alarms for Digital
Scroll™ compressors:
• high oil temperature
• oil dilution
• high discharge temperature
These alarms are managed as speciﬁed by the manufacturer of the
compressor, and therefore pRack pR300 can only enable or disable them.
Activation of these alarms requires an oil temperature probe, which
can also be the common probe (see the paragraph relating to oil
management) and the compressor discharge temperature probe.
Fixed cycle time
The compressor ON time is calculated as the percentage of the cycle time
corresponding to the required capacity:
TON= % Request * Cycle Time
The cycle time can be set to the optimum value suggested by the
manufacturer to achieve maximum COP, or to a higher value to increase
resolution of the capacity delivered (a higher cycle time implies greater
continuity in the eﬀective capacity that can be delivered).
Variable cycle time
The compressor ON time is set to 2 s and the cycle time is calculated
based on the required capacity:
Note: pRack pR300 does not manages the envelope for Digital
Scroll™ compressors and consequently there is no corresponding
alarm when operating outside the envelope.
TCYCLE= TON /% Request
6.3.11 Screw compressors
Optimised cycle time
The compressor ON time is set to 2 s and the cycle time is calculated
based on the required capacity for capacities less than 17 %, after which
the cycle time is set to 12 s and the ON time varies. In essence, this mode
is a combination of the previous two. This guarantees the maximum
possible COP and control rate (obtained with the 12 s cycle time) and the
maximum control range (starting from 10 %).
pRack pR300 can manage up to two screw compressors, with control in
stages or continuous control (only the ﬁrst compressor with continuous
control, used as modulation device for the suction line), which can be a
generic device or pre-conﬁgured in accordance with the most common
devices supplied by the main manufacturers. Advanced functions are
also available, for example envelope control, described further on. The
parameters relating to screw compressors can be set in main menu branch
C.a.f/C.b.f. Screw compressors are ﬁtted with up to 4 capacity control valves
(hereinafter V1, V2, V3, V4), which can have 4 types of behaviour:
•
ON: the valve is open
•
OFF: the valve is closed
•
Intermittent: the valve is open/closed alternatively (around 10 to 15 s)
•
Pulsating: the valve is open/closed alternatively with very short
opening/closing times (around 1 to 2 s).
Note:
• the minimum capacity that can be delivered by Digital Scroll™
compressors is Minimum ON time/Maximum cycle time = 2/30 = 6.7
%, which also depends on the selected control mode (for example, in
the ﬁrst case shown in the ﬁgure the minimum capacity delivered is
Minimum ON time/Cycle time = 2/15 = 13%).
39
pRack +0300025EN rel. 1.3 - 17.12.2015
ENG
Envelope
For screw compressors, pRack pR300 can manage control of the envelope,
which can either be pre-set or deﬁned by the user. pRack pR300 accepts
the envelope control settings for the Bitzer CSH series compressors, and
these simply need to be enabled in main menu branch C.a.g.
For all other series of compressors, the envelope can be managed by
enabling and setting all the related parameters in main menu branch C.a.g.
Important: pulsating valves must be associated with an SSR relay
output, to avoid damage.
V1, V2, V3 and V4 can be managed to obtain stage or continuous
compressor control.
Stage control
For the control in stages, normally involving four load stages, 25, 50, 75,
100 %, a table needs to be created that shows the behaviour of each
valve in the diﬀerent conditions (starting, 25 %, 50 %, 75 %, 100 %). The
ﬁgure shows one possible example (see the documents supplied by the
manufacturer of the compressor for how to complete the table):
V1
{
{
z
{
{
Start
25%
50%
75%
100%
V2
{
z
{
{
{
V3
{
z
z
z
{
The following parameters need to be set in order to manage the envelope:
• Deﬁnition of the points (maximum 30)
• Deﬁnition of the zone (maximum 12). Each zone can be made up of
one or more polygons (total maximum 14, which must be closed and
convex)
• Deﬁnition of the behaviour of the compressor in the diﬀerent zones
(capacity and duration)
V4
{
{
z
{
{
The meaning of the parameters is shown in the ﬁgure:
Tab. 6.e
Discharge pressure
If intermittent valves are used, the cycle time also needs to be set.
P1
Note: normally operation at minimum capacity (25 %) is only
possible for a limited time, after which the compressor must switch
to the next stage. This function can be enabled and the corresponding
time can be set.
P2
(Pol. 2)
Zone 2
P4
(Pol. 3)
Continuous control
For continuous control, a table needs to be created that shows the
behaviour of each valve in the diﬀerent conditions (start/stop, increase,
decrease, standby). The ﬁgure shows one possible example:
Start/Stop
Increase (25 to 100%)
Decrease (25 to 100%)
Standby
V1
{
z
~
z
Zone 1
(Pol. 1)
P5
P6
V2
{
;
z
{
P7
P8
Suction pressure
Fig. 6.r
pRack pR300 can also manage the variation in the envelope as the
capacity delivered changes, for example in the case of variation in
frequency for inverter-driven compressors.
Tab. 6.f
If intermittent/pulsating valves are used, the cycle time also needs to be
set. Intermittent valves are opened/closed for 50 % of the set time, while
for pulsating valves the opening and closing time in theory depend on
the diﬀerence between the position of the slide and the capacity request.
As the position of the slide is generally not measurable, the variation in
the request is used to calculate the times for pulsating valves.
Note: for further details on conﬁguration of the envelope, contact
Carel.
6.3.12 Bitzer CRII modulating compressor
pR300 can manage a system ﬁtted with CRII compressors. Up to 2
CRII compressors can be conﬁgured (one on each line), each as ﬁrst
compressor in L1 and L2.
CRII is set as a capacity controlled piston compressor in which the
capacity steps can be activated/deactivated rapidly (5 s). In addition,
the CRII compressor can be ON with the capacity steps deactivated, so
as to respond faster to demand. This condition can remain active for a
maximum set time, after which capacity control will be activated, in turn
for a set time, to prevent compressor malfunctions.
Compressor capacity control is achieved by valves managed using SSR
digital outputs, due to the high number of cycles involved. Up to 3
capacity steps can be conﬁgured on for each line (check the number of
SSRs available).
Management by the pR300 of the diﬀerent capacity steps allows
complete compressor capacity modulation.
Note: in continuous control, operation is normally only allowed for
an undetermined time when the capacity exceeds 50 %.
Starting procedure
pRack pR300 can manage the starting procedure for the screw
compressors by considering, following the star/delta or part-winding
starting selected, a further time of operation at minimum capacity,
established by the manufacturer or set to 60 s for generic compressors.
Once the starting procedure has ended, the compressor starts varying the
capacity according to the control request and if necessary considering
the duration at minimum capacity.
Series of compressors supported
pRack pR300 can manage several series of screw compressors made by
the main manufacturers, (Bitzer, Refcomp, Hanbell, …) which come with
the parameters described above already set.
Capacity-control activation/deactivation
Capacity-control refers to the valve installed on the compressor. For 2
capacity steps, the compressor will be ﬁtted with 2 valves and pRack
needs to manage 2 SSR digital outputs. Capacity-control activation/
deactivation refers then to energising/de-energising the valve, so as to
open or close the ﬂow of refrigerant. A step is activated when demand
exceeds the corresponding capacity, vice-versa it is deactivated when
demand falls to the lower step. The following ﬁgure represents an
example of a CRII with 2 capacity steps (50-100). The ﬁrst steps is activated
as soon as demand exceeds 50%, and the second when reaching 100%.
When demand falls, on the other hand, the second step is deactivated as
soon as this falls below 50%, and the ﬁrst at 0%.
The models managed by pRack pR300 are shown in the table:
Manufacturer Model
Bitzer
CSH65…95, HS.53-4/64, HS.74, HS85
Hanbell
RC2-100/140/180, RC2-170/200…1520
134-S, 134-XS L1, 134-XS L2, SRS-S1XX…755, SRC-S785…985,
RefComp
SRC-XS L1, SRC-XS L2
Tab. 6.g
For manufacturers or series of compressors that are not supported, the
generic type can be used and the corresponding parameters set as
described previously..
Note: for further details on the series of compressors supported
and the related pre-conﬁgured parameters, contact Carel.
pRack +0300025EN rel. 1.3 - 17.12.2015
P3
40
ENG
150
Conﬁguration
A system with CRII compressors can be configured directly from the
wizard. The following procedure shows the selection of a CRII compressor
with two capacity steps, 50%-100%:
Rising (%)
Falling (%)
100
50
0
50
100
150
-50
Fig. 6.aq
CRII modulation in neutral zone
The type of control can be selected between proportional-integral
and neutral zone. If choosing neutral zone control, CRII compressor
modulation can be enabled inside the zone. CRII modulation requires
the deﬁnition of a new band, comprising the set point and a diﬀerential
called “Diﬀ CRII”, this band deﬁned must fall inside the neutral zone.
CASE 1: suction pressure is inside the neutral zone and is increasing.
Starting from current capacity, at the moment when “min mod” is
exceeded, the compressor will activate the capacity steps until reaching
“max mod” at 100%.
Times
Min Ton, minimum ON time:
• 120 s up to 5.5kW
• 180 s up to 15kW
• 300 s above 15kW
CASE 2: suction pressure is inside the neutral zone and is decreasing.
Starting from current capacity, at the moment when “min mod” is
exceeded, the compressor will deactivate the capacity steps until
reaching “max mod” at 0%.
Min Toﬀ, minimum OFF time:
• range [5 s … 999 s]
min mod.
Min start same compressor, minimum time between two consecutive
starts of the same compresso:
• range [ 5 s … 999 s]
max mod.
diﬀ
CRII
diﬀ
CRII
Psuct
diﬀ NZ
Max time with compressor on with load bypassed is the maximum time
in which the CRII compressor can remain active at 0% capacity after
which capacity control will be activated.
• up to 120 s
diﬀ NZ
Set point
Fig. 6.ar
Legenda:
oMIN mod. = actual capacity CRII
MAX mod. = 100% capacity
mMAX mod. = actual capacity CRII
MIN mod. = 0% of CRII
Total capacity doesn't change
CRII unloader delay is the delay on activation of capacity control.
• range [5 s … 999 s]
In both cases, in the grey area between the neutral zone thresholds and
the CRII diﬀerentials, total capacity does not change.
Note: when the suction pressure falls outside of the neutral zone,
the compressors are switched oﬀ in sequence, varying CRII capacity to
achieve correct modulation. The CRII compressor will go to 0% capacity
before another compressor is shut down, and can remain in this condition
for a set time, as long as there are other active compressors. If it is the last
compressor active at that moment, after reaching 0% capacity it will
immediately shut down.
Extra cooling fan
To prevent malfunctions of the CRII compressor due to high operating
temperature, pR300 can activate a fan installed on the compressor to
provide extra cooling. pR300 does not manage the CRII compressor
envelope. The extra cooling fan is activated based on two variables:
• Current CRII capacity
• Condensing pressure
with speciﬁc cases for the medium temperature and low temperature line.
41
pRack +0300025EN rel. 1.3 - 17.12.2015
ENG
Fan for medium temperature line
The following parameters need to be set to manage the fan:
• Condensing pressure threshold (default 16 bars)
• Shutdown evaluation time with pressure higher than threshold(default 180 s)
• Shutdown evaluation time with pressure lower than threshold(default 60 s)
• Shutdown delay (default 20 s)
6.4 Fans
pRack pR300 can manage up to 2 condenser lines with up to 16 fans and
one speed modulation device each, applying common types of device
rotation and controlling both the starting mode and some accessory
functions. The modulation device may be an inverter or a phase ﬁred
controller. The fan functions and related parameter settings are enabled
from main menu branch D.a/D.b. The functions are described in detail
below.
6.4.1
The following table highlights the cases in which the fan is activated with
reference to the default values:
Condensing
pressure (Pcond)
Pcond &gt;= 16bar
Pcond &lt; 16bar
Pcond &gt;= 16bar
Pcond &lt; 16bar
Pcond &gt;= 16bar
Pcond &lt; 16bar
Fan operation depending on the compressors
The operation of the fans can be bound to the operation of the
compressors by setting a parameter in main menu branch D.a.b/D.b.b, in
this case the fans only start if at least one compressor is on. This setting is
ignored if the fans are controlled by a dedicated pRack pR300 board and
the pLAN network is disconnected.
CRII % activation (*) Fan
50% o 0%
50% o 0%
0%
0%
50%
50%
Control
pRack pR300 can manage - as described in paragraph 6.2 - proportional
band and Neutral zone control, by pressure or temperature. For details on
the control modes, see the corresponding paragraph, while below is the
description only of the features relating to the fans.
Switch on
Keep oﬀ or switch oﬀ after 0s + 20s
Keep on
Keep oﬀ or switch oﬀ after 60 s + 20s
Keep oﬀ or switch oﬀ after 180 s + 20 s
Keep oﬀ or switch oﬀ after 60 s + 20 s
Fan operation with modulating device
If the fans are controlled by a modulating device, the meaning of the
parameters that associate the minimum and maximum values of the
device’s modulating output and the minimum and maximum capacity of
the modulating device on screens Dag02 and Dbg02 is illustrated in the
following examples.
Fan for low temperature line
The following parameters need to be set to manage the fan:
• Condensing pressure threshold P1 (default 7.5 bars) didepending on
the capacity step
• Condensing pressure threshold P2 (default 15 bars) didepending on
the capacity step
• Condensing pressure threshold P3 (default 19.5 bars) didepending on
the capacity step
• Shutdown evaluation time with pressure higher than threshold(default 180 s)
• Shutdown evaluation time with pressure lower than threshold(default 60 s)
• Shutdown delay (default 20 s)
Example 1: minimum modulating output value 0 V, maximum value 10 V,
minimum modulating device capacity 0 %, maximum 100 %.
Analog output
Max capacity = 100 %
Max output
value = 10 V
Min capacity = 0 %
Min output
value = 0 V
Setpoint
The following table highlights the cases in which the fan is activated with
reference to the default values, with 3 capacity steps:
Condensing
pressure (Pcond)
Pcond&lt;P1 (condition not allowed)
P1&lt;=Pcond&lt;P2
P2&lt;=Pcond&lt;P3
Pcond&gt;=P3
P1&lt;=Pcond&lt;P2
P2&lt;=Pcond&lt;P3
Pcond&gt;=P3
P1&lt;=Pcond&lt;P2
P2&lt;=Pcond&lt;P3
Pcond&gt;=P3
P1&lt;=Pcond&lt;P2
P2&lt;=Pcond&lt;P3
Pcond&gt;=P3
P1&lt;=Pcond&lt;P2
P2&lt;=Pcond&lt;P3
Pcond&gt;=P3
P1&lt;=Pcond&lt;P2
P2&lt;=Pcond&lt;P3
Pcond&gt;=P3
P1&lt;=Pcond&lt;P2
P2&lt;=Pcond&lt;P3
Pcond&gt;=P3
Example 2: minimum modulating output value 0 V, maximum value 10 V,
minimum modulating device capacity 60 %, maximum 100 %.
Switch on
Switch on
Switch on
Keep on
Keep on
Keep on
Keep oﬀ or check step1 switch oﬀ condition
Switch on
Switch on
Keep oﬀ or switch oﬀ after 60 s + 20s
Switch on
Switch on
Keep oﬀ or check step2 switch oﬀ condition
Keep oﬀ or check step2 switch oﬀ condition
Switch on
Keep oﬀ or switch oﬀ after 60 s + 20s
Keep oﬀ or switch oﬀ after 180 s + 20s
Switch on
Keep oﬀ or switch oﬀ after 60 s + 20s
Keep oﬀ or switch oﬀ after 180 s + 20s
Switch on
pRack +0300025EN rel. 1.3 - 17.12.2015
Regulation
probe value
Fig. 6.s
CRII % activation Fan activation
(*)
OFF
Keep oﬀ or switch oﬀ after 0s + 20s
step1 o 0%
step1 o0%
step1 o 0%
0%
0%
0%
step2 o step1
step2 o step1
step2 o step1
step1
step1
step1
Step3 o step2
Step3 o step2
Step3 o step2
step2
step2
step2
step3
step3
step3
Differential
Differential
Analog output
Max capacity = 100 %
Max output
value = 10 V
Min output
value = 0 V
Min capacity = 60 %
Setpoint
Differential
Differential
Fig. 6.t
42
Regulation
probe value
ENG
Example 3: minimum modulating output value 2 V, maximum value 10 V,
minimum modulating device capacity 60 %, maximum 100 %.
6.4.3
Analog output
The function can be enabled and the related parameters set in main
menu branch D.a.g/D.b.g
Max capacity = 100 %
Max output
value = 10 V
If speed up is enabled, a start time can be set in which the fan speed
is forced to 100%. If the outside temperature sensor is used, moreover,
a threshold can be set (with reset diﬀerential) below which speed up is
disabled, so as to not drastically lower the condensing pressure at start-up.
Min capacity = 60 %
Min output
value = 2 V
Setpoint
Differential
Differential
Fast start (speed up)
pRack pR300 can manage the fast start function (speed up), used to
overcome the initial inertia of the fans.
Note: speed up has lower priority than the Silencer function (see
the following paragraph for the details), therefore if the Silencer
function is active, this is disabled.
Regulation
probe value
6.4.4
Fig. 6.u
Silencer
pRack pR300 can manage the Silencer function, used to limit fan speed at
certain times of the day or in speciﬁc conditions, enabled by digital input.
The function can be enabled and the related parameters set in main
menu branch D.a.g/D.b.g.
Enabling fan speed limitation from the digital input or based on time
bands is independent, consequently the speed is limited to the set value
when at least one of the two conditions is active.
Up to 4 activation bands can be set for each day of the week.
Cut-oﬀ
pRack pR300 manages a control cut-oﬀ for the fans; functions and related
parameter settings can be enabled from main menu branch D.a.b/D.b.b.
The operating principle of the cut-oﬀ function is shown in the ﬁgure:
Regulation request
Max output
value
6.4.5
Cut-Oﬀ value
of request
Cut-Oﬀ setpoint
Regulation setpoint
Diﬀerential
Diﬀerential
The function can be enabled and the related parameters set in main
menu branch D.a.g/D.b.g.
Regulation
probe value
Split condenser can be used to exclude from rotation fans whose index is:
• even
• odd
• higher than a settable value
• lower than a settable value
Fig. 6.v
A percentage of the control request and a cut-oﬀ set point can be set.
When the control request reaches the set cut-oﬀ value, this value is kept
constant until the control value falls below the cut-oﬀ set point, after
which it falls to 0 % and remains there until the request exceeds the cutoﬀ value again.
6.4.2
Split condenser
pRack pR300 can manage the possibility to exclude some fans from
operation, for example to reduce condenser operation in winter, using
the split condenser function.
The function can be activated by:
• time bands (winter/summer seasons)
• digital input
• supervisor
• outside temperature (set threshold and diﬀerential)
Rotation
pRack pR300 can manage rotation of the fans, much in the same way as
described for the compressors, therefore:
• LIFO, FIFO, time, Custom rotation
• Management of a modulation device on each line
Note:
• the split condenser function can be disabled by parameter if the high
pressure prevention function is activated (see paragraph 8.3.3). If split
condenser is disabled due to activation of the high pressure prevention
function, it remains disabled for a set time, after which it is reactivated.
• split condenser cannot be enabled if there is a speed modulation
device that controls all the fans.
The substantial diﬀerence compared to the compressors concerns the
possibility to manage diﬀerent capacities and load stages, which are
obviously not featured for the fans. In addition, pRack pR300 can specially
manage inverter driven fans. In fact, a multiple number of inverter driven
fans can be set.
If there is more than one fan, however the number of inverter driven fans
is set to 1, the fans are started and stopped at the same time, and the fans
will always all be at the same power.
If there is more than one inverter driven fan, as well as being able to
use an alarm digital input for each, it is assumed that the weight of the
modulating device is proportional to the number of fans, therefore the
ﬁrst case is applied, as described in paragraph 6.3.3: fans all with the same
power and modulating device power variation range greater than or
equal to the capacity of the other devices.
6.4.6
Manual operation
pRack pR300 can also manage the same three manual operating modes
for the fans as described for the compressors:
• Enabling
• Manual management
• Output test
Enabling is managed in main menu branch D.a.f/D.b.f., while manual
management and the output test can be activated in main menu branch
B.b or B.c. For the detailed description of the three modes, see paragraph
6.3.9.
Example 1: 4 fans all controlled by the same inverter correspond to
1 fan with four times the power.
6.4.7
Alarms
pRack pR300 can manage both a common alarm for the fans and separate
alarms for each fan.
When the common alarm is active the alarm is signalled, but no fan
is stopped, while for separate alarms the fan that the alarm refers to is
stopped. For details on the fan alarms, see Chapter 8.
Note: some fans can be excluded from the rotation, for example in
the winter; to do this use the split condenser function described in
paragraph 6.4.5.
43
pRack +0300025EN rel. 1.3 - 17.12.2015
ENG
6.5 Energy saving
6.5.2
pRack pR300 can activate energy saving functions by adjusting the
suction and condensing pressure set points.
The suction and condensing pressure set points can be applied with two
diﬀerent oﬀsets, one for the closing period and one for the winter period,
activated by:
• Digital input
• Time band
• Supervisor
For the suction line, the ﬂoating set point is managed by the supervisor.
The suction pressure set point set by the user is changed by the supervisor
in range between a settable minimum and maximum. The operation is
illustrated in the following ﬁgure:
Floating setpoint
Max
Real variation
In addition, the suction pressure set point can be modiﬁed from analogue
input, applying a linearly variable oﬀset based on the value read by a
probe.
As well as set point compensation from digital input, scheduler, supervisor
or analogue input, two further energy saving functions are available,
ﬂoating suction and condensing pressure set point.
The functions can be enabled and the related parameters set in main
menu branch C.a.d/C.b.d and D.a.d/D.b.d.
6.5.1
Floating suction pressure set point
Max variation
Min
Set point compensation
time
Sampling time
Compensation from digital input, scheduler or supervisor is similar for the
suction and condensing pressure set points, consequently the following
description applies to both.
Fig. 6.y
The set point is calculated by the supervisor and acquired by the pRack
pR300 controller at set intervals, the maximum variation allowed for the
set point in each sampling period can also be set; if the value acquired
diﬀers from the previous value by more than the maximum variation
allowed, the variation is limited to the maximum value. If the supervisor
is disconnected, after 10 minutes (ﬁxed) the pRack pR300 controller starts
decreasing the set point with variations equal to the maximum variation
allowed each sampling period, until reaching the minimum set point
allowed with ﬂoating suction pressure.
Two diﬀerent oﬀsets can be deﬁned, which apply to:
• Closing periods, deﬁned by the scheduler, activation of a digital input
or supervisor
• Winter period, deﬁned by the scheduler
The two oﬀsets add to the set point deﬁned by the user when the
corresponding condition is active.
Example 1: closing oﬀset 0.3 barg, winter oﬀset 0.2 barg, suction
pressure compensation from scheduler and from digital input
activated. When the digital input is activated, for example with a day/
night function, 0.3 barg is added to the operating set point, and when the
winter period is in progress a further 0.2 barg is added. The operation can
be schematised in the following ﬁgure:
Note: if set point compensation from scheduler, digital input or
supervisor is also active, the oﬀset is added to the minimum and
maximum limits for the ﬂoating set point.
6.5.3
Floating condensing pressure set point
For the condenser line, the ﬂoating set point is based on the outside
temperature. The ﬂoating condensing pressure set point is achieved by
adding a constant programmable value to the outside temperature and
limiting the resulting value between a settable minimum and maximum,
as shown in the ﬁgure:
Digital Input
ex.: day/night
Summer/Winter
Floating setpoint
Setpoint
User setpoint +0,5 barg
Max
time
oﬀset
Fig. 6.w
Min
Note: the same digital input is used for set point compensation on
each line, so if suction and condensing pressure set point
compensation is activated by digital input, both compensation functions
are active at the same time.
external temperature
time
Fig. 6.z
Compensation from analogue input only applies to the suction pressure
set point and can be enabled separately. If compensation from analogue
input is enabled, a oﬀset that is linearly variable to the value read by a
dedicated probe can be applied to the suction pressure set point, as
shown in the ﬁgure.
Note: if set point compensation from scheduler, digital input or
supervisor is also active, the oﬀset is added to the minimum and
maximum limits for the ﬂoating set point.
6.6 Accessory functions
Offset
pRack pR300 can manage several accessory functions. Of these, the
economizer and liquid injection have already been described in paragraph
6.3 on compressor operation, while the others are described below.
Offset max
6.6.1
Probe value
Lower value
Upper value
Fig. 6.x
pRack +0300025EN rel. 1.3 - 17.12.2015
Oil management
pRack pR300 features oil management for the individual compressors, as
well as common management for each line:
• Individual compressor: oil alarm, high oil temperature, and, for screw
compressors only, oil warning, oil cooling and oil level
• Line: common oil alarm, high oil temperature warning, oil cooling
Offset min
44
ENG
The function can be enabled and the related parameters set in main
menu branch E.a.a/E.a.b or C.a.e/C.b.e (for the individual compressor
alarms).
6.6.2
Subcooling
pRack pR300 can control subcooling in two diﬀerent ways:
• with the condensing temperature and the liquid temperature
• with the liquid temperature only
Individual compressor oil management
For the description of the oil alarm and warning corresponding to the
individual compressor see Chapter 8. For screw compressors, an oil cooler
can be managed for each compressor, made up of a heat exchanger, a
fan and 1 or 2 pumps. The operation of the cooler varies according to the
setting of the output, which may be:
• Analogue: one pump only
• Digital: 1 or 2 pumps
In the ﬁrst case, subcooling is calculated as the diﬀerence between
the condensing temperature (obtained by converting the condensing
pressure) and the liquid temperature measured after the exchanger.
The corresponding output is activated below a set threshold, with ﬁxed
diﬀerential.
Digital output
The control probe is the compressor oil temperature probe, and the
following need to be set: set point, diﬀerential and, for 2 pumps only, an
activation delay for the second pump. The operation of the cooler when
using an analogue output is shown in the ﬁgure:
1&deg;C/&deg;F
Fan
Oil cooler 0...10 V
Fig. 6.ac
In the second case, the output is active for liquid temperature values
greater than a threshold, with ﬁxed diﬀerential.
Pump
Digital output
1&deg;C/&deg;F
Diﬀerential
Diﬀerential
Oil temperature
Setpoint
Threshold
Tliq.
Fig. 6.ad
Fig. 6.aa
The subcooling function can be enabled and the related parameters set
in main menu branch E.b.a/E.b.b.
If a digital output and just one pump is used, the fan and the pump are
activated/deactivated at the same time:
Note: the subcooling function is active when at least one
compressor is on.
Oil cooler
0...10 V
Fan/Pump
6.6.3
Diﬀerential
Diﬀerential
Heat recovery
pRack pR300 can manage heat recovery for types of system with heat
recovery in series with the main condenser.
Heat recovery can be activated by:
• Probe
• Time bands
• Supervisor
Oil temperature
Setpoint
Fig. 6.ab
The heat recovery function can be enabled and the related parameters
set in main menu branch E.e.a/E.e.b.
A digital input is managed that acts as a trigger for activating the function.
When the digital input is not active, heat recovery is not operating, while
when the digital input is active heat recovery is operating when at least
one of the other conditions is true, as shown in the ﬁgure:
If a digital output and two pumps are used, the operation of the fan and
the ﬁrst pump is Similar to the previous case, while the second pump
is activated when the oil temperature is greater than the set point +
diﬀerential for a time at least equal to the delay, and is deactivated when
the oil temperature falls back below the set point minus the diﬀerential.
The oil level can be managed for the ﬁrst 6 compressors on each suction
line. If a compressor alarm is conﬁgured as an oil alarm, this alarm can
be associated with oil level management, enabling the function and
setting the compressor alarm number to be used: when the digital input
associated with the alarm is activated (this thus Signals the low oil level),
a valve is activated with intermittent operation to restore the level, with
opening and closing times that can be set. If after a set time, the digital
input is still active, that is, the minimum level has not been reached,
pRack pR300 Signals an alarm and stops the compressor.
Digital Input
Probe
Scheduler
Supervisor
Line oil management
pRack pR300 features an alarm digital input for each line; this is with
Signal only, that is, has no eﬀect on the operation of the devices.
For details on this alarm see chapter 8.
For all types of compressors, a common oil cooler can be managed for
each line; the operation of this is Similar to the cooler for each individual
compressor described previously.
Heat reclaim
Fig. 6.ae
If the digital input is not conﬁgured, only the other conditions are taken
into consideration.
When the heat recovery function is active, a digital output is activated
to trigger the pump and a digital or analogue output for an On/Oﬀ or
modulating 3-way valve.
Note: for screw compressors, if common cooling is selected,
cooling for each compressor cannot be activated.
45
pRack +0300025EN rel. 1.3 - 17.12.2015
ENG
The generic functions can be enabled and the related parameters set in
main menu branch E.f. To be able to use the free inputs, these must be
conﬁgured as generic probes from A to E (analogue inputs) and generic
inputs from F to J (digital inputs), consequently a maximum of 5 analogue
and 5 digital inputs can be used. After having conﬁgured the generic
probes, the associated variables can be used as control variables and the
digital inputs as enabling variables.
For activation by probe, the operation of the On/Oﬀ or modulating
3-way valve and the pump is shown in the ﬁgure, where the temperature
considered is the heat recovery exchanger outlet temperature:
Heat reclaim by probe
Pump and ON/OFF valve
As well as the generic probes and inputs, pRack pR300 software internal
variables can be used, depending on the system conﬁguration. Some
examples are, for analogue variables:
• Suction pressure
• Condensing pressure
• Saturated suction temperature
• Saturated condensing temperature
• Suction temperature
• Discharge temperature
• % of compressors active
• % of fans active
• Superheat
• Subcooling
• Liquid temperature,
• % compressor request
• % fan requesti
Modulating valve
Diﬀerential
Diﬀerential
Outlet temperature
Setpoint
Fig. 6.af
If the probe is not working, pRack pR300 considers the other conditions,
without Signalling further alarms in addition to the probe alarm.
As regards activation from time bands, heat recovery does not consider
the operating seasons, and links can be set to special days and closing
periods so that heat recovery is only active based on the daily bands set.
And for the digital variables:
High suction pressure alarm
Low suction pressure alarm
High condensing pressure alarm
Sign of life
Prevent active
Note:
•
•
•
•
•
• a settable bottom limit is available for the condensing pressure, below
which heat recovery is deactivated.
• condensing pressure set point compensation can be disabled when
heat recovery is active..
Each generic function can be associated with a unit of measure and a
description. Below is a description of the operation of four types of
generic functions.
Heat recovery as the ﬁrst stage in high pressure prevention
Heat recovery can be used to prevent high condensing pressure. The
parameters relating to this function can be set in branch G.b.a/G.b.b of
the main menu, after having enabled the heat recovery function.
For details on operation of the prevent function, see paragraph 8.3.3. Heat
recovery operation as the ﬁrst stage in high pressure prevention is shown
in the ﬁgure:
Heat reclaim
Prevent
Diﬀ.
Diﬀ.
Diﬀ.
Diﬀ.
Stages
pRack pR300 can manage up to 5 stage functions, with either direct or
reverse operation. In both cases, a set point and a diﬀerential can be set; the
operation of the corresponding output is shown in the ﬁgure for both cases:
Direct stage
Diﬀ.
Cond. Press.
Diﬀ.
Regulation variable
Setpoint
Oﬀset
Heat reclaim activation
Reverse stage
Prevent threshold
Fig. 6.ag
The function must be enabled and an oﬀset must be set in relation to
prevent threshold, while the diﬀerential is the same set for the prevent
function.
Diﬀ.
Diﬀ.
Regulation variable
Setpoint
Fig. 6.ah
6.6.4
Generic functions
pRack pR300 can use the free inputs /outputs and certain internal
variables for generic functions.
If an enabling variable has been set, the corresponding output is active if
the enabling is also active.
Important: The generic functions are available on pRack pR300
boards with pLAN addresses from 1 to 4, that is, on all boards that
manage a suction or condensing line, nonetheless only the parameters
corresponding to the functions managed by boards 1 and 2 are sent to
the supervisory system.
For each stage, a high alarm threshold and a low alarm threshold can be
set, and are absolute. For each alarm, the activation delay and priority can
be set. See chapter 8 for details on the alarms.
One example of using the generic stage functions may be activation of
the fans on the room units based on the temperature.
The following generic functions are available for each board:
• 5 stages
• 2 modulations
• 2 alarms
• 1 scheduler
Each function can be enabled/disabled by digital input and from the user
interface.
pRack +0300025EN rel. 1.3 - 17.12.2015
46
ENG
Modulation
pRack pR300 can manage up to 2 modulation functions, with either
direct or reverse operation. In both cases, a set point and a diﬀerential
can be set; the operation of the corresponding output is shown in the
ﬁgure for direct mode, with the cut-oﬀ function also enabled:
ChillBooster as the ﬁrst stage in high pressure prevention
ChillBooster can be used to prevent high condensing pressure.
The parameters relating to this function can be set in branch G.b.a/G.b.b
in the main menu, after having enabled the ChillBooster function.
For details on the prevent function see paragraph 8.3.3.
Operation of ChillBooster as the ﬁrst stage in high pressure prevention is
Similar to the heat recovery function described in paragraph 6.6.3.
Direct modulation
MAX
The function must be enabled and an oﬀset must be set in relation to the
prevent threshold, while the diﬀerential is the same as set for the prevent
function.
MIN
(Cut-oﬀ
Value)
6.6.6
Hyster.
Setpoint
Regulation variable
Diﬀerential
Fig. 6.ai
If an enabling variable has been set, the corresponding output is active if
the enabling is also active. For each modulation, a high alarm threshold
and a low alarm threshold can be set, and are absolute. For each alarm,
the activation delay and priority can be set. See chapter 8 for details on
the alarms. For modulation a minimum and maximum value can also
be set for the output, and the cut-oﬀ function can be enabled, with
operation as shown in the previous ﬁgure.
The four DSS functions can be enabled independently and are useful for
booster or CO2 cascade system conﬁgurations:
Alarms
pRack pR300 can manage up to 2 alarm functions, with settable digital
variable to be monitored, activation delay, priority and description. Each
generic function can be associated with a digital output for the activation
of external devices when the alarm is activated. One example of using the
generic alarm functions involves detecting gas leaks.
Scheduler
pRack pR300 can manager a generic scheduler that activates a digital output
at certain time bands. Up to 4 daily time bands can be set for each day of the
week, in addition operation of the generic scheduler can be linked to the
common scheduler, and consequently the output activated based on:
• summer/winter
• up to 5 closing periods
• up to 10 special days
See paragraph 6.7.2 for details on the time bands.
6.6.5
Double line synchronisation (DSS)
pRack pR300 can manage, for two line conﬁgurations, several
synchronisation functions between the two lines:
• Disable simultaneous compressors starts
• Force the medium temperature line on if the low temperature line is
activated
• Shutdown the low temperature line if the medium temperature line
has a serious alarm
• Enable pump-down medium temperature line
P
T
P
T
Fig. 6.aj
ChillBooster
pRack pR300 can control the Carel ChillBooster, device used for evaporative
cooling of the air that ﬂows through the condenser. ChillBooster can
be enabled and the related parameters set in main menu branch E.g.
ChillBooster is activated when two conditions exist:
• the outside temperature exceeds a set threshold
• the fan control request is at the maximum for at least a settable
number of minutes
The maximum request time starts counting again whenever the request
decreases, therefore the request must remain at the maximum for at least
the set time. Activation ends when the request falls below a set threshold.
pRack pR300 can manage an alarm digital input from ChillBooster, the
eﬀect of which is to deactivate the device. For details see Chapter 8. As the
number of operating hours of ChillBooster is critical as regards formation
of scale on the condenser, pRack pR300 can manage the operating hour
threshold, which should be set to 200 hours.
Hygiene procedure
To avoid water stagnation in the pipes, a hygiene procedure can be
enabled that activates ChillBooster every day for a set time, if the outside
temperature is greater than a threshold.
P
T
P
T
P
T
Fig. 6.ak
Note: if the outside temperature probe is not conﬁgured or is
conﬁgured but is not working, ChillBooster operates based solely on the
control request, and the hygiene procedure can still be activated.
Important: in the pRack pR300 software assumes that the medium
temperature line is line L1, while the low temperature line is line L2.
DSS can be enabled and the related parameters set in main menu
branch E.h.
The only diﬀerence between probe not conﬁgured and probe not working
concerns the ChillBooster operating without temperature probe alarm,
which is only generated when the probe is conﬁgured but not working.
47
pRack +0300025EN rel. 1.3 - 17.12.2015
ENG
Disable simultaneous starts
Disabling simultaneous compressor starts may be useful for all
system conﬁgurations with two separate lines and in cascade system
conﬁgurations. The function to avoid simultaneous starts can be enabled,
setting a delay time between the starts of compressors on diﬀerent lines.
Note:
• make sure that Fieldbus driver management reﬂects the logic of the
generic functions, i.e. up to 2 drivers per suction line can be enabled,
with a limit of 2 drivers per board in the pLAN (L1&amp;L2 on single board,
maximum 2 drivers);
• on the supervisor, L1, L2 management on separate boards requires the
use of two single line templates;
• a Fieldbus driver cannot be connected to boards 3 and 4 in pLAN.
Forcing the medium temperature line
Forcing the medium temperature line may be useful for cascade
system conﬁgurations and involves, once enabled, forcing at least
one compressor on medium temperature line L1 to start at minimum
capacity, if at least one compressor on low temperature line L2 is running.
This means that before the low temperature line starts, the DSS function
forces at least one of the compressors on medium temperature line L1
to start. The low temperature line L2 thus has higher priority than the
control request for medium temperature line L1.
Screen Eif02 contains the commands to set the defaults for the Driver,
after which the parameters are updated (pRackoDriver), ); in addition,
the line of compressors used for the pre-positioning logic can be selected.
Shutdown the low temperature line
The low temperature line is shutdown by the DSS function if a serious
alarm is activated on the medium temperature line, or, in general, if the
medium temperature line is OFF.
Enable pump-down medium temperature line
During normal compressor rack operation, when at least one compressor
on the low temperature line is running, the medium temperature
compressor control will enable pump-down. If there is demand on
the low temperature line, the minimum capacity step for medium
temperature line will be guaranteed if MT suction pressure is not lower
the set threshold.
Fig. 6.at
Note:
• Control based on line 1 is only possible on pLAN board with address 1.
While control based on the compressors on line 2 is only possible on
boards where the low temperature compressors are conﬁgured (pLAN
1 for double suction on single board and pLAN2 for double suction on
separate boards);
• important, if the line is not managed o the current board, the Driver
function is disabled.
Note: in the event of pLAN network faults, DSS is disabled.
6.6.7
Electronic valve synchronisation (EVS)
COMMON varying cooling capacity
Pre-positioning/start control: if switching from standby to control, before
actual control starts the valve is moved to a speciﬁc initial position. The prepositioning time is the time in which the valve is kept in a ﬁxed position,
according to the parameter “Valve opening at start-up&quot;.
For conﬁguration of the DRIVER or DRIVERS, where there are two heat
exchangers, access OTHER FUNCTIONSoEVS; iwhich comprises the
following submenus:
a. Temperature control
b. Manual management
c. I/O status
d. Control
e. Valve conﬁguration
f. Driver conﬁguration
Temp. control:
Manual management:
I/O status:
Parameter/Description
CONTROL
Pre-positioning time
Valve opening at start-up
(evaporator /valve capacity ratio)
Information relating superheat is shown
The valve can be moved to a certain number of steps
Display and conﬁguration of the probes connected
to the 4 analogue inputs on the driver
Valve opening, PID parameters, alarm limits/delays
Minimum/maximum number of steps, nominal
frequencies
Enable driver, defaults
Def.
Min.
Max.
UOM
6
50
0
0
18000
100
s
%
Tab. 6.i
For branches a, b, c, d, e, f refer directly to the parameter table in chapter
7, while for a more detailed explanation of the DRIVER EVD EVO functions,
see the technical manual: +0300005EN
The valve opening parameter should be set based on the ratio between
rated evaporator and valve cooling capacity (e.g. rated evaporator
cooling capacity: 3 kW, rated valve cooling capacity: 10 kW, valve opening
= 3/10 = 33%).
• If 100% capacity is required: Opening (%)= (Valve opening at start-up);
• If capacity required is less than 100% (capacity control): Opening (%)=
(Valve opening at start-up) • (Current unit cooling capacity), where the
current unit cooling capacity is sent to the driver via pLAN by the pCO
controller. For stand-alone drivers this is always equal to 100%.
Note: one DRIVER is needed for each valve; if a Twin Driver is used,
this will be managed as a single driver; also the connection must be
made on the ﬁrst valve (EXV1-J27 in the case of built-in drivers).
• this procedure is used to anticipate valve movement and bring it much
Control:
Valve conﬁguration:
Driver conﬁguration:
Note:
closer to working position immediately after the unit is powered on;
• if there are problems with liquid return after the start of the refrigeration
Enable driver:
The driver can be enabled in the conﬁguration menu (E.i.f ) and once
enabled, the number of valves and corresponding addresses of the two
drivers can be entered.
unit, or there are frequent unit on-oﬀ cycles, valve opening at start-up
must be decreased. If there are low pressure problems after starting
the refrigeration unit, the valve opening must be increased.
Positioning (change cooling capacity)
In practice, the valve is re-positioned starting from the current position
in proportion to how much the unit cooling capacity has increased or
decreased, in percentage terms. On reaching the calculated position,
irrespective of how long it takes (variable according to the type of valve
and the actual position), there will be a constant 5 second delay, after
which control resumes.
Fig. 6.as
The Driver is enabled automatically when the system selected in the
Wizard is either &quot;Cascade&quot; or &quot;Pumped&quot;.
pRack +0300025EN rel. 1.3 - 17.12.2015
48
ENG
6.6.11 Interaction with pLoads
Note: if it is not possible to have the information on the change in
unit cooling capacity, this will be always be considered as operating at
100% and therefore the procedure will never be used. In this case, the PID
control needs to be more reactive (see Control), so as to respond promptly
to variations in load that are not communicated to the driver.
A
pRack pR300 can interact with the pLoads controller, which manages
power using a load cut-oﬀ function.
Interaction can be enabled and the related parameters set from main
menu branch C.a.d and C.b.d.
Interaction between pRack pR300 and pLoads uses digital inputs or the
supervisor. The digital inputs have higher priority, therefore if a digital
input is not active, the corresponding action is not produced even if
requested by the supervisor.
ON
OFF
t
C
Two of the free digital inputs on pRack pR300 can be conﬁgured for
connection to two pLoads outputs, with each input being assigned one
of the following actions:
• No action. Activation of the digital input has no inﬂuence on control.
• Capacity limited to the current value. Activation of the digital input
limits the maximum control request; capacity can be reduced from
this value by the controller, but cannot exceed the current value at the
moment the digital input was activated for the entire time it remains
active, as shown in the ﬁgure:
ON
OFF
t
NP
ON
OFF
t
R
ON
Regulation request
OFF
t
T3
Limit
W
Fig. 6.au
Legenda:
A
C
NP
R
Control request
Change in capacity
Re-positioning
Control
T3
W
t
Re-positioning time
Wait
Time
Digital input
time
6.6.8
Fig. 6.al
Unit of measure
• Capacity limited to a % value, settable by parameter. As in the previous
pRack pR300 can manage two units of measure, the international system
and Imperial.
case, the control request is limited at the top end, however to a ﬁxed
value set by parameter.
• Decrease capacity by a % value, settable by parameter. Activation of
the digital input reduces the control request by a ﬁxed value set by
parameter, as shown in the ﬁgure:
Note: the temperature and pressure units of measure can be
changed from &deg;C, barg to &deg;F, psig only during start-up; mixed
conﬁgurations are not allowed, for example &deg;F and barg.
6.6.9
Regulation request
Sign of life
pRack pR300 can manage a digital output acting as a sign of life, activated
when pRack pR300 is powered up.
This output remains active while the controller is working correctly and
highlights any hardware faults.
The Signal can be conﬁgured in main menu branch B.a.c.
Max
offset
Min
digital input
6.6.10 Liquid non-return
time
pRack pR300 can manage a digital output with the meaning of liquid
non-return. This normally active output is deactivated when all the
compressors are oﬀ and no compressor can be started due to alarms or
time settings, despite the control request, or when the unit is OFF. As soon
as at least one compressor is enabled to start, the output is deactivated,
allowing management of a liquid non-return valve. The function can be
conﬁgured in main menu branch C.a.g/C.b.g.
Fig. 6.am
• By suitably setting this parameter based on system conﬁguration,
one compressor can be shut down; for example if there are three
compressors, by setting the decrease to 33%, activation of the input
stops one of the three compressors. Compressor shutdown and restart
respect the safety times.
The digital inputs conﬁgured are common to both lines, while for each
line a diﬀerent action can be associated with the same digital input.
In any case, the previous actions do not interfere with the pRack pR300
safety features, which always have priority over the actions set from
digital input.
Moreover, a suction pressure safety threshold has been introduced,
therefore the actions associated with the inputs are only enabled if the
pressure does not exceed this threshold (settable by parameter). After
the pLoads action has been disabled, it is necessary that the suction
pressure returns below the safety threshold for a setted time (higher than
30 s), before restoring the interaction between the two devices, so to the
regulation can be stabilize.
49
pRack +0300025EN rel. 1.3 - 17.12.2015
ENG
• Generic functions: the generic scheduling function is active with the
6.6.12 Power consumption
operating seasons, special days, closing periods and daily time bands.
Operation of the generic functions can be separated from the generic
scheduler, considering the daily time bands only.
pRack pR300 can calculate power consumption for the current day
and the previous day. The calculation can be enabled and the related
parameters set from main menu branch C.a.d and C.b.d.
To calculate power consumption, the current draw is measured via an
analogue input, while the type of load, rated voltage and displacement
can be set by parameter. The calculation starts at 00:00 every day and
continues until 24:00, when the value from the previous day is overwritten
with the new calculated value. The supervisory system can use the two
values, current day’s consumption and previous day’s consumption, for
power consumption analysis.
For details on the functions that use time bands, see the corresponding
paragraphs.
6.8 Managing the default values
pRack pR300 can manage two diﬀerent sets of default values:
• user defaults
• Carel defaults
The two functions can be activated in main menu branch I.d.
6.7 Settings
6.7.1
Clock
Important: after having reset the default values, the pRack pR300
board need to be switched oﬀ and on again.
pRack pR300 features an internal clock with backup battery that keeps
the time and date for all related functions (see Chapter 2 for details
relating to the hardware).
6.8.1
All the set values are saved, therefore loading user defaults restores the
exact same conditions that the pRack pR300 controller was in when the
data were saved.
Note: only one user default conﬁguration can be saved, therefore
when the data is next saved, this overwrites the previous data.
The related parameters can be set during start-up or in main menu
branch F.a.
Important:
Note: the date and time are managed on pRack boards with
addresses 1 and 2; on power-up and whenever the pLAN network is
reconnected, the software on pRack synchronises the settings on board
2, sending the date and time set on board 1.
• the Carel default reset procedure totally deletes the pRack pR300
permanent memory, and consequently is an irreversible operation;
• the user values cannot be reset after updating the software on the
pRack pR300, nonetheless see Chapter 10 for details on how to save
the parameters for versions diﬀerent of the software.
If the clock card is not operating, an alarm is generated and the functions
relating to the time bands described in the following paragraph are not
available.
6.8.2
6.7.2
Time bands
Resetting the Carel default values
The Carel default values are shown in the Parameters table in Chapter 7.
pRack pR300 allows the operating seasons, the closing periods and
weekends to only be set once, and consequently these are common to
all the system functions.
The values pre-set by Carel can be installed at any time, restoring the
pRack pR300 default settings, and requiring the startup procedure
described in Chapter 4 to be repeated.
As well as these settings, each function can be associated with a weekly
scheduler, setting up to 4 diﬀerent daily activation bands for each day
of the week. For each time band, the start and end time can be set and
settings made can be copied to the others days of the week.
Important: the Carel default reset procedure totally deletes the
pRack pR300 permanent memory, and consequently is an irreversible
operation; nonetheless, the user settings can still be restored if these have
already been saved. Given that pRack pR300, following the installation of
the Carel default values requires the startup procedure to be repeated,
select the ﬁrst pre-conﬁguration and then restore the user defaults.
The priority of the schedulers, from lowest to highest, is:
• weekly scheduler
• closing periods
• special days
Note: to complete a new conﬁguration procedure as described in
Chapter 4, ﬁrst restore the Carel default values.
For example, if the weekly scheduler requires activation of a function,
yet a closing period is in progress, and requires deactivation of the same
function, then the function is deactivated. The following functions allow
the setting of time bands:
• Split-condenser: the function is active only based on the operating
seasons, and consequently special days, closing periods and daily time
bands are ignored.
• Silencer: the function is only active with daily time bands, there is no
link to operating seasons, special days and closing periods
• Heat recovery: the function is active with daily time bands, special
days and closing periods, no link to operating seasons. The link to the
general scheduler can be disabled, considering the time bands only.
• Set point compensation: active with operating seasons, special days,
closing periods and daily time bands (two diﬀerent oﬀsets).
pRack +0300025EN rel. 1.3 - 17.12.2015
Saving and resetting the user default values
pRack pR300 can save the exact conﬁguration set by the user inside the
instrument, allowing it to be recalled at any time.
The date on pRack pR300 can be set as follows:
• day, month, year (dd/mm/yy)
• month, day, year (mm/dd/yy)
• year, month, day (yy/mm/dd)
The current date and time can be set, the day of the week corresponding
to set date displayed, plus changeover to daylight saving can be enabled
by setting the changeover date and the deviation.
50
ENG
7. PARAMETERS TABLE
“Mask index”: indicates the unique address of each screen and consequently the path needed to reach the parameters available on this screen; for
example, to reach the parameters corresponding to the suction pressure probe with mask index Bab01, proceed as follows:
Main men&ugrave;
B.In./Out.&Icirc;a.Status&Icirc;b.Analog.in.
Below is the table of the parameters that can be displayed on the terminal. The values indicated with ‘---‘ are not Signiﬁcant or are not set, while the
values indicated with ‘…’ may vary according to the conﬁguration, with the possible options visible on the user terminal. A row of ‘…’ means that there are
a series of parameters Similar to the previous ones.
Note:Not all the screens and parameters shown in the table are always visible or can be set, the screens and parameters that are visible or can be set
depend on the conﬁguration and the access level.
Mask index
Description on terminal
Main screen
Main screen (display ----only)
L1-Suction
L1-Condenser
L1-SHeat
L1-Suct. temp.
L1-Dis. temp.
L1-Auxiliary
L2-Suction
L2-Condenser
L2-SHeat
L2-Suct. temp.
L2-Dis. temp.
L2-Auxiliary
EVD1-Condenser
EVD2-Condenser
---
Description
Default UOM
Values
Hours and minutes
Date
Suction pressure or temperature (conﬁgurable, line 1)
Condensing pressure or temperature (conﬁgurable, line 1)
Superheat (conﬁgurable, line 1)
Suction temperature (conﬁgurable, line 1)
Discharge temperature (conﬁgurable, line 1)
Auxiliary pressure or temperature (conﬁgurable, line 1)
Suction pressure or temperature (conﬁgurable, line 2)
Condensing pressure or temperature (conﬁgurable, line 2)
Superheat (conﬁgurable, line 2)
Suction temperature (conﬁgurable, line 2)
Discharge temperature (conﬁgurable, line 1)
Auxiliary pressure or temperature (conﬁgurable, line 2)
Condensing pressure or temperature (conﬁgurable on Driver 1, line 2)
Condensing pressure or temperature (conﬁgurable on Driver 2, line 2)
Unit status (with unit OFF)
…
…
-------------------------------
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
---
----L1-Suction
L1-Condenser
L1-SHeat
L1-Suct. temp.
L1-Dis. temp.
L1-Auxiliary
L2-Suction
L2-Condenser
L2-SHeat
L2-Suct. temp.
L2-Dis. temp.
L2-Auxiliary
EVD1-Condenser
EVD2-Condenser
---
Number of compressors on line 1(with unit ON, conﬁgurable)
Compressor activation percentage on line 1 (with unit ON, conﬁgurable)
Number of compressors on line 2(with unit ON, conﬁgurable)
Compressor activation percentage on line 2 (with unit ON, conﬁgurable)
Number of fans on line 1 (with unit ON, conﬁgurable)
Fan activation percentage on line 1 (with unit ON, conﬁgurable)
Number of fans on line 2 (with unit ON, conﬁgurable)
Fan activation percentage on line 2 (with unit ON, conﬁgurable)
Hours and minutes
Date
Suction pressure or temperature (conﬁgurable, line 1)
Condensing pressure or temperature (conﬁgurable, line 1)
Superheat (conﬁgurable, line 1)
Suction temperature (conﬁgurable, line 1)
Discharge temperature (conﬁgurable, line 1)
Auxiliary pressure or temperature (conﬁgurable, line 1)
Suction pressure or temperature (conﬁgurable, line 2)
Condensing pressure or temperature (conﬁgurable, line 2)
Superheat (conﬁgurable, line 2)
Suction temperature (conﬁgurable, line 2)
Discharge temperature (conﬁgurable, line 1)
Auxiliary pressure or temperature (conﬁgurable, line 2)
Condensing pressure or temperature (conﬁgurable on Driver 1, line 2)
Condensing pressure or temperature (conﬁgurable on Driver 2, line 2)
Unit status (with unit OFF)
----------------…
…
-------------------------------
--%
--%
--%
--%
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
---
-----------------
Number of compressors on line 1(with unit ON, conﬁgurable)
Compressor activation percentage on line 1 (with unit ON, conﬁgurable)
Number of compressors on line 2(with unit ON, conﬁgurable)
Compressor activation percentage on line 2 (with unit ON, conﬁgurable)
Number of fans on line 1 (with unit ON, conﬁgurable)
Fan activation percentage on line 1 (with unit ON, conﬁgurable)
Number of fans on line 2 (with unit ON, conﬁgurable)
Fan activation percentage on line 2 (with unit ON, conﬁgurable)
-----------------
--%
--%
--%
--%
…
…
…(**)
…(**)
…(**)
…(**)
…(**)
…(**)
…(**)
…(**)
…(**)
…(**)
…(**)
…(**)
…(**)
…(**)
Unit OFF from Alarm
Unit OFF from blackout
Unit OFF from supervisor
Unit OFF from default
Unit OFF from digital IN
Unit OFF from keypad
Unit OFF manual mode
0…12
0…100
0…12
0…100
0…16
0…100
0…16
0…100
…
…
…(**)
…(**)
…(**)
…(**)
…(**)
…(**)
…(**)
…(**)
…(**)
…(**)
…(**)
…(**)
…(**)
…(**)
Unit OFF from Alarm
Unit OFF from blackout
Unit OFF from supervisor
Unit OFF from default
Unit OFF from digital IN
Unit OFF from keypad
Unit OFF manual mode
0…12
0…100
0…12
0…100
0…16
0…100
0…16
0…100
--------------Secondary screen
(display only)
51
pRack +0300025EN rel. 1.3 - 17.12.2015
ENG
Mask index
Display description
Description
Default
UOM
Values
Suction pressure (line 1)
Saturated suction temperature (line 1)
Eﬀective set point for pressure control (with compensation applied, line 1)
Control diﬀerential for pressure control (line 1)
Suction pressure (line 1)
Saturated suction temperature (line 1)
Eﬀective set point for temperature control (with compensation applied, line
1)
Control diﬀerential for temperature control (line 1)
Capacity delivered/capacity required for suction line (line 1)
Control status (according to the type of control set, line 1)
----… (**)
… (**)
----… (**)
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
… (**)
… (**)
… (**)
… (**)
… (**)
… (**)
… (**)
… (**)
-----
…
%
---
Reg.type
Compressor control type (line 1)
---
Setpoint
C01, C02, …C12
C01
Neutral
zone
… (**)
-----
…
s
%
… (**)
0/0 …100/100
Stop Increas Operating
Decrease
Timings
Standby
Alarms
Proportional band
Neutral zone
… (**)
0…32000
0…100
…
--------…
-----
…
%
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
0…100
… (**)
… (**)
… (**)
…
… (**)
0…29
ON / OFF
…
---
…
…
…
0…29
ON / OFF
A.Unit status
Pressure
Aa01
Sat.temp.
(display only)
Act.setpoint
Diﬀerential
Pressure
Sat.temp.
Aa02
Act.setpoint
(display only)
Diﬀerential
Actual/req.
Aa03
(display only)
Reg.status
Aa13
(display only)
…
Liq.inj.6: DO
Aa15
(display only)
Discharge temperature
Cap.reduction
Oil sump temp.
Oil status
Eﬀective suction pressure set point (with compensation applied, line 1)
Time remaining to next compressor start (line 1)
Capacity delivered by compressor 1 on line 1 (a ''!'' to the right of the value
means that some form of compressor capacity override is active, e.g. times,
alarms, start-up procedure)
…
Capacity delivered by compressor 12 (line 1)
Suction temperature (line 1)
Superheat (line 1)
Discharge temperature, compressor 1 (line 1)
…
Discharge temperature, compressor 6 (line 1)
Number of digital output associated and status of liquid injection/
economizer (*) compressor 1 (line 1)
…
Number of digital output associated and status of liquid injection/
economizer (*) compressor 6 (line 1)
Digital ScrollTM compressor discharge temperature (line 1)
Digital ScrollTM compressor capacity reduction in progress (line 1)
Digital ScrollTM compressor oil sump temperature (line 1)
Digital ScrollTM compressor oil dilution status (line 1)
Status
Aa04
(display only)
Aa05
(display only)
Aa11
(display only)
Aa16
(display only)
Aa20
(display only)
Aa21
(display only)
…
C12
Temperature
Superheat
Disch.1
…
Disch.6
Liq.inj.1: DO
---
…
---
…
Digital ScrollTM compressor operating status (line 1)
---
---
Countdown
Compr.
Digital ScrollTM compressor time count (line 1)
Digital ScrollTM compressor status (line 1)
-----
s
---
Valve
Digital ScrollTM valve status(line 1)
---
---
Requested cap.
Current capac.
Pressure
Sat.temp.
Act.setpoint
Diﬀerential
Pressure
Sat.temp.
Act.setpoint
Diﬀerential
Actual/req.
Status
Digital ScrollTM compressor capacity required (line 1)
Digital ScrollTM compressor eﬀective capacity (line 1)
Condensing pressure (line 1)
Saturated condensing temperature (line 1)
Eﬀective set point for pressure control (with compensation applied, line 1)
Control diﬀerential for pressure control (line 1)
Condensing pressure (line 1)
Saturated condensing temperature (line 1)
Eﬀective set point for temperature control (with compensation applied, line 1)
Control diﬀerential for temperature control (line 1)
Capacity delivered/capacity required for condenser line (line 1)
Control status (according to the type of control set, line 1)
--------… (**)
… (**)
----… (**)
… (**)
-----
%
%
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
%
---
Reg.type
Condenser control type (line 1)
---
Setpoint
F1
Condenser control eﬀective set point (with compensation applied, line 1)
Power output of fan 1 on line 1 (a ''!'' to the right of the value means that
some form of power override is active)
…
Power output of fan 8 on line 1 (a ''!'' to the right of the value means that
some form of power override is active)
Power output of fan 9 on line 1 (a ''!'' to the right of the value means that
some form of power override is active)
…
Power output of fan 16 on line 1 (a ''!'' to the right of the value means that
some form of power override is active)
Discharge temperature (line 1)
Outside temperature (line 1)
Suction pressure (line 2)
Saturated suction temperature (line 2)
Eﬀective set point for pressure control (with compensation applied, line 2)
Control diﬀerential for pressure control (line 2)
Suction pressure (line 2)
Saturated suction temperature (line 2)
Eﬀective set point for temperature control (with compensation applied, line 2)
Control diﬀerential for temperature control (line 2)
Neutral
zone
… (**)
---
…
%
… (**)
NO / YES
… (**)
Ok
Dilute
Oﬀ
Oﬀ by time
Start up
On by time
On
Mod. manual
Alarm
In pump down
0…999
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
0…100
0…100
… (**)
… (**)
… (**)
… (**)
… (**)
… (**)
… (**)
… (**)
0/0 …100/100
Stop
Operating
Increase
Timings
Decrease
Alarms
Stand-by
Proportional band
Neutral zone
… (**)
0…100
…
---
…
%
…
0…100
---
%
0…100
…
---
…
%
…
0…100
--------… (**)
… (**)
----… (**)
… (**)
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
… (**)
… (**)
… (**)
… (**)
… (**)
… (**)
… (**)
… (**)
… (**)
… (**)
Aa22
(display only)
Aa23
(display only)
…
F8
F9
Aa24
(display only)
Aa25
(display only)
Aa31 (display
only)
Aa32
(display only)
…
F16
Discharge temperature
External temperature
Pressure
Sat.temp.
Act.setpoint
Diﬀerential
Pressure
Sat.temp.
Act.setpoint
Diﬀerential
pRack +0300025EN rel. 1.3 - 17.12.2015
52
ENG
Mask index
Display description
Actual/req.
Status
Description
Capacity delivered/capacity required for suction line (line 2)
Control status (according to the type of control set, line 2)
Default
-----
UOM
%
---
Reg.type
Compressor control type (line 2)
---
Setpoint
C01, C02, …C12
C01
…
C12
Temperature
Superheat
Disch.1
…
Disch.6
Liq.inj.1: DO
…
Liq.inj.6: DO
Discharge temperature
Cap.reduction
Oil sump temp.
Oil status
Eﬀective suction pressure set point (with compensation applied, line 2)
Time remaining to next compressor start (line 2)
Capacity delivered by compressor 1 on line 2 (a ''!'' to the right of the value
means that some form of compressor capacity override is active, e.g. times,
alarms, start-up procedure)
…
Capacity delivered by compressor 12 (line 2)
Suction temperature (line 2)
Superheat (line 2)
Discharge temperature, compressor 1 (line 2)
…
Discharge temperature, compressor 6 (line 2)
Number of digital output associated and status liquid injection compr. 1 (line 2)
…
Number of digital output associated and status liquid injection compr. 6 (line 2)
Digital ScrollTM compressor discharge temperature (line 2)
Digital ScrollTM compressor capacity reduction in progress (line 2)
Digital ScrollTM compressor oil sump temperature (line 2)
Digital ScrollTM compressor oil dilution status (line 2)
Neutral
zone
… (**)
-----
…
--------…
----…
-----
…
%
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
---
…
Status
Digital ScrollTM compressor operating status (line 2)
---
---
Countdown
Compr.
Valve
Requested cap.
Current capac.
Pressure
Sat.temp.
Act.setpoint
Diﬀerential
Pressure
Sat.temp.
Act.setpoint
--------------… (**)
… (**)
----… (**)
s
----%
%
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
Diﬀerential
Actual/req.
Reg.status
Digital ScrollTM compressor time count (line 2)
Digital ScrollTM compressor status (line 2)
Digital ScrollTM valve status(line 2)
Digital ScrollTM compressor capacity required (line 2)
Digital ScrollTM compressor eﬀective capacity (line 2)
Condensing pressure (line 2)
Saturated condensing temperature (line 2)
Eﬀective set point for pressure control (with compensation applied, line 2)
Control diﬀerential for pressure control (line 2)
Condensing pressure (line 2)
Saturated condensing temperature (line 2)
Eﬀective set point for temperature control (with compensation applied, line
2)
Control diﬀerential for temperature control (line 2)
Capacity delivered/capacity required for condenser line (line 2)
Control status (according to the type of control set, line 2)
… (**)
-----
…
%
---
Reg.type
Condenser control type (line 2)
---
Setpoint
F1
…
%
…
---
…
%
…
0…100
---
%
0…100
…
---
…
%
…
0…100
Discharge temperature
External temperature
Status,curr.
Condenser control eﬀective set point (with compensation applied, line 2)
Power output of fan 1 on line 2 (a ''!'' to the right of the value means that
some form of power override is active)
…
Power output of fan 8 on line 2 (a ''!'' to the right of the value means that
some form of power override is active)
Power output of fan 9 on line 2 (a ''!'' to the right of the value means that
some form of power override is active)
…
Power output of fan 16 on line 2 (a ''!'' to the right of the value means that
some form of power override is active)
Discharge temperature (line 2)
Outside temperature (line 2)
Eﬀective status of screw compressor 1 with stepped modulation
Neutral
zone
… (**)
---
… (**)
0/0 …100/100
Stop
Operating
Increase
Timings
Decrease
Alarms
Stand-by
Proportional band
Neutral zone
… (**)
0…100
-------
…
…
---
Status, req.
Status required for the screw compressor 1 with stepped modulation
---
---
Minimum on time
Min.oﬀ/starts
Countdown for minimum on time screw comp. 1 with stepped modulation
Countdown for minimum oﬀ time or wait between successive starts screw
comp. 1 with stepped modulation
Countdown for next step activation screw comp. 1 with stepped modulation
Eﬀective status of screw compressor 1 with continuous capacity
modulation
-----
s
s
… (**)
… (**)
Oﬀ
Start up
Stage1
Oﬀ
Start up
Stage1
0…999
0…999
-----
s
---
Screw comp. 1 oﬀ time with continuous capacity modulation
Countdown for minimum oﬀ time or wait between successive starts screw
comp. 1 with continuous capacity modulation
Countdown to start screw comp. 1 with continuous capacity modulation
-----
s
s
0… 999
Shut down
Oﬀ
Start up
Norm. operating
0…999
0…999
---
s
0…999
Aa33
(display only)
Aa34
(display only)
Aa05
(display only)
Aa41
(display only)
Aa43
(display only)
Aa45
(display only)
Aa46
(display only)
Aa50
(display only)
Aa51
(display only)
…
s
%
Aa52
(display only)
Aa53
(display only)
…
F8
F9
Aa54
(display only)
Aa55
(display only)
…
F16
Aa60
(display only)
Next step
Status
Aa61
(display only)
Shut down countd.
Max.pow.countdown
Min.on countdown
53
Values
0/0 …100/100
Stop
Operating
Increase
Timings
Decrease
Alarms
Stand-by
Proportional band
Neutral zone
… (**)
0…32000
0…100
…
0…100
… (**)
… (**)
… (**)
…
… (**)
0…29
…
0…29
… (**)
NO / YES
… (**)
Ok
Dilute
Oﬀ
Start up
On
Alarm
0…999
OFF / ON
OFF / ON
0…100
0…100
… (**)
… (**)
… (**)
… (**)
… (**)
… (**)
… (**)
ON / OFF
ON / OFF
Oﬀ by time
On by time
Manual mod.
In pump down
Stage 2
Stage 3
Stage 4
Stage 2
Stage 3
Stage 4
pRack +0300025EN rel. 1.3 - 17.12.2015
ENG
Mask index
Display description
Status,curr.
Description
Eﬀective status of screw compressor 2
Default
---
UOM
---
Aa62
(display only)
Status, req.
Status required for the screw compressor 2
---
---
Minimum on time
Min.oﬀ/starts
Next step
Zone
Max admit.time
Countdown
Max admit.power
Startup status
Countdown for minimum on time screw comp. 2
Countdown for minim. oﬀ time or wait between successive starts screw comp. 2
Countdown for next step activation screw comp. 2
Envelope zone for screw compressor 1
Maximum duration allowed in the zone
Countdown
Maximum capacity allowed in the zone
Start-up status for screw compressor 1
---------
---
s
s
s
--min
s
%
---
N&deg; startup restart
Err.code
Al.code
Number of restarts
Type of error in envelope deﬁnition
Type of alarm activated
-------
-------
Envel.def.error code
Type of error in selection of predeﬁned envelope
---
---
Reg.var.
Enable
Control variable value for generic stage function 1
Enabling variable status for generic stage function 1
-----
…
---
Setpoint
Diﬀerential
Mode
Status
…
Reg.var.
Enable
Setpoint
Diﬀerential
Mode
Status
Reg.variable
Enable
Setpoint
Diﬀerential
Mode
Status
Reg.variable
Enable
Setpoint
Diﬀerential
Mode
Status
Reg.variable
Enable
Type
Delay time
Status
Reg.variable
Enable
Type
Delay time
Status
Weekday
TB1: --:-- -&gt; --:--
Control set point for generic stage function 1
Control diﬀerential for generic stage function 1
Control mode for generic stage function 1 (direct or reverse)
Status of generic stage function 1
…
Control variable value for the generic stage function 5
Enabling variable status for the generic stage function 5
Control set point for the generic stage function 5
Control diﬀerential for the generic stage function 5
Control mode for the generic stage function 5 (direct or reverse)
Status of generic stage function 5
Control variable value for generic modulating function 1
Enabling variable status for generic modulating function 1
Control set point for generic modulating function 1
Control diﬀerential for generic modulating function 1
Control mode for generic modulating function 1 (direct or reverse)
Status of generic modulating function 1
Control variable value for generic modulating function 2
Enabling variable status for generic modulating function 2
Control set point for generic modulating function 2
Control diﬀerential for generic modulating function 2
Control mode for generic modulating function 2 (direct or reverse)
Status of generic modulating function 2
Control variable status for generic alarm function 1
Enabling variable status for generic alarm function 1
Type of alarm for generic alarm function 1
Control diﬀerential for generic alarm function 1
Status of generic alarm function 1
Control variable status for generic alarm function 2
Enabling variable status for generic alarm function 2
Type of alarm for generic alarm function 2
Control diﬀerential for generic alarm function 2
Status of generic alarm function 2
Day of the week
Enabling and deﬁnition of time band 1: start hour and minutes, end hour and
minutes for the generic scheduling function
…
Enabling and deﬁnition of time band 4: start hour and minutes, end hour and
minutes for the generic scheduling function
Status of generic scheduling function
Status of heat recovery function (line 1)
Heat recovery temperature (line 1)
Status of modulating heat recovery valve output (line 1)
Status of prevention via heat recovery (line 1)
Status of heat recovery function (line 2)
Heat recovery temperature (line 2)
Status of modulating heat recovery valve output (line 2)
Status of prevention via heat recovery (line 2)
Status of ChillBooster device (line 1)
Outside temperature (line 1)
ChillBooster activation threshold (line 1)
Number of minutes elapsed with fans at 100/number of min. allowed (line 1)
Status of ChillBooster device (line 2)
Outside temperature (line 2)
ChillBooster activation threshold (line 2)
Number of minutes elapsed with fans at 100/number of minutes allowed
(line 1)
--------…
-------------------------------------------------------------
…
…
----…
…
--…
…
----…
--…
…
--%
…
--…
…
--%
------s
--------s
----…
Values
Oﬀ
Stage 2
Start up
Stage 3
Stage1
Stage 4
Oﬀ
Stage 2
Start up
Stage 3
Stage1
Stage 4
0…999
0…999
0…999
0…14
0…999
0…32000
0…100
Oﬀ
Compressor on
Intermediate interval
Final interval
Compressor oﬀ
Restart Alarm
0…99
No error / Env. def. inconsist..
No Alarm
Max time elapsed
Zone not allowed
Max. no. of restarts
No error
Comp. not supported
Gas type not allowed
… (**)
Not active
active
… (**)
… (**)
D, R
Not active / Active
…
… (**)
Not active / Active
… (**)
… (**)
D, R
Not active / Active
… (**)
Not active / Active
… (**)
… (**)
D, R
0.0…100.0
… (**)
Not active / Active
… (**)
… (**)
D, R
0.0…100.0
Not active / Active
Not active / Active
Light / Serious
0…9999
Not active / Active
Not active / Active
Not active / Active
Light / Serious
0…9999
Not active / Active
Monday, …, Sunday
…
…
---
…
…
…
…
-----------------------------------
----…
------…
------…
…
min
--…
…
min
Not active / Active
OFF / ON
… (**)
0.0…100.0
OFF / ON
OFF / ON
… (**)
0.0…100.0
OFF / ON
OFF / ON
… (**)
… (**)
0…999/0…999
OFF / ON
… (**)
… (**)
0…999/0…999
Aa70
(display only)
Aa71
(display only)
Aa72
(display only)
Aaan
(display only)
…
Aaar
(display only)
Aaas
(display only)
Aaat
(display only)
Aaau
(display only)
Aaav
(display only)
Aaaw
(display only)
Aaax
(display only)
Aaay
(display only)
Aaaz
(display only)
Aaa1
(display only)
…
TB4: --:-- -&gt; --:-Status
Status
Heat recl. temp.
An.OUT modulat.
HR Prevent
Status
Heat recl. temp.
An.OUT modulat.
HR Prevent
Status
Ext.temp.
Ext.temp.thr.
Time fan 100%
Status
Ext.temp.
Ext.temp.thr.
Time fan 100%
pRack +0300025EN rel. 1.3 - 17.12.2015
54
ENG
Mask index
Aaa2
(display only)
Aaa4 (display
only)
Aaa5 (display
only)
Aaa6 (display
only)
Ab01
(display only)
Display description
Cond.temp.
Liquid Temp.
Subcooling
Status
Action 1
Action 2
Action 1
Action 2
Current
Inst. power
Power today
Previous
User setp.
Actual.setpoint
Diﬀ.
User setp.
Actual.setpoint
Ab02
(display only)
Neutral zone
Incr.diﬀ.
Decr.diﬀ.
User setp.
Ab03
(display only)
Setpoint
Setpoint
Setpoint
Setpoint
Status
User-deﬁned set point for suction pressure control, proportional control
(line 2)
Eﬀective set point for suction pressure control, proportional control (with
compensation applied, line 2)
Suction pressure control diﬀerential, proportional control (line 2)
User-deﬁned set point for suction pressure control, proportional control
(line 2)
Eﬀective set point for suction pressure control, proportional control (with
compensation applied, line 2)
Neutral zone for suction pressure control (line 2)
Increase diﬀerential for suction pressure control, neutral zone control (line 2)
Decrease diﬀerential for suction pressure control, neutral zone control (line 2)
User-deﬁned set point for condensing pressure control, proportional control
(line 1)
Eﬀective set point for condensing pressure control, proportional control
(with compensation applied, line 1)
Condensing pressure control diﬀerential, proportional control (line 1)
User-deﬁned set point for condensing pressure control, proportional control
(line 1)
Eﬀective set point for condensing pressure control, proportional control
(with compensation applied, line 1)
Neutral zone for condensing pressure control (line 1)
Increase diﬀerential for the condensing pressure control, neutral zone control
(line 1)
Decrease diﬀerential for the condensing pressure control, neutral zone
control (line 1)
User-deﬁned set point for condensing pressure control, proportional control
(line 2)
Eﬀective set point for condensing pressure control, proportional control
(with compensation applied, line 2)
Condensing pressure control diﬀerential, proportional control
(line 2)
User-deﬁned set point for condensing pressure control, proportional control
(line 2)
Eﬀective set point for condensing pressure control, proportional control
(with compensation applied, line 2)
Neutral zone for condensing pressure control (line 2)
Increase diﬀerential for the condensing pressure control, neutral zone control
(line 2)
Decrease diﬀerential for the condensing pressure control, neutral zone
control (line 2)
Setpoint without compensation (suction line 1)
Setpoint without compensation (condenser line 1)
Setpoint without compensation (suction line 2)
Setpoint without compensation (condenser line 2)
Unit status (display only)
---
On-Oﬀ from keypad (line 1)
Actual.setp.
Diﬀ.
User setp.
Ab04
(display only)
Ab05
(display only)
Actual.setp.
Neutral zone
Incr.diﬀ.
Decr.diﬀ.
User setp.
Actual.setp.
Diﬀ.
User setp.
Actual.setp.
Ab06
(display only)
Neutral zone
Incr.diﬀ.
Decr.diﬀ.
User setp.
Ab07
(display only)
Actual.setp.
Diﬀ.
User setp.
Actual setp.
Ab08
(display only)
Neutral zone
Incr.diﬀ.
Decr.diﬀ.
Ab12
Ab13
Ab14
Ab15
Description
Saturated condensing temperature (line 1)
Liquid temperature (line 1)
Subcooling (line 1)
Status of subcooling function (line 1)
Description and status of the reduced power consumption action associated
with the ﬁrst digital input from pLoads (line 1)
Description and status of the reduced power consumption action associated
with the second digital input from pLoads (line 1)
Description and status of the reduced power consumption action associated
with the ﬁrst digital input from pLoads (line 2)
Description and status of the reduced power consumption action associated
with the second digital input from pLoads (line 2)
Value read by the current sensor (line 1)
Instant power calculated (line 1)
Power consumption during the current day (line 1)
Power consumption during the previous day (line 1)
User-deﬁned set point for suction pressure control, proportional control
(line 1)
Eﬀective set point for suction pressure control, proportional control (with
compensation applied, line 1)
Suction pressure control diﬀerential, proportional control (line 1)
User-deﬁned set point for suction pressure control, proportional control
(line 1)
Eﬀective set point for suction pressure control, proportional control (with
compensation applied, line 1)
Neutral zone for suction pressure control (line 1)
Increase diﬀerential for suction pressure control, neutral zone control (line 1)
Decrease diﬀerential for suction pressure control, neutral zone control
(line 1)
Default
---------
UOM
…
…
…
---
Values
… (**)
… (**)
… (**)
Open / Closed
---
---
OFF / ON
---
---
OFF / ON
---
---
OFF / ON
---
---
OFF / ON
-----------
A
kW
kWh
kWh
…
0 to 999.9
0 to 100
0 to 32767
0 to 32767
… (**)
---
…
… (**)
-----
…
…
… (**)
… (**)
---
…
… (**)
-------
…
…
…
… (**)
… (**)
… (**)
---
…
… (**)
---
…
… (**)
-----
…
…
… (**)
… (**)
---
…
… (**)
---------
…
…
…
…
… (**)
… (**)
… (**)
… (**)
---
…
… (**)
-----
…
…
… (**)
… (**)
---
…
… (**)
-----
…
…
… (**)
… (**)
---
…
… (**)
---
…
… (**)
---
…
… (**)
---
…
… (**)
---
…
… (**)
---
…
… (**)
-----
…
…
… (**)
… (**)
---
…
… (**)
3,5 barg
12,0 barg
3,5 barg
12,0 barg
Oﬀ from
keypad
…
…
…
…
---
… (**)
… (**)
… (**)
… (**)
Waiting..
Unit On/
Oﬀ from alarm
Oﬀ from
blackout
Oﬀ from BMS
OFF
---
OFF / ON
Ac01
55
Oﬀ by default
Oﬀ by DIN
Oﬀ from
keypad
Manual op.
Prevent HP
pRack +0300025EN rel. 1.3 - 17.12.2015
ENG
Mask index
Ac02
Ac03
Ac04
Ac06
Ac07
Mask index
Display description
L1:
L2:
----Enable of unit OnOﬀ
By digit input
By supervisor
By black out
Unit on delay after
blackout
Enable of unit OnOﬀ
By digit input
By supervisor
By black out
Unit on delay after
blackout
Display Description
Description
Unit status (display only)
UOM
---
Values
…(See above Ac01)
On-Oﬀ from keypad (line 1)
On-Oﬀ from keypad (line 2)
Enable unit On/Oﬀ from digit input (line 1)
Default
Oﬀ from
keypad
OFF
OFF
NO
-------
OFF / ON
OFF / ON
NO / YES
Enable unit On/Oﬀ from supervisor (line 1)
Enable unit On/Oﬀ from black out (line 1)
System on delay after black out (line 1)
NO
NO
0
----s
NO / YES
NO / YES
0…999
Enable unit On/Oﬀ from digit input (line 2)
NO
---
NO / YES
Enable unit On/Oﬀ from supervisor (line 2)
Enable unit On/Oﬀ from black out (line 2)
System on delay after black out (line 2)
NO
NO
0
----s
NO / YES
NO / YES
0…999
Description
Default
UOM
Values
B.Input./output (the I/Os available depend on the selected conﬁguration, the following are just some examples. For the complete list of I/O positions available see Appendix A.5)
DI
Alarm 1 for compressor 1 DI position (line 1)
03
-----, 01…18, B1…B10 (****)
Status (display only)
Status of alarm 1 for compressor 1 DI (line 1)
----Closed
Baa02
Open
Logic
Logic of alarm 1 for compressor 1 DI (line 1)
NC
--NC / NO
Function (display only)
Alarm 1 for compressor 1 function status (line 1)
----Not active / Active
…
…
…
…
…
…
--Suction pressure probe position (line1)
B1
-----, B1…B10 (****)
--Suct pressure probe type (line 1)
4-20mA
-----0-1V - 0-10V- 4-20mA- 0-5V
Bab01
--- (display only)
Suction pressure value (line 1)
--…
… (**)
Upper value
Suct pressure maximum value (line 1)
7,0 barg
…
… (**)
Lower value
Suct pressure minimum value (line 1)
-0,5 barg
…
… (**)
Calibration
Suction pressure probe adjustment (line 1)
0.0 barg
…
… (**)
…
…
…
…
…
…
Line relay DO
Compressor 1 line DO position and status (On/Oﬀ ) display (line 1)
…
-----, 01…29 (****)
Part winding DO/Star
Compressor 1 part winding or star DO position and status (On/Oﬀ )
…
-----, 01…29 (****)
Bac02
relay DO (*)
display (line 1)
---/ Delta relay DO (*)
Compressor 1 delta DO position and status (On/Oﬀ ) display (line 1)
…
-----, 01…29 (****)
Logic
DO logic to start compressor 1 (line 1)
NC
--NC / NO
DO
Compressor 1 unloader 1 DO position (line 1)
…
-----, 01…29 (****)
Status (display only)
Status for compressor 1 unloader 1 DO (line 1)
----Closed / Open
Bac03
Logic
Logic for compressor 1 unloader 1 DO (line 1)
NO
--NC / NO
Function (display only)
Compressor 1 unloader 1 function status (line 1)
----Not active / Active
…
…
…
…
…
…
AO
Compressor modulating device AO position (line 1)
0
-----, 01…06 (****)
---Type of output, PWM / phase control for compressor modulating device FCS1*-CONBad01
Type (****)
--FCS1*-CONVONOFF
(line 1)
VONOFF
FCS3*-CONV010&quot;
Status (display only)
Modulating device output value (line 1)
0
%
0.0 to 100.0
…
…
…
…
…
…
Suction L1
Suction line 1 in manual mode
DIS
--DIS / EN
Suction L2
Suction line 2 in manual mode
DIS
--DIS / EN
Bb01
Discharge L1
Condenser line 1 in manual mode
DIS
--DIS / EN
Discharge L2
Condenser line 2 in manual mode
DIS
--DIS / EN
Timeout
Manual mode duration after last key pressed
10
min
0…500
Compressor 1
Manual stages request for compressor 1 (line 1)
OFF
--OFF / ON
3 STAGES (*)
Bba02
Force to
2 STAGES (*)
4 STAGES (*)
…
…
…
…
…
…
Compressor 12
Manual stage request for compressor 12 (line 1)
OFF
--OFF / ON
3 STAGES (*)
Bba16
Force to
2 STAGES (*)
4 STAGES (*)
Oil cool pump1
Manual operating status for oil cooling pump 1 (line 1)
OFF
--OFF / ON
Force to
Bba17
Oil cool pump2
Manual operating status for oil cooling pump 2 (line 1)
OFF
--OFF / ON
Force to
Oil cool fan
Manual operating status for oil cooling fan (line 1)
OFF
--OFF / ON
Bba18
Force to
Compressor 1
Manual stage request for compressor 1 (line 2)
OFF
--OFF / ON
3 STAGES (*)
Bba20
Force to
2 STAGES (*)
4 STAGES (*)
…
…
…
…
…
Compressor 12
Manual stage request for compressor 12 (line 2)
OFF
--OFF / ON
3 STAGES (*)
Bba34
Force to
2 STAGES (*)
4 STAGES (*)
Oil cool pump1
Manual operating status for oil cooling pump 1 (line 2)
OFF
--OFF / ON
Force to
Bba35
Oil cool pump2
Manual operating status for oil cooling pump 2 (line 2)
OFF
--OFF / ON
Force to
Manual operating status for oil cooling fan (line 2)
OFF
--OFF / ON
Oil cool fan
Bba37
Force to
Fan1
Manual operating status for fan 1 (line 1)
OFF
--OFF / ON
Bba38
force
…
…
…
…
…
…
Fan16
Manual operating status for fan 16 (line 1)
OFF
--OFF / ON
Bba53
force
pRack +0300025EN rel. 1.3 - 17.12.2015
56
ENG
Mask index
Bba54
Bba55
Bba57
Display Description
Heat reclaim pump
force
ChillBooster
force
Fan1
force
…
Bba72
Bba73
Bba74
Bbb05
Bbb06
Bbb07
Bbb08
Bbb09
Bbb10
Bbb11
Bbb12
Bc01
Bc02
Bca10
…
Bca26
Bcb10
…
Bcb12
Mask index
Fan16
force
Heat reclaim pump
force
ChillBooster
force
Compressor 1
Force to
Oil cool pump
Force to
Compressor 1
Force to
Oil cool pump
Force to
Fan1
Force to
Heat reclaim pump
force
Fan1
Force to
Heat reclaim pump
force
Test Dout
Timeout
Test Aout
Timeout
DO1
…
DO29
AO1
AO6
Display description
Description
Manual operating status for heat recovery pump (line 1)
Default
OFF
UOM
--OFF / ON
Manual operating status for ChillBooster (line 1)
OFF
---
OFF / ON
Manual operating status for fan 1 (line 2)
OFF
---
OFF / ON
…
Manual operating status for fan 16 (line 2)
…
OFF
…
---
…
OFF / ON
Manual operating status for heat recovery pump (line 2)
OFF
---
OFF / ON
Manual operating status for ChillBooster (line 2)
OFF
---
OFF / ON
Manual continuous capacity request for compressor 1 (line 1)
0.0
%
0.0…100.0
Manual request for oil cooling pump (line 1)
0.0
%
0.0…100.0
Manual continuous capacity request for compressor 1 (line 2)
0.0
%
0.0…100.0
Manual request for oil cooling pump (line 2)
0.0
%
0.0…100.0
Manual continuous capacity request for fan 1 (line 1)
0.0
%
0.0…100.0
Manual request for heat recovery pump (line 1)
0.0
%
0.0…100.0
Manual continuous capacity request for fan 1 (line 2)
0.0
%
0.0…100.0
Manual request for heat recovery pump (line 2)
0.0
%
v
Enable DO test mode
Test mode duration after last button pressed
Enable AO test mode
Test mode duration after last button pressed
DO 1 logic for test
DO 1 value for test
…
DO 29 logic for test
DO 29 value for test
AO 1 value for test
…
AO 6 value for test
NO
10
NO
10
NO
OFF
…
NO
OFF
0.0
…
0.0
--min
--min
----…
------…
---
NO / YES
0…500
NO / YES
0…500
NO / NC
OFF / ON
…
NO / NC
OFF / ON
0.0…100.0
…
0.0…100.0
Description
Default
UOM
Values
Values
C.Compressors(*) (The I/Os available depend on the selected conﬁguration, the following are just some examples. For the complete list of I/O positions available see
Appendix A.5)
DI
Alarm 1 for compressor 1 DI position (line 1)
03
-----, 01…18, B1…B10 (****)
Status (display only)
Status of alarm 1 for compressor 1 DI (line 1)
----Closed / Open
Caa01
Logic
Logic of alarm 1 for compressor 1 DI (line 1)
NC
--NC / NO
Function (display only)
Alarm 1 for compressor 1 function status (line 1)
----Not active / Active
…
…
…
…
…
…
Line relay DO
Compressor 1 part winding or star DO position and status (On/Oﬀ )
…
-----, 01…29 (****)
display (line 1)
Part winding DO/Star
Compressor 1 delta DO position and status (On/Oﬀ ) display (line 1)
…
-----, 01…29 (****)
Caa08
relay DO (*)
---/ Delta relay DO (*)
Compressor 1 line DO position and status (On/Oﬀ ) display (line 1)
…
-----, 01…29 (****)
Logic
DO logic to start compressor 1 (line 1)
NC
--NC / NO
DO
Unloader 1 for compressor 1 DO position (line 1)
…
-----, 01…29 (****)
Status (display only)
Status of unloader 1 for compressor 1 DI (line 1)
----Closed / Open
Caa09
Logic
Logic of unloader 1 for compressor 1 DI (line 1)
NC
--NC / NO
Function (display only)
Unloader 1 for compressor 1 function status (line 1)
----Not active / Active
…
…
…
…
…
…
AO
Compressor modulating device AO position (line 1)
0
-----, 01…06 (****)
---Type of output, PWM / phase control for compressor modulating device FCS1*-CONCaa14
Type (****)
--FCS1*-CONVONOFF
(line 1)
VONOFF
FCS3*-CONV010&quot;
Status (display only)
Modulating device output value (line 1)
0
%
0.0…100.0
…
…
…
…
…
…
--Suction pressure probe position (line1)
B1
-----, B1…B10 (****)
--Suct pressure probe type (line 1)
4-20mA
-----0-1V
0-10V
4-20mA
Caaal
0-5V
--- (display only)
Suction temperature value (line 1)
--…
… (**)
Upper value
Suct pressure maximum limit (line 1)
7,0 barg
…
… (**)
Lower value
Suct pressure minimum limit (line 1)
-0,5 barg
…
… (**)
Calibration
Suction pressure probe adjustment (line 1)
0.0 barg
…
… (**)
…
…
…
…
…
…
Regulation by
Compressor control by temperature or pressure (line 1)
PRESSURE
--PRESSURE TEMPERATURE
Regulation type
Compressor control type (line 1)
NEUTRAL
--PROPORTIONAL BAND
Cab01
ZONE
NEUTRAL ZONE
Minimum
Compressor setpoint lower limit (line 1)
… (**)
…
… (**)
Cab02
Maximum
Compressor setpoint higher limit (line 1)
… (**)
…
… (**)
Cab03
Setpoint
Compressor setpoint (line 1)
… (**)
…
… (**)
57
pRack +0300025EN rel. 1.3 - 17.12.2015
ENG
Mask index
Display description
Reg.type
Integral time
Cab05/Cab7 (**) Diﬀerential
NZ diﬀ.
Cab08/Cab10 (**) Activ.diﬀ.
Deact.diﬀ.
En.force oﬀ power
Cab09/Cab11 (**)
Setp.for force oﬀ
Power load to 100% min
time
Cab12
Power load to 100% max
time
Power unload to 0% min
time
Cab13
Power unload to 0% max
time
Enable Aux cont.
Probe type
Description
Type for proportional control (line 1)
Integral time for proportional control (line 1)
Diﬀerential for proportional control (line 1)
Neutral zone control diﬀerential (line 1)
Neutral zone control diﬀerential for device activation (line 1)
Neutral zone control diﬀerential for device deactivation (line 1)
Enable capacity immediate decreasing to 0 (line 1)
Threshold for capacity decreasing to 0 (line 1)
Minimum time to increase capacity request to 100%, Neutral zone
control (suction line 1)
Maximum time to increase capacity request to 100%, Neutral zone
control (suction line 1)
Minimum time to decrease capacity request to 0%, Neutral zone control
(suction line 1)
Maximum time to decrease capacity request to 0%, Neutral zone control
(suction line 1)
Enable auxiliary control
Probe used for auxiliary control
Default
PROPORT.
300
… (**)
… (**)
… (**)
… (**)
NO
… (**)
15
UOM
--s
…
…
…
…
--…
s
Values
PROPORTIONAL PROP.+INT.
0…999
… (**)
… (**)
… (**)
… (**)
NO / YES
… (**)
0…9999
90
s
0…9999
30
s
0…9999
180
s
0…9999
Refrig. type
Type of refrigerant in auxiliary circuit
R404A
Working hours
Compressor 1
(Check in…)
Compressor 2
(Check in…)
…
Working hours
Compressor 11
(Check in…)
Compressor 12
(Check in…)
Compressor threshold
working hours
Compressor hours reset
Enable suction setpoint
compensation
Enable compensation by
analog IN
Winter oﬀset
Closing oﬀset
Enable setpoint compensation by scheduler
Activ.Time Bands
TB1: --:-- -&gt; --:--
Compressor 1 operating hours (line 1)
---
h
NO/YES
PRESSURE/TEMPERATURE
R22 - R134a - R404A - R407C
-R410A - R507A - R290 - R600
- R600a - R717 -R744 - R728 R1270 - R417A - R422D -R413A R422A - R423A - R407A - R427A
- R245Fa - R407F - R32\
0…999999
Compressor 1 remaining operating hours (line 1)
Compressor 2 operating hours (line 1)
Compressor 2 remaining operating hours (line 1)
…
Compressor 11 operating hours (line 1)
…
--…
…
---
h
h
h
…
h
0…999999
0…999999
0…999999
…
0…999999
Compressor 11 remaining operating hours (line 1)
Compressor 12 operating hours (line 1)
Compressor 12 remaining operating hours (line 1)
Compressor maintenance threshold hours (line 1)
…
--…
88000
h
h
h
h
0…999999
0…999999
0…999999
0…9999999
Reset compressor operating hours (line 1)
Enable setpoint compensation (suction line 1)
N
NO
-----
NO / YES
NO / YES
Enable setpoint compensation by probe (suction line 1)
NO
---
NO / YES
Oﬀset applied for Winter period
Oﬀset applied for closing period
Enable scheduler setpoint compensation (suction line 1)
0.0
0.0
NO
…
…
---
-999.9…999.9
-999.9…999.9
NO / YES
-----
--…
MON, TUE, ...SUN
…
…
---
…
…
…
…
Changes
Day of the week
Time band 1 enabling and deﬁnition: start hour and minute, end hour
and minute (suction line 1)
…
Time band 4 enabling and deﬁnition: start hour and minute, end hour
and minute (suction line 1)
Time band change action
---
---
Copy to
Copy settings to other days
0
---
Change set by DI
-----
Enable setpoint compensation by digital input (suct/cond line 1)
NO
Position of the probe for suction pressure setpoint compensation (line1) --Type of the probe for suction pressure setpoint compensation (line1)
4-20mA
-------
--- (display only)
max
min
Enable ﬂoating suction
setpoint
Maximum ﬂoating
setpoint
Minimum ﬂoating
setpoint
Max.setpoint variation
admitted
Oﬄine decreasing time
Compensation value (line 1)
Maximum value of compensation (line 1)
Minimum value of compensation (line 1)
Enable ﬂoating setpoint (suction line 1)
------NO
…
…
…
---
--CONFIRM&amp;SAVE
LOAD PREVIOUS
CLEAR ALL
MONDAY…SUNDAY;
MON-FRI; MON-SAT;
SAT&amp;SUN; ALL DAYS
NO / YES
---, B1…B10 (****)
---0-1V - 0-10V- 4-20mA- 0-5V
-99.9…99.9
-99.9…99.9
-99.9…99.9
NO / YES
Max compressor ﬂoating setpoint settable (line 1)
… (**)
…
… (**)
Minimum compressor ﬂoating setpoint settable (line 1)
… (**)
…
… (**)
Maximum delta admitted for ﬂoating setpoint (suction line 1)
… (**)
…
… (**)
Reduction time when supervisor is oﬄine for ﬂoating setpoint
(suction line 1)
0
min
0…999
Enable interactions with pLoads (line 1)
NO
---
NO / YES
Cab04/Cab6 (**)
NO
PRESSURE
Cab20
Cac01
…
Cac11
Cac13
Cac14
Cad01
Cad02
Cad03
…
TB4: --:-- -&gt; --:-Cad04
Cad05
Cad06
Cad08
Cad09
Cad10
Cad11
Enable interactions with
pLoads
Pressure threshold
disabled
Reactivate delay
pRack +0300025EN rel. 1.3 - 17.12.2015
Suction pressure threshold for disabling pLoads (line 1)
…(**)
…
0.0 to 99.9
pLoads activation delay, previously disabled by a threshold
60
s
60…9999
58
ENG
Mask index
Display description
0.0
Conﬁg. action 2
Conﬁguration of action associated with the second digital input connected to pLoads (line 1)
NO ACTION ---
NO ACTIONLIMIT TO CURRENT
CAPACITYLIMIT CAPACITY
TODEC. CAPACITY BY
0.0
%
0.0 to 100.0
NO
NO
SINGLEPHASE
400
1.0
NO
1/4 (*)
-----
NO / YES
NO / YES
---
SINGLE-PHASE/THREE-PHASE
V
-------
0 to 999
0.0 to 1.0
NO / YES
0…4/7 (*)
Cae24
Cae25
Cae26
Cae27
Cae28
Cae29
Cae30
Cae40
Load
Number of phases
Voltage
Cos(phi)
Reset counter
Number of alarms for
each compressor
Alarm1 description
Mains voltage
Displacement (cosφ)
Reset current power counter
Number of alarms for each compressor (line 1)
…
---
Alarm1 description (*)
Selection of the ﬁrst compressor alarm description: Rotation, Oil warning …
(line 1)
---
Activ.delay
Start up delay
Reset
Priority
…
Suction pressure/temperature high alarm
Threshold
Alarm diﬀ.
Activation delay for compressor alarm 1 during working (line 1)
Activation delay for compressor alarm 1 at start up (line 1)
Type of reset for compressor alarm 1 (line 1)
Type of priority for compressor alarm 1 (line 1)
…
Type of high suction pressure/temperature alarm threshold
0
0
AUT.
SERIOUS
…
ABSOLUTE
s
s
----…
---
_ (Not available)
 (Not selected)
_ (Selected)
_ (Not available)
 (Not selected)
_ (Selected)
0…999
0…999
AUT. / MAN.
LIGHT / SERIOUS
…
ABSOLUTE / RELATIVE
High suction pressure/temperature alarm threshold
High suction pressure/temperature alarm diﬀerential
… (**)
… (**)
…
…
… (**)
… (**)
Alarm delay
Suction pressure/temperature low alarm
Threshold
Alarm diﬀ.
Alarm delay
Enable oil temperature
alarm management (*)
Enable discharge temp.
alarm management (*)
Low superheat alarm
threshold
Alarm diﬀ.
Switch OFF comp.
Reset
Alarm delay
Time of semi-automatic
alarm evaluation
N&deg; of reties before alarm
becomes manual
Switch oﬀ comp.1
Reset
Alarm delay
Compressors type
High suction pressure/temperature alarm delay
Type of low suction pressure/temperature alarm threshold
120
ABSOLUTE
s
---
0…999
ABSOLUTE / RELATIVE
Low suction pressure/temperature alarm threshold
Low suction pressure/temperature alarm diﬀerential
Low suction pressure/temperature alarm delay
Enable Digital Scroll&yen; oil temperature alarm (line 1)
… (**)
… (**)
30
NO
…
…
s
---
… (**)
… (**)
0…999
NO / YES
Enable Digital Scroll&yen; discharge temperature alarm (line 1)
NO
---
NO / YES
Threshold for low superheat alarm (line 1)
3,0
K
0.0…99.9
Low superheat alarm diﬀerential (line 1)
Enable compressor oﬀ for low superheat alarm (line 1)
Type of low superheat alarm reset (line 1)
Low superheat alarm delay (line 1)
Time of semi-automatic alarm evaluation for screw compressors out
of envelope (line 1)
Number of retries before alarm becomes manual (line 1)
1,0
NO
MANUAL
30
2
K
----s
min
0.0…9,9
NO / YES
MANUAL / AUTO
0…999
0…999
3
---
0…9
Enable compressor 1 oﬀ for compressor inverter warning (line 1)
Type of compressor inverter warning reset (line 1)
Compressor inverter warning activation delay (line 1)
Type of compressors (line 1)
NO
MANUAL
0
RECIPROCATING
----s
---
Compressors number
Cmp1,…
Number of compressors (line 1)
Enable compressors (line 1)
2/3 (*)
DIS
-----
NO / YES
MANUAL/AUTO
0…999
RECIPROCATING
SCROLL
SCREW
1…6/12 (*)
DIS / EN
Refrigerant type
Type of refrigerant (suction Line 1)
R404A
---
Min on time
Min oﬀ time
Min time to start same
compressor
Ignition type
Minimum compressor on time (line 1)
Minimum compressor oﬀ time (line 1)
Minimum time between same compressor starts (line 1)
30
120
360
s
s
s
Type of compressors start up
DIRECT
---
Star time
Star line delay
Star delta delay
Partwinding delay
Equalization
Equalizat.time
Star relay run time
Delay between star and line relay
Delay between star and delta relay
Partwinding delay
Enable compressors equalization at start up
Equalization duration
0
0
0
0
NO
0
ms
ms
ms
ms
--s
Selection of the ﬁrst compressor alarm description: Generic, Overload,
High pressure, Low pressure, Oil (line 1)
Caf04
Caf05
Caf06
Caf07
Caf08
Caf09
0.0 to 100.0
Enable supervisor action
Enable
Caf02
Caf03
%
Percentage value to limit capacity to or reduce capacity by if the ''LIMIT
CAPACITY TO'' or ''LIMIT CAPACITY BY'' actions have been conﬁgured
respectively (line 1)
Enable pLoads action from supervisor (line 1)
Enable calculation of power consumption
Cae03
…
Values
NO ACTIONLIMIT TO CURRENT
CAPACITYLIMIT CAPACITY
TODEC. CAPACITY BY
Percentage value to limit capacity to or reduce capacity by if the ''LIMIT
CAPACITY TO'' or ''LIMIT CAPACITY BY'' actions have been conﬁgured
respectively (line 1)
Cae02
Cae04
UOM
---
---
Cae01
Default
Conﬁg. action 1
Cad12
Cad13
Description
Conﬁguration of action associated with the ﬁrst digital input connected
NO ACTION --to pLoads (line 1)
59
R22 - R134a - R404A - R407C R410A - R507A - R290 - R600 R600a - R717 -R744 - R728 R1270 - R417A - R422D -R413A R422A - R423A - R407A - R427A
- R245Fa - R407F - R32
0…999
0…999
0…999
DIRECT
PART WINDING
STAR DELTA
0…9999
0…9999
0…9999
0…9999
NO / YES
0…999
pRack +0300025EN rel. 1.3 - 17.12.2015
ENG
Mask index
Display description
Devices rotation type
Description
Dev. unload sequence
Unloader sequence in relation to compressor activation (C=compressor, CpppCppp
p=unloader)
Load up time
Load down time
Unloader delay
Custom rotation
Switch ON order
Custom rotation
Switch OFF order
Modulate speed device
Delay between diﬀerent compressor starts
Delay between diﬀerent compressor stops
Delay between stages
Order of switch ON for compressor custom rotation
10
0
0
1
UOM
Values
-------FIFO
LIFO
TIME
CUSTOM
---------CCpppppp
CpppCppp
s
0…999
s
0…999
s
0…999
--1…16
Order of switch OFF for compressor custom rotation
1
---
1…16
Compressor driver type (line 1)
NONE
---
Min. frequency
Max. frequency
Min on time
Min oﬀ time
Min time to start same
compressor
Digital Scroll&yen; comp.
valve regulation
Minimum inverter frequency
Maximum inverter frequency
Compressor controlled by inverter minimum ON time (line 1)
Compressor controlled by inverter minimum OFF time (line 1)
Compressor controlled by inverter minimum time between same compressor starts (line 1)
Digital Scroll&yen; comp. valve control type (line 1)
30
60
30
60
180
Hz
Hz
s
s
s
NONE
INVERTER
DIGITAL SCROLL
CONTINUOUS SCREW
0…150
0…150
0…999
0…999
0…999
OPTIMISED
CONTROL
---
Cycle time
Oil dilution
Disch.temper.
Compr.Manufacturer
Cycle time value (line 1)
Digital Scroll&yen;, enable oil temperature alarm (line 1)
Digital Scroll&yen;, enable discharge temperature alarm (line 1)
Compressor manufacturer for screw compressors
13
ENABLE
ENABLE
GENERIC
s
-------
Compressor series
Number of valves
Stages conﬁguration
Compressor series
Number of valves used for capacity control
Stage conﬁguration for screw compressor 1
…(***)
3
25/50/75
/100
----%
Common time
Enable common delay time (from one stage to the following) for screw
compressor 1
Common delay time (from one stage and the following) for screw
compressor 1
Minimum compressor delay time in order to reach each capacity stage
from previous for screw compressor 1
Intermittent on/oﬀ time for capacity control valves for screw compressor 1
Conﬁguration of the behaviour of the valves during start/stop and stages
for screw compressor 1
ENABLE
---
DISABLE/ENABLE
0
s
0…999
…
s
0…999
10
…
s
---
Enable time limit at minimum capacity for screw compressor 1
ENABLE
---
Max time for compressor operation at minimum capacity for screw
compressor 1
Time to return to minimum after the compressor was forced to second
stage after staying at minimum for max. time for screw compressor 1
Minimum compressor capacity in case of high capacity range (usually
25%), only for continuous compressors
Start-up phase time (after electric start-up)
60
s
0…99
O (ON)
X (OFF)
I (Intermittent)
P (Pulsing)
DISABLE
ENABLE
0…9999
0
s
0…9999
25
%
0…100
10
s
0…999
Maximum time in order to reach maximum compressor capacity (continuous capacity control)
Minimum time in order to reach minimum compressor capacity (continuous capacity control)
Intermittent on/oﬀ time for capacity control valves
Pulsing period for valves (for continuous compressors)
Minimum pulse time for increase capacity (valves control)
Maximum pulse time for increase capacity (valves control)
Minimum pulse time for decrease capacity (valves control)
Maximum pulse time for decrease capacity (valves control)
Conﬁguration of the behaviour of the valves during start/stop, incr.min%
to 100%, decr.100% to min%, standby, decr.100% to 50%
120
s
0…999
120
s
0…999
10
3
0,5
1,0
0,5
1,0
…
s
s
s
s
s
s
---
Number of valves
Stages conﬁguration
Number of control capacity valves for screw compressor 2
Stage conﬁguration for screw compressor 2
--%
…
Diﬀerent sizes
Diﬀerent number of
valves
S1
…
Enable compressors of diﬀerent sizes (line 1)
Enable compressor capacity control (line 1)
3
25/50/
75/100
…
NO
NO
…
-----
0…99
1…10
0.0…9,9
0.0…9,9
0.0…9,9
0.0…9,9
O (ON)
X (OFF)
I (Intermittent)
P (Pulsing)
1…4
100; 50/100; 50/75/100;
25/50/75/100; 33/66/100
…
NO / YES
NO / YES
Enable size and size for compressor group 1 (line 1)
…
S4
…
Enable size and size for compressor group 4 (line 1)
YES
10.0
…
NO
--kW
…
----kW
NO / YES
0.0…500.0
…
--NO / YES
0.0…500.0
Type of rotation
Default
FIFO
Caf10
Caf11
Caf12
Caf13
Caf14
Caf15
Caf16
Caf17
Caf18
Caf19
Caf20
Caf21
Caf22
Caf23
Common time/time
between steps
From…to…
Intermittent valve time
Valve conf.
Caf24
Caf25
Limit comp.permanence
at min power
Max.perman.time
Limitat.on for
Caf26
Caf27
Caf28
Min.output power
Compressor start-up
phase duration
Maximun time to reach
-maximum power
-minimum power
Intermittent
Pulse period
Min.Puls.Incr.
Max.Puls.Incr.
Min.Puls.Decr.
Max.Puls.Decr.
Valve conf.
Caf29
Caf36
…
Caf90
Caf91
pRack +0300025EN rel. 1.3 - 17.12.2015
60
OPTIMISED CONTROL
VARIABLE CYCLE TIME
FIXED CYCLE TIME
12…20
DISABLE/ENABLE
DISABLE/ENABLE
GENERIC / BITZER
REFCOMP / HANBELL
…(***)
1…4
100; 50/100; 50/75/100;
25/50/75/100; 33/66/100
ENG
Mask index
Caf92
Caf93
Caf95
Cag01
Cag02
Cag03
Cag04
Cag05
Cag06
Cag07
S1
Display description
Description
Enable stages and stages for compressor group 1 (line 1)
Default
YES
100
…
S4
…
Enable stages and stages for compressor group 4 (line 1))
C01
…
C12
Min on time
Min oﬀ time
Min time to start same
compressor
Reactivate start-up
procedure after
Minimum voltage
Maximum voltage
Nominal freq.
Nominal power
Size group for compressor 1 (line 1) or presence of inverter
…
Size group for compressor 6 (line 1)
Minimum Digital ScrollTM compressor On time (line 1)
Minimum Digital ScrollTM compressor Oﬀ time(line 1)
Minimum time between starts for Digital ScrollTM compressor (line 1)
…
NO
--S1
…
S1
60
180
360
…
--kW
--…
--s
s
s
Values
NO/YES
100; 50/100; 50/75/100;
25/50/75/100; 33/66/100
…
NO / YES
S1…S4
S1…S4/INV
…
S1…S4
0…999
0…999
0…999
Digital ScrollTM compressor start-up procedure reactivation time (line 1)
480
min
0…9999
Voltage corresponding to the minimum capacity of the inverter (line 1)
Voltage corresponding to the maximum capacity of the inverter (line 1)
Nominal frequency (nominal capacity at nominal frequency) (line 1)
Nominal capacity for compressor managed by inverter at nominal
frequency (line 1)
Time to pass from min capacity to max capacity for modulat. device (line 1)
Time to pass from max capacity to min capacity for modul. device (line 1)
Enable compressor 1 modulation inside Neutral zone (line 1)
0.0
10.0
50
10.0
V
V
Hz
kW
0.0…10.0
0.0…10.0
0…150
0.0…500.0
90
30
YES
s
s
---
0…600
0…600
NO / YES
Enable screens for suction pressure backup probe conﬁguration
(line 1)
Compressor forcing value in case of suction probes fault (line 1)
NO
---
NO / YES
50.0
%
0.0…100.0
Enable liquid non return function (line 1)
NO
---
NO / YES
Enable compressor envelope management (screw only).
For details on configuration contact Carel.
NO
---
NO / YES
--------…
----…
---
---, 01…18, B1…B10 (****)
Closed / Open
NC / NO
Not active / Active
…
PRESSURE / TEMPERATURE
PROPORTIONAL BAND
NEUTRAL ZONE
…
0…999999
Rising time
Falling time
Enable compressor
modulation inside neutral
zone
Enable suction press.
backup probe
Request in case of regulat.
probe fault
Enable anti liquid return
valve
Enable compressor envelop management (*)
The following parameters refer to line 2, for details see the corresponding parameters for line 1 above
DI
Alarm 1 for compressor 1 DI position (line 2)
Status (display only)
Status of alarm 1 for compressor 1 DI (line 2)
Cba01
Logic
Logic of alarm 1 for compressor 1 DI (line 2)
Function (display only)
Alarm 1 for compressor 1 function status (line 2)
…
…
…
Regulation by
Compressor control by temperature or pressure (line 2)
Regulation type
Compressor control type (line 2)
Cbb01
…
Cbc01
…
Cbd01
…
Cbe01
…
…
Working hours
Compressor 1
…
Enable suction setpoint
compensation
Enable compensation by
analog IN
…
Number of alarms for
each compressor
…
Compressors type
…
Compressor 1 max operating hours (line 2)
03
--NC
--…
PRESSURE
NEUTRAL
ZONE
…
---
…
Enable setpoint compensation (suction line 2)
…
NO
…
---
…
NO / YES
Enable setpoint compensation by probe (suction line 2)
NO
---
NO / YES
…
Number of alarms for each compressor (line 2)
…
1
…
---
…
0 to 4
…
Type of compressors (line 2)
…
---
Compressors number
…
Minimum voltage
Maximum voltage
Nominal freq.
Number of compressors (line 2)
…
Voltage corresponding at the minimum capacity of the inverter (line 2)
Voltage corresponding at the maximum capacity of the inverter (line 2)
Nominal frequency (nominal capacity at nominal frequency) (line 2)
…
RECIPROCATING
2/3 (*)
…
0.0
10.0
50
--…
Hz
Hz
Hz
…
RECIPROCATING
SCROLL
1…12
…
0.0…10.0
0.0…10.0
0…150
Nominal power
Nominal capacity for compressor managed by inverter at nominal
frequency (line 2)
…
10.0
kW
0.0…500.0
…
…
…
Cbf02
…
Cbg01
…
…
Mask index
UOM
--%
Display description
Description
Default
UOM
Values
D.Condensers (The I/Os available depend on the selected conﬁguration, the following are just some examples. For the complete list of I/O positions available see Appendix A.5)
DI
Fan 1 overload DI position (line 1)
…
-----, 01…18, B1…B10 (****)
Status (display only)
Status of fan 1 overload DI (line 1)
----Closed / Open
Daa01
Logic
Logic of fan 1 overload DI (line 1)
NC
--NC / NO
Function (display only)
Fan 1 overload function status (line 1)
----Not active / Active
…
…
…
…
…
…
--Condenser probe position (line 1)
B1
-----, B1…B10 (****)
---0-1V
--Condenser probe type (line 1)
4-20mA
--0-10V
4-20mA
Daa39
0-5V
--- (display only)
Condensing pressure value (line 1)
--…
…(**)
Max limit
Maximum condensing pressure value (line 1)
30,0 barg
…
…(**)
Min limit
Minimum condensing pressure value (line 1)
0,0 barg
…
…(**)
Calib.
Condensing pressure probe calibration (line 1)
0,0 barg
…
…(**)
…
…
…
…
…
…
61
pRack +0300025EN rel. 1.3 - 17.12.2015
ENG
Mask index
Daa21
…
Daa38
…
Dab01
Dab02
Dab03
Dab04
Dab05
Display description
DO
Status (display only)
Logic
Function (display only)
…
AO
Description
Fan 1 DO position (line 1)
Status of fan 1 DO (line 1)
Logic of fan 1 DO (line 1)
Fan 1 function status (line 1)
…
Inverter fan AO position (line 1)
Type (****)
Type of output, PWM / phase control per AO fan inverters (line 1)
Status (display only)
…
Regulation by
Regulation type
Inverter fan output value (line 1)
…
Condenser control by temperature or pressure (line 1)
Condenser control type (line 1)
Minimum
Maximum
Setpoint
Fans work only when at
least one compressor
works
Cut_Oﬀ enable
Condenser setpoint lower limit (line 1)
Condensers setpoint higher limit (line 1)
Condenser setpoint (line 1)
Enable fan operation linked to compressor operation
Default
03
--NC
--…
0
FCS1*-CONVONOFF
0
…
PRESSURE
PROPORTI.
BAND
… (**)
… (**)
… (**)
NO
UOM
--------…
---
…
…
…
---
Values
---, 01…29 (****)
Closed / Open
NC / NO
Not active / Active
…
---, 01…06 (****)
FCS1*-CONVONOFF; &quot; -----&quot;;&quot;
MCHRTF*&quot;;&quot; FCS3*-CONV010&quot;
0.0…100.0
…
PRESSURE/TEMPERATURE
PROPORTIONAL BAND
NEUTRAL ZONE
… (**)
… (**)
… (**)
NO / YES
Enable fan cut-oﬀ function
NO
---
NO / YES
Cut-Oﬀ request
Diﬀ.
Hysteresis
Reg.type
Cut-oﬀ value
Cut-oﬀ diﬀerential
Cut-oﬀ hysteresis
Type for proportional control (condenser line 1)
0.0
… (**)
… (**)
PROP.
%
…
…
---
Integral time for prop. control (cond. line 1)
Diﬀerential for proportional control (cond. line 1)
Neutral zone control diﬀerential (line 1)
Neutral zone control diﬀerential for device activation (line 1)
Neutral zone control diﬀerential for device deactivation (line 1)
Enable capacity immediate decreasing to 0 (line 1)
Threshold for capacity decreasing to 0 (line 1)
Minimum time to increase capacity request to 100%, Neutral zone
control (condenser line 1)
Maximum time to increase capacity request to 100%, Neutral zone
control (condenser line 1)
Minimum time to decrease capacity request to 0%, Neutral zone control
(condenser line 1)
Maximum time to decrease capacity request to 0%, Neutral zone control
(condenser line 1)
Enable setpoint compensation (condenser line 1)
300
… (**)
… (**)
… (**)
… (**)
NO
… (**)
15
s
…
…
…
…
--…
s
0.0…100.0
… (**)
… (**)
PROP.
PROP.+INT.
0…999
… (**)
… (**)
… (**)
… (**)
NO / YES
… (**)
0…9999
90
s
0…9999
30
s
0…9999
180
s
0…9999
NO
---
NO / YES
Enable setpoint compensation (condenser line 1)
Oﬀset applied for Winter period
Enable scheduler setpoint compensation (condenser line 1)
0.0
0.0
NO
…
…
---
-999.9…999.9
-999.9…999.9
NO / YES
-----
--…
MON, ...SUN
…
…
---
…
…
…
…
Changes
Day of the week
Time band 1 enabling and deﬁnition: start hour and minute, end hour
and minute (suction line 1)
…
Time band 4 enabling and deﬁnition: start hour and minute, end hour
and minute (suction line 1)
Time band changes action
---
---
Copy to
Copy settings to other days
0
---
Enable ﬂoating condensing setpoint
Oﬀset for external temperature
Controlled by:
-Digital input
Change set by digital
input
Cond.pressure/temperature high alarm
Threshold
Cond.pressure/temperature alarm diﬀ.
Alarm delay
Cond.pressure/temperature low alarm
Threshold
Cond.pressure/temperature alarm diﬀ.
Alarm delay
Common fan overload
Delay
Reset
Number of present fans
Fan1, Fan2, …
Fan13, Fan14, …
Enable ﬂoating setpoint (condenser line 1)
NO
---
--CONFIRM&amp;SAVE
LOAD PREVIOUS
CLEAR ALL
MONDAY…SUNDAY; MON-FRI;
MON-SAT; SAT&amp;SUN; ALL DAYS
NO / YES
Temperature delta for ﬂoating setpoint (condenser line 1)
0.0
…
-9.9…9.9
Enable ﬂoating condensing from digital input
NO
---
NO / YES
Enable setpoint compensation by digital input (suction/condensing
NO
line 1)
Type of high condensing pressure/temperature alarm threshold (line 1) ABSOLUTE
---
NO / YES
---
ABSOLUTE / RELATIVE
High condensing pressure/temperature alarm threshold (line 1)
High condensing pressure/temperature alarm diﬀerential (line 1)
24.0 barg
1.0 barg
…
…
… (**)
… (**)
High condensing pressure/temperature alarm delay (line 1)
Type of low condensing pressure/temperature alarm threshold
(line 1)
Low condensing pressure/temperature alarm threshold (line 1)
Low condensing pressure/temperature alarm diﬀerential (line 1)
60
ABSOLUTE
s
---
0…999
ABSOLUTE / RELATIVE
7.0 barg
1.0 barg
…
…
… (**)
… (**)
Low condensing pressure/temperature alarm delay (line 1)
Common fan overload (line 1)
Common fan overload alarm activation delay
Type of common fan overload alarm reset
Number of fans (line 1)
Enable fans 1 to 12 (line 1)
Enable fans 13 to 16 (line 1)
30
YES
AUTOMATIC
0
3
EN
EN
s
----s
-------
0…999
NO / YES
AUTOMATIC / MANUAL
0 to 500
0 to 16
DIS / EN
DIS / EN
--%
…
-----
Dab6/ Dab8 (**)
Integral time
Dab7/ Dab9 (**) Diﬀerential
NZ diﬀ.
Dab10/Dab11
Activ.diﬀ.
(**)
Deact.diﬀ.
Dab12/Dab13
En.force oﬀ power
Setp.for force oﬀ
(**)
Power load to 100% min
time
Dab14
Power load to 100% max
time
Power unload to 0% min
time
Dab15
Power unload to 0% max
time
Enable condensing
Dad01
setpoint compensation
Winter oﬀset
Dad02
Closing oﬀset
Enable setpoint compenDad03
sation by scheduler
Activ.Time Bands
TB1: --:-- -&gt; --:-…
TB4: --:-- -&gt; --:-Dad04
Dad05
Dad06
Dad07
Dae01
Dae02
Dae03
Dae04
Dae05
Daf01
Daf02
Daf03
pRack +0300025EN rel. 1.3 - 17.12.2015
62
ENG
Mask index
Display description
Refrigerant type
Description
Type of refrigerant (condenser line 1)
Default
R404A
Devices rotation type
Type of rotation devices (condenser line 1)
FIFO
Custom rotation
Switch ON order
Custom rotation
Switch OFF order
Modulate speed device
Switch ON order for fans with custom rotation (condenser line 1)
1
UOM
Values
--R22 - R134a - R404A - R407C R410A - R507A - R290 - R600 R600a - R717 -R744 - R728 R1270 - R417A - R422D -R413A R422A - R423A - R407A - R427A
- R245Fa - R407F - R32
-------FIFO
LIFO
TIME
CUSTOM
--1…16
Switch OFF order for fans with custom rotation (condenser line 1)
1
---
1…16
Fan driver type (line 1)
NONE
---
Daf04
Daf05
Daf07, Daf08
Daf09, Daf10
NO
0.0
10.0
60
100
1200
--V
V
%
%
s
NONE
INVETER
PHASE CONTROL
---MCHRTF*
FCS3*-CONV010
NO / YES
0.0 to 9.9
0.0 to 99.9
0…100
0…999
0 to 32000
1200
s
0 to 32000
1
NO
---
-------
0 to 16
NO / YES
NO / YES
----10.0 &deg;C
----…
NO / YES
NO / YES
-99.9…99.9
2.5 &deg;C
CUSTOM
…
---
0
---
-99.9…99.9
CUSTOM
ODD
EVEN
GREATER THAN
LESS THAN
0 to 16
NO
---
NO / YES
0
h
0 to 24
DISAB.
75.0 %
NO
--%
---
DISABLE / ENABLE
0.0…100.0
NO / YES
NO
-----
----…
NO / YES
MON, ..., SUN
…
…
---
…
…
…
…
---
---
0
---
YES
5
DIS
25.0 &deg;C
--s
--…
--CONFIRM&amp;SAVE
LOAD PREVIOUS
CLEAR ALL
MONDAY…SUNDAY; MON-FRI;
MON-SAT; SAT&amp;SUN; ALL DAYS
NO / YES
0…60
DIS / EN
-99.9…99.9
2.5 &deg;C
…
-99.9…99.9
NO
---
NO / YES
50.0
%
0.0…100.0
The following parameters refer to line 2, for details see the corresponding parameters for line 1 above
DI
Fan 1 overload DI position (line 2)
Status (display only)
Status of fan 1 overload DI (line 2)
Logic
Logic of fan 1 overload DI (line 2)
Dba01
Function (display only)
Fan 1 overload function status (line 2)
…
--NC
---
---------
…
…
…
---, 01…18, B1…B10 (****)
Closed / Open
NC / NO
Not active
Active
…
Dag01
Type (****)
Dag02
Neutral zone reg.
Min.out value
Max.out value
Min. power refer.
Max. power refer.
Rising time
Dag03
Falling time
Dag04
Num.control.fans
Split Condenser
Controlled by:
-Digital input
-External temp.
-Scheduler
Est. Temp.Thr.
Dag05
Est. Temp.Diﬀ.
Type
Type of output, PWM / phase control for condenser modulating device
---(line 1)
Fan control also inside Neutral zone (line 1)
Minimum voltage for compressor inverter (line 1)
Maximum voltage for compressor inverter (line 1)
Minimum capacity of fan modulating device (line 1)
Maximum capacity of fan modulating device (line 1)
Time to pass from min capacity to max capacity for fan modulating
device (line 1)
Time to pass from max capacity to min capacity for fan modulating
device (line 1)
Number of fans under inverter (only for alarm enabling)
Enable split condenser (line 1)
Split Condenser controlled by digital input (line 1)
Split Condenser controlled by outside temperature (line 1)
Split Condenser controlled by scheduler (line 1)
Split condenser by outside temperature management setpoint
(line 1)
Split condenser by outside temperature management diﬀerential (line 1)
Fans enabled with split condenser (line 1)
---
Dag06
---
Dag09
Dag10
Dag12
Only when enabling type is GREATER THAN or LESS THAN, number of
fans to consider for splitting (line 1)
Disable split condenser as Disable split condenser when high condensing pressure prevent occurs
ﬁrst stage of HP pressostat (line 1)
for
Duration of split condenser deactivation for high condensing
pressure prevent (line 1)
Anti-noise
Enable silencer (line 1)
Max output
Maximum request allowed when silencer function is active (line 1)
Controlled by:
Silencer controlled by digital input (condenser line 1)
-Digital input
-Scheduler
Silencer controlled by scheduler (condenser line 1)
Activ.Time Bands
Day of the week
TB1: --:-- -&gt; --:-Time band 1 enabling and deﬁnition: start hour and minute, end hour
and minute (condenser line 1)
…
…
TB4: --:-- -&gt; --:-Time band 4 enabling and deﬁnition: start hour and minute, end hour
and minute (condenser line 1)
Changes
Time band changes action
Copy to
Dag13
Dag14
Dag15
Copy settings to other days
Speed Up
Speed Up time
Ext.Temp.Manage
Ext.Temp.Thresh.
Enable speed up (condenser line 1)
Speed up time (condenser line 1)
Enable speed up management by outside temperature (condenser line 1)
Outside temperature threshold for speed up management
(condenser line 1)
Ext.Temp.Diﬀ.
Outside temperature diﬀerential for speed up management
(condenser line 1)
Enable condensing press. Enable the screens for condensing pressure backup probe
backup probe
conﬁguration (condenser line 1)
Request in case of egulat. Value of fans forcing in case of condensing probes fault (line 1)
probes fault
…
…
63
pRack +0300025EN rel. 1.3 - 17.12.2015
ENG
Mask index
Dbb01
…
Dbd01
…
Dbe01
…
Dbf01
…
Display description
Regulation by
Regulation type
Description
Condenser control by temperature or pressure (line 2)
Condenser control type (line 2)
…
Enable condensing
setpoint compensation
…
Cond.temperature/pressure high alarm
Threshold
…
Number of present fans
…
Modulate speed device
…
Enable setpoint compensation (condenser line 2)
…
Type of high condensing pressure/temperature alarm threshold
(line 2)
High condensing pressure/temperature alarm threshold (line 2)
…
Number of fans (line 2)
…
Fan driver type (line 2)
Default
PRESSURE
NEUTRAL
ZONE
…
NO
…
ABSOLUTE
24,0 barg
…
3
…
NONE
Dbg01
…
Mask index
Type (****)
Type of output, PWM / phase control for condenser modulating device
---(line 2)
…
…
Display description
…
Description
Default
UOM
Values
--PRESSURE TEMPERATURE
--PROPORTIONAL BAND
NEUTRAL ZONE
…
…
--NO
YES
…
…
--ABSOLUTE
RELATIVE
…
… (**)
…
…
--0 to 16
…
…
--NONE
INVETER
PHASE CONTROL
-----MCHRTF*
FCS3*-CONV010
…
…
UOM
Values
E.Other funct. (The I/Os available depend on the selected conﬁguration, the following are just some examples. For the complete list of I/O positions available
see Appendix A.5)
--Oil temperature probe position (line1)
B1
-----, B1…B10 (****)
--Oil temperature probe type (line 1)
4-20mA
----NTC - PT1000 - 0-1V - 0-10V 4-20mA - 0-5V - HTNTC
Eaaa04
--- (display only)
Oil temperature probe value (line 1)
--…
… (**)
Upper value
Oil temperature probe max. limit (line 1)
30.0 barg
…
… (**)
Lower value
Oil temperature probe min. limit (line 1)
0.0 barg
…
… (**)
Calibration
Oil temperature probe adjustment (line 1)
0.0 barg
…
… (**)
…
…
…
…
…
…
DO
Oil level valve DO position, compressor 6 (line 1)
03
-----, 01…29 (****)
Status (display only)
Oil level valve DO status, compressor 6 (line 1)
----Closed / Open
Eaaa45
Logic
Oil level valve DO logic, compressor 6 (line 1)
NC
--NC / NO
Function (display only)
Oil level function status, compressor 6 (line 1)
----Not active / Active
Common oil cooler
Enable common oil cooling (line 1)
YES
--NO / YES
Oil pumps number
Number of oil pumps for common oil cooler (line 1)
0
--0 to 1 (Analog output)
Eaab04
0 to 2 (Digital outputs)
Enable Aout pump
Enable AO of common oil cooler pump (line 1)
YES
--NO (Digital outputs)
YES (Analog output)
Setpoint
Common oil cooler setpoint (line 1)
0.0 &deg;C
…
… (**)
Eaab05
Diﬀerential
Common oil cooler diﬀerential (line 1)
0.0 &deg;C
…
-9.9…9.9
Eaab06
Pump start delay
Time delay before the start-up of pump 2 after pump1 turns on (line 1) 0
s
0…999
Oil pumps number
Screw compressors: number of oil cooler pumps enabled (line1)
0
--0 to 1 (Analog output)
0 to 2 (Digital outputs)
Eaab07
Enable Aout pump
Screw compressors: enable AO for oil cooler pump (line 1)
YES
--NO (Digital outputs)
YES (Analog output)
Setpoint
Screw compressors: oil temperature setpoint (line 1)
0.0
&deg;C/&deg;F
…
Eaab08
Diﬀerential
Screw compressors: oil temperature diﬀerential (line 1)
0.0
&deg;C/&deg;F
…
Threshold
Common oil high temperature alarm threshold (line 1)
100.0 &deg;C
&deg;C/&deg;F
…
Eaab09
Diﬀerential
Common oil high temperature alarm diﬀerential (line 1)
10.0 &deg;C
&deg;C/&deg;F
…
Delay
Common oil high temperature alarm delay (line 1)
0
s
0 to 32767
En.oil lev.manag.
Enable oil level management (line 1)
NO
--NO / YES
Eaab10
Num.Alarm oil level
Number of compressor alarm associated with oil level (line 1)
0
--0 to 4/7 (*)
Time open
Oil level valve opening time (line 1)
0
s
0…999
Eaab11
Time close
Oil level valve closing time (line 1)
0
s
0…999
DO
Subcooling valve DO position (line 1)
…
-----, 01…29 (****)
Status (display only)
Status of subcooling valve DO (line 1)
----Closed / Open
Ebaa01
Logic
Logic of subcooling valve (line 1)
NO
--NC / NO
Function (display only)
Subcooling valve function status (line 1)
----Not active / Active
Subcooling control
Enable subcooling function (line 1)
NO
--NO / YES
--Subcooling control type (line 1)
BY COND. &amp; --BY COND.&amp; LIQUID TEMP.
LIQUID TEMP.
ONLY BY LIQUID. TEMP.
Ebab01
Threshold
Threshold for subcooling control (line 1)
0.0 &deg;C
…
-9999.9…9999.9
Subcool.value
Subcooling value (line 1)
0.0 &deg;C
…
-999.9…999.9
(display only)
--Discharge temperature probe position, compressor 1 (line 1)
B1
-----, B1…B10 (****)
--Type of discharge temperature probe, compressor 1 (line 1)
4-20mA
----NTC - PT1000 - 0-1V - 0-10V4-20mA - 0-5V - HTNTC
Ecaa01
--- (display only)
Discharge temperature value, compressor 1 (line 1)
--…
… (**)
Upper value
Maximum discharge temperature value, compressor 1 (line 1)
30.0 barg
…
… (**)
Lower value
Minimum discharge temperature value, compressor 1 (line 1)
0.0 barg
…
… (**)
Calibration
Discharge temperature probe calibration, compressor 1 (line 1)
0.0 barg
…
… (**)
…
…
…
…
…
…
DO
Economizer valve DO position, compressor 6 (line 1)
…
-----, 01…29 (****)
Status (display only)
Economizer valve DO status, compressor 6 (line 1)
----Closed / Open
Ecaa12
Logic
Economizer valve DO logic, compressor 6 (line 1)
NO
--NC / NO
Function (display only)
Economizer valve function status, compressor 6 (line 1)
----Not active / Active
Economizer
Enable economizer function (line 1)
NO
--NO / YES
Compr.Power Thr.
Capacity percentage threshold for economizer activation (line 1)
0
%
0…100
Ecab04 (*)
Press.Lim.
Condensing temperature threshold for economizer activation (line 1)
0.0 &deg;C
…
-999.9…999.9
Disch.T.Thr.
Discharge temperature threshold for economizer activation (line 1)
0.0 &deg;C
…
-999.9…999.9
pRack +0300025EN rel. 1.3 - 17.12.2015
64
ENG
Mask index
Display description
Economizer
Setpoint
Default
NO
… (**)
UOM
--…
NO / YES
… (**)
… (**)
…
… (**)
75
DIS
%
---
0; 25; 50; 75; 100
DIS / EN
60.0
&deg;C/&deg;F
…
5.0
&deg;C/&deg;F
…
-----
Description
Enable economizer function for screw compressor 1 (line 1)
Setpoint for economizer function with discharge temperature for screw
compressor 1
Diﬀerential for economizer function with discharge temperature for
screw compressor 1
Minimum screw compressor 1 capacity for economizer activation
Enable economizer function with condensing temperature for screw
compressor 1
Setpoint for economizer function with condensing temperature for
screw compressor 1
Diﬀerential for economizer function with condensing temperature for
screw compressor 1
Discharge temperature probe position, compressor 1 (line 1)
Compressor 1 discharge temperature probe position (line1)
B1
4-20mA
-----
--- (display only)
Upper value
Lower value
Calibration
…
DO
Status (display only)
Logic
Function (display only)
Liquid Injection
Threshold
Diﬀerential
DI
Status (display only)
Logic
Compressor 1 discharge temperature probe type (line 1)
Compressor 1 discharge temperature probe value (line 1)
Compressor 1 discharge temperature probe max. limit (line 1)
Compressor 1 discharge temperature probe min. limit (line 1)
Compressor 1 discharge temperature probe adjustment (line 1)
Injection valve DO position, compressor 6 (line 1)
Injection valve DO status, compressor 6 (line 1)
Injection valve DO logic, compressor 6 (line 1)
Injection valve function status, compressor 6 (line 1)
Enable liquid injection function (line 1)
Liquid injection set point (line 1)
Liquid injection diﬀerential (line 1)
Heat recovery from digital input DI position (line 1)
Status of heat recovery DI (line 1)
Logic of heat recovery DI (line 1)
--30.0 barg
0.0 barg
0.0 barg
…
…
--NO
--DIS
70.0 &deg;C
5,0
…
--NC
…
…
…
…
…
----------…
…
-------
Eeaa03
Function (display only)
DO
Status (display only)
Logic
Function (display only)
AO
Status of heat recovery from digital input DI function (line 1)
Heat recovery pump DO position (line 1)
Heat recovery pump DO status (line 1)
Heat recovery pump DO logic (line 1)
Heat recovery pump status (line 1)
Heat recovery damper AO position (line 1)
------NC
-----
-------------
Eeaa04
Type (****)
Type of output, PWM / phase control for heat recovery damper AO
(line 1)
FCS1*-CONVONOFF
---
Status
-----
Heat recovery damper AO status (line 1)
Heat recovery outlet temperature probe position (line 1)
Type of heat recovery outlet temperature probe (line 1)
--B1
4-20mA
-------
--- (display only)
Upper value
Lower value
Calibration
Enable Heat Reclaim
Condensing pressure
Lower Limit
Modulation by temperat.
Setpoint
Diﬀerential
Disable ﬂoating condensing pressure
Setpoint oﬀset
Heat recovery outlet temperature value (line 1)
Maximum heat recovery outlet temperature value (line 1)
Minimum heat recovery outlet temperature value (line 1)
Heat recovery outlet temperature probe calibration (line 1)
Enable heat recovery function (line 1)
Condensing pressure lower limit for heat recovery (line 1)
--30.0 barg
0.0 barg
0.0 barg
NO
0.0 barg
…
…
…
…
--…
---, B1…B10 (****)
--NTC - PT1000 - 0-1V - 0-10V4-20mA - 0-5V - HTNTC
… (**)
… (**)
… (**)
… (**)
…
---, 01…29 (****)
Closed / Open
NC / NO
Not active / Active
DIS / EN
… (**)
… (**)
---, 01…18, B1…B10 (****)
Closed / Open
NC
NO
Not active / Active
---, 01…29
Closed / Open
NC / NO
Not active / Active
---, 01…29
---FCS1*-CONVONOFF
MCHRTF*
FCS3*-CONV010
---, B1…B10 (****)
--NTC - PT1000 - 0-1V - 0-10V4-20mA - 0-5V - HTNTC
… (**)
… (**)
… (**)
… (**)
NO / YES
… (**)
Enable heat recovery control by discharge temperature (line 1)
Heat recovery: discharge temperature setpoint (line 1)
Heat recovery: discharge temperature diﬀerential (line 1)
Disable ﬂoating condensing pressure when heat reclaim is active
NO
0.0 &deg;C
0.0 &deg;C
NO
--…
…
---
NO / YES
… (**)
0.0 ... 99.9
NO / YES
Oﬀset that must be applied to the condensing setpoint instead of
ﬂoating condensing when heat reclaim is active
Enable heat recovery control by scheduler (line 1)
---
…
-99.9…99.9
NO
---
NO / YES
-----
--…
MON, ..., SUN
…
…
---
…
…
…
…
Changes
Week of the day
Time band 1 enabling and deﬁnition: start hour and minute, end hour
and minute (condenser line 1)
…
Time band 4 enabling and deﬁnition: start hour and minute, end hour
and minute (condenser line 1)
Time band changes action
---
---
Copy to
Copy settings to other days
0
---
Gen.Funct.1
…
Gen.Funct.5
Regulation variable
Mode
Enable
Description
--------------Setpoint
Diﬀerential
Enable generic stage function 1
..
Enable generic stage function 5
Control variable for generic stage function 1
Direct or reverse control
Enabling variable for generic stage function 1
Enable description change
Description
Setpoint for generic stage function 1
Diﬀerential for generic stage function 1
DISAB.
…
DISAB.
--DIRECT
--SKIP
--0.0 &deg;C
0.0 &deg;C
--…
------------…
…
--CONFIRM&amp;SAVE
LOAD PREVIOUS
CLEAR ALL
MONDAY…SUNDAY;
MON-FRI; MON-SAT;
SAT&amp;SUN; ALL DAYS
DISABLE / ENABLE
…
DISABLE / ENABLE
…
DIRECT / REVERSE
…
SKIP / CHANGE
…
… (**)
… (**)
Ecab05 (*)
Diﬀerential
Min.power activ.
Cond.press.check
Ecab06 (*)
Setpoint
Diﬀerential
Edaa01
…
Edaa12
Edab01/
Edab03 (*)
Eeaa02
Eeaa05
Eeab01
Eeab02
Eeab03
Eeab04
Eeab05
Eeab06
Enable activation by
scheduler
Active.Time Bands
TB1: --:-- -&gt; --:-…
TB4: --:-- -&gt; --:--
Eeab07
Efa05
Efa06
Efa07
Efa08
65
Values
pRack +0300025EN rel. 1.3 - 17.12.2015
ENG
Mask index
Efa09
…
Efb05
Efb06
Efb07
Efb08
Efb09
Efb010
Efb20
…
Efc05
Efc06
Efc07
…
Efd05
Efd06
Display description
High alarm
High alarm
Delay time
Alarm type
Low alarm
Low alarm
Delay time
Alarm type
…
Gen.Modulat.1
Gen.Modulat.2
Regulation variable
Mode
Enable
Description
--------------Setpoint
Diﬀerential
High alarm
High alarm
Delay time
Alarm type
Out upper limit
Out lower limit
Enable cutoﬀ
Cutoﬀ diﬀ.
Cutoﬀ hys.
Low alarm
Low alarm
Delay time
Alarm type
…
Gen.alarm 1
Gen.alarm 2
Regulation variable
Enable
Description
--------------Alarm type
Delay time
…
Generic Function Scheduler
Gen.funct.scheduling
connected to global
scheduling
Enable
Activ.Time Bands
TB1: --:-- -&gt; --:--
UOM
--…
s
----…
s
--…
--------------…
…
--…
s
--%
%
--…
…
--…
s
--…
--------------s
…
---
Values
DISABLE / ENABLE
… (**)
0…9999
LIGHT / SERIOUS
DISABLE / ENABLE
… (**)
0…9999
LIGHT / SERIOUS
…
DISABLE / ENABLE
DISABLE / ENABLE
…
DIRECT / REVERSE
…
SKIP / CHANGE
…
… (**)
… (**)
DISABLE / ENABLE
… (**)
0…9999
LIGHT / SERIOUS
0…100
0…100
NO / YES
… (**)
… (**)
DISABLE / ENABLE
… (**)
0…9999
LIGHT / SERIOUS
…
DISABLE / ENABLE
DISABLE / ENABLE
…
…
SKIP / CHANGE
…
LIGHT / SERIOUS
0…9999
…
DISABLE / ENABLE
Generic scheduler function considers the same special days and periods NO
of global scheduler
---
NO / YES
-------
----…
…
MON, ..., SUN
…
…
---
…
…
…
…
Changes
Enabling variable for generic scheduler function
Day of the week
Time band 1 enabling and deﬁnition: start hour and minute, end hour
and minute (suction line 1)
…
Time band 4 enabling and deﬁnition: start hour and minute, end hour
and minute (suction line 1)
Time band changes action
---
---
Copy to
Copy settings to other days
0
---
Gen.A Measure
…
------- (display only)
Upper value
Lower value
Calibration
...
DI
Status (display only)
Logic
Function (display only)
...
DO
Status (display only)
Logic
Function (display only)
…
Modulating.1
Generic analogue input A unit of measure selection
…
Generic probe A position
Generic probe A type
Generic probe A value
Generic probe A max. limit
Generic probe A min. limit
Generic probe A adjustment
...
Generic digital input F DI position
Status of generic digital input F DI
Logic of generic digital input F DI
Status of generic digital input F DI
...
Generic stage 1 DO position
Status of generic stage 1 DO
Logic of generic stage 1 DO
Generic stage 1 DO function status
…
Generic modulating 1 AO position
Type of output, PWM / phase control for generic modulating function
1 AO (line 1)
Generic modulating 1 output value
…
ChillBooster fault DI position (line 1)
Status of ChillBooster fault DI (line 1)
Logic of ChillBooster fault DI (line 1)
Status of ChillBooster fault (line 1)
&deg;C
…
B1
4-20mA
--30.0 barg
0.0 barg
0.0 barg
…
----NC
--…
…
--NO
--…
0
FCS1*-CONVONOFF
0
…
----NC
---
--…
----…
…
…
…
…
--------…
--------…
---
--CONFIRM&amp;SAVE
LOAD PREVIOUS
CLEAR ALL
MONDAY…SUNDAY; MON-FRI;
MON-SAT; SAT&amp;SUN; ALL DAYS
&deg;C; &deg;F; barg; psig; %; ppm …
---, B1…B10 (****)
… (**)
… (**)
… (**)
… (**)
… (**)
…
---, 01…18, B1…B10 (****)
Closed / Open
NC / NO
Not active / Active
…
---, 01…29 (****)
Closed / Open
NC / NO
Not active / Active
…
---, 01…06 (****)
FCS1*-CONVONOFF; &quot;-----&quot;;&quot;
MCHRTF*&quot;;&quot; FCS3*-CONV010&quot;
0.0…100.0
…
---, 01…18, B1…B10 (****)
Closed / Open
NC / NO
Not active / Active
…
TB4: --:-- -&gt; --:-Efd07
Efe05
Efe06/Efe07 (**)
…
Efe16
…
Efe21
…
Efe29
…
Egaa01
Type (****)
Status (display only)
…
DI
Status (display only)
Logic
Function (display only)
pRack +0300025EN rel. 1.3 - 17.12.2015
Description
High alarm enabling for generic stage function 1
High alarm threshold for generic stage function 1
High alarm delay for generic stage function 1
Low alarm enabling for generic stage function 1
Low alarm threshold for generic stage function 1
Low alarm delay for generic stage function 1
Low alarm delay for generic stage function 1
Type of low alarm for generic stage function 1
…
Enable generic modulating function 1 management
Enable generic modulating function 2 management
Control variable for generic modulating function 1
Direct or reverse modulation
Enabling variable for generic modulating function 1
Enable description change
Description
Setpoint for generic modulating function 1
Diﬀerential for generic modulating function 1
High alarm enabling for generic modulating function 1
High alarm threshold for generic modulating function 1
High alarm delay for generic modulating function 1
Low alarm enabling for generic modulating function 1
Output upper limit for generic modulating function 1
Output lower limit for generic modulating function 1
Enable cut oﬀ function for generic modulating function 1
Cut oﬀ diﬀerential for generic modulating function 1
Cut oﬀ hysteresis for generic modulating function 1
Low alarm enabling for generic modulating function 1
Low alarm threshold for generic modulating function 1
Low alarm delay for generic modulating function 1
Low alarm type for generic modulating function 1
…
Enable generic alarm function 1 management
Enable generic alarm function 2 management
Monitored variable for generic alarm function 1
Enabling variable for generic alarm function 1
Enable description change
Description
Alarm type for generic alarm function 1
Delay for generic alarm function 1
…
Enable generic scheduler function
66
Default
DISAB.
0.0 &deg;C
0
LIGHT
DISAB.
0.0 &deg;C
0
LIGHT
…
DISAB.
DISAB.
--DIRECT
--SKIP
--0.0 &deg;C
0.0 &deg;C
DISAB.
0.0 &deg;C
0
LIGHT
100.0
0.0
NO
0.0 &deg;C
0.0 &deg;C
DISAB.
0.0 &deg;C
0
LIGHT
…
DISAB.
DISAB.
----SKIP
--LIGHT
0
…
DISAB.
--%
…
---------
ENG
Mask index
Egaa02
Egab01
Egab02
Egab03
Egab04
Ehb01
Ehb03
Ehb04
Ehb05
Eia02
Eia04
Eib02
Eib04
Eic02
Eic03
Eic04
Eic05
Eic06
Eic07
Display description
DO
Status (display only)
Logic
Function (display only)
Device present
Deactivation when fanspower falls under
Before the activation fans
at max for
Ext.Temp.Thr.
Sanitary proc.
start at
Duration
Ext.temp.thr
ChillBooster requires
maintenance after
Reset maintenance time
Avoid simultaneous
pulses betw.lines
Delay
Force oﬀ L2 Comp.s for
line 1 fault
Delay
Switch on L1 Comp.s for
L2 activation
Switch on period
Force oﬀ line 2 if line 1
is oﬀ
Enable min threshold for
L1 activation
Threshold
Setpoint SH
LowSH thres.
LOP thresh.
MOP thresh.
Setpoint SH
LowSH thres.
LOP thresh.
MOP thresh.
Enable manual
Valve position
Manual valve position:
Enable manual
Valve position
Manual valve position:
S1 oﬀset
S1 probe (display)
S2 oﬀset
S2 probe (display)
S3 oﬀset
S3 probe (display)
S4 oﬀset
S4 probe (display)
Alarm:
EN.
Description
ChillBooster DO position (line 1)
Status of ChillBooster DO (line 1)
Logic of ChillBooster DO (line 1)
Status of ChillBooster function (line 1)
Enable ChillBooster function (line 1)
Fan capacity under which ChillBooster is deactivated (line 1)
Default
…
--NO
--NO
95
UOM
----------%
Values
---, 01…29 (****)
Closed / Open
NC / NO
Not active / Active
NO / YES
0…100
Fans work at maximum capacity at least for this time before
ChillBooster activation (line 1)
Outside temperature threshold for ChillBooster activation (line 1)
Enable hygiene procedure (line 1)
Hygiene procedure starting time (line 1)
Hygiene procedure duration (line 1)
Outside temperature threshold for hygiene procedure activati. (line 1)
ChillBooster maximum running time (line 1)
5
min
0 to 300
30.0 &deg;C
Disab.
00:00
0
5,0 &deg;C
200
…
----min
…
h
… (**)
DISABLE / ENABLE
…
0 to 30
… (**)
0…999
ChillBooster maintenance time reset (line 1)
Enable simultaneous compressor start up inhibition
NO
NO
-----
NO / YES
NO / YES
Delay between start up for compressors on diﬀerent lines
Enable line 2 compressor switch OFF due to line 1 compressor fault
0
NO
s
---
0…999
NO / YES
Delay for line 2 compressor switch oﬀ after serious alarm on line 1
compressors
Enable line 1 compressor switch ON due to line 2 compressor
switch ON
Delay for line1 compressor switch on for line 2 compressor switch on
Enable line 2 compressor switch OFF due to line 1 switch OFF
0
s
0…999
NO
---
NO / YES
30
NO
s
---
0…999
NO / YES
Enable L1 activation by DSS only when suction pressure is greater than
a minimum threshold
Minimum threshold for line 1 activation by DSS
PID control set point (valve 1)
Low superheat protection threshold (valve 1)
Low operating pressure protection threshold (valve 1)
Maximum operating pressure protection threshold (valve 1)
PID control set point (valve 2)
Low superheat protection threshold (valve 2)
Low operating pressure protection threshold (valve 2)
Maximum operating pressure protection threshold (valve 2)
NO
---
NO / YES
--11.0
5.0
-50.0
50.0
11.0
5.0
-50.0
50.0
…
K
K
----K
K
-----
… (**)
-40.0…180.0
-40.0…180.0
-60.0… 200.0
-60.0… 200.0
-40.0…180.0
-40.0…180.0
-60.0… 200.0
-60.0… 200.0
---
Min / Max
Enable manual positioning (valve 1)
NO
Manual position (valve 1)
0
Enable manual positioning (valve 2)
NO
Manual position (valve 2)
Probe S1 reading oﬀset (valve 1)
Value read by probe S1 (valve 1)
Probe S2 reading oﬀset (valve 1)
Value read by probe S2 (valve 1)
Probe S3 reading oﬀset (valve 1)
Value read by probe S3 (valve 1)
Probe S4 reading oﬀset (valve 1)
Value read by probe S4 (valve 1)
Abilita l’allarme sonda S1 ( valvola 1 )
0
0.0
--0.0
--0.0
--0.0
---
NO/YES
NO/YES
--Min / Max
Barg/psig
Barg/psig
&deg;C/&deg;F
&deg;C/&deg;F
Barg/psig
Barg/psig
&deg;C/&deg;F
&deg;C/&deg;F
EN./DIS.
Type:
Type of probe S1 (valve 1)
4-20mA
Min.:
Max.:
Alarm min.:
Alarm max.:
Alarm:
EN.
Minimum probe S1 reading (valve 1)
Maximum probe S1 reading (valve 1)
Minimum probe S1 alarm threshold (valve 1)
Maximum probe S1 alarm threshold (valve 1)
Enable probe S2 alarm (valve 1 )
-1.0
9.3
-1.0
9.3
Type:
Type of probe S2 (valve 1)
CAREL NTC
Alarm min.:
Alarm max.:
Alarm:
EN.
Minimum probe S2 alarm threshold (valve 1)
Maximum probe S2 alarm threshold (valve 1)
Enable probe S3 alarm (valve 1)
-50.0
105.0
Type:
Type of probe S3 (valve 1)
4-20mA
Min.:
Max.:
Alarm min.:
Alarm max.:
Alarm:
EN.
Minimum probe S3 reading (valve 1)
Maximum probe S3 reading (valve 1)
Minimum probe S3 alarm threshold (valve 1)
Maximum probe S3 alarm threshold (valve 1)
Enable probe S4 alarm (valve 1)
-1.0
30.0
-1.0
30.0
Type:
Type of probe S4 (valve 1)
CAREL NTC
Alarm min.:
Alarm max.:
Minimum probe S4 alarm threshold (valve 1)
Maximum probe S4 alarm threshold (valve 1)
-50.0
105.0
Barg/pisg
Barg/pisg
Barg/pisg
Barg/pisg
4-20mA / 4-20mA REMOTE /
4-20mA EXTERNAL / 0-5V RAT.
-20.0...200.0
-20.0...200.0
-20.0...200.0
-20.0...200.0
&deg;C/&deg;F
&deg;C/&deg;F
CAREL NTC / 0-10V EXT. SIGNAL / NTC SPKP**T0 / CAREL
NTC-HT
-60.0...200.0
-60.0...200.0
Barg/pisg
Barg/pisg
Barg/pisg
Barg/pisg
4-20mA / 4-20mA REMOTE /
4-20mA EXTERNAL / 0-5V RAT.
-20.0...200.0
-20.0...200.0
-20.0...200.0
-20.0...200.0
&deg;C/&deg;F
&deg;C/&deg;F
CAREL NTC / NTC SPKP**T0 /
CAREL NTC-HT
-60.0...200.0
-60.0...200.0
EN./DIS.
EN./DIS.
EN./DIS.
67
pRack +0300025EN rel. 1.3 - 17.12.2015
ENG
Mask index
Display description
Description
Default
ID1 conﬁguration:
Conﬁguration of action of digital input 1 on driver (valve 1)
REG. BACKUP
ID2 conﬁguration:
Conﬁguration of action of digital input 2 on driver (valve 1)
DISABLED
DI1:
DI2:
Digital input 1 status (valve 1)
Digital input 2 status (valve 1)
-----
UOM
Eic08
Eic09
Eic10
Valve A relay conﬁg.:
Conﬁguration of digital output1 (valve 1)
ALARM RELAY
Eic11
Valve B relay conﬁg.:
Conﬁguration of digital output 2 (valve 1)
ALARM RELAY
S1 oﬀset
S1 probe (display)
S2 oﬀset
S2 probe (display)
S3 oﬀset
S3 probe (display)
S4 oﬀset
S4 probe (display)
Alarm:
EN.
Probe S1 reading oﬀset (valve 2)
Value read by probe S1 (valve 2)
Probe S2 reading oﬀset (valve 2)
Value read by probe S2 (valve 2)
Probe S3 reading oﬀset (valve 2)
Value read by probe S3 (valve 2)
Probe S4 reading oﬀset (valve 2)
Value read by probe S4 (valve 2)
Enable probe S1 alarm (valve 2)
0.0
--0.0
--0.0
--0.0
---
Type:
Type of probe S1 (valve 2)
4-20mA
Min.:
Max.:
Alarm min.:
Alarm max.:
Alarm:
EN.
Minimum probe S1 reading (valve 2)
Maximum probe S1 reading (valve 2)
Minimum probe S1 alarm threshold (valve 2)
Maximum probe S1 alarm threshold (valve 2)
Enable probe S2 alarm (valve 2)
-1.0
9.3
-1.0
9.3
Type:
Type of probe S2 (valve 2)
CAREL NTC
Alarm min.:
Alarm max.:
Alarm:
EN.
Minimum probe S2 alarm threshold (valve 2)
Maximum probe S2 alarm threshold (valve 2)
Enable probe S3 alarm (valve 2)
-50.0
105.0
Type:
Type of probe S3 (valve 2)
4-20mA
Min.:
Max.:
Alarm min.:
Alarm max.:
Alarm:
EN.
Minimum probe S3 reading (valve 2)
Maximum probe S3 reading (valve 2)
Minimum probe S3 alarm threshold (valve 2)
Maximum probe S3 alarm threshold (valve 2)
Enable probe S4 alarm (valve 2)
-1.0
30.0
-1.0
30.0
Type:
Type of probe S4 (valve 2)
CAREL NTC
Alarm min.:
Alarm max.:
Minimum probe S4 alarm threshold (valve 2)
Maximum probe S4 alarm threshold (valve 2)
-50.0
105.0
ID1 conﬁguration:
Conﬁguration of action of digital input 1 on driver (valve 2)
REG. BACKUP
ID2 conﬁguration:
Conﬁguration of action of digital input 2 on driver (valve 2)
DISABLED
DI1:
DI2:
Digital input 1 status (valve 2)
Digital input 2 status (valve 2)
-----
Eic12
Eic13
Eic14
Eic15
Eic16
Eic17
Eic18
Eic19
&deg;C/&deg;F
&deg;C/&deg;F
CAREL NTC / 0-10V EXT. SIGNAL / NTC SPKP**T0 / CAREL
NTC-HT
-60.0...200.0
-60.0...200.0
Barg/pisg
Barg/pisg
Barg/pisg
Barg/pisg
4-20mA / 4-20mA REMOTE /
4-20mA EXTERNAL / 0-5V RAT.
-20.0...200.0
-20.0...200.0
-20.0...200.0
-20.0...200.0
EN./DIS.
ALARM RELAY
Eic21
Valve B relay conﬁg.:
Conﬁguration of digital output 2 (valve 2)
ALARM RELAY
Valve opening at start of control (valve 1)
50
Enable valve opening with control not active (valve 1)
NO
pRack +0300025EN rel. 1.3 - 17.12.2015
Barg/pisg
Barg/pisg
Barg/pisg
Barg/pisg
4-20mA / 4-20mA REMOTE /
4-20mA EXTERNAL / 0-5V RAT.
-20.0...200.0
-20.0...200.0
-20.0...200.0
-20.0...200.0
EN./DIS.
Conﬁguration of digital output1 (valve 2)
Eid04
Barg/psig
Barg/psig
&deg;C/&deg;F
&deg;C/&deg;F
Barg/psig
Barg/psig
&deg;C/&deg;F
&deg;C/&deg;F
EN./DIS.
Valve A relay conﬁg.:
Valve A opening at
start-up
Valve A opened in
stand-by
Start-up delay after
defrost
Valve A preposit. delay
DISABLED / ALARM RELAY
/ SOLENOID VALVE RELAY /
VALVE + ALARM RELAY / REVERSED ALARM RELAY / VALVE
POSITION RELAY
DISABLED / ALARM RELAY
/ SOLENOID VALVE RELAY /
VALVE + ALARM RELAY / REVERSED ALARM RELAY / VALVE
POSITION RELAY
EN./DIS.
Eic20
Eid02
Values
DISABLED / REG. SAFETY / REG.
BACKUP / START/STOP REG. /
VALVE FORCED 100% OPEN /
BATTERY ALARM MNG. / VALVE
REGULATION OPT. AFTER
DEFROST
DISABLED / REG. SAFETY / REG.
BACKUP / START/STOP REG. /
VALVE FORCED 100% OPEN /
BATTERY ALARM MNG. / VALVE
REGULATION OPT. AFTER
DEFROST
&deg;C/&deg;F
&deg;C/&deg;F
CAREL NTC / NTC SPKP**T0 /
CAREL NTC-HT
-60.0...200.0
-60.0...200.0
DISABLED / REG. SAFETY / REG.
BACKUP / START/STOP REG. /
VALVE FORCED 100% OPEN /
BATTERY ALARM MNG. / VALVE
REGULATION OPT. AFTER
DEFROST
DISABLED / REG. SAFETY / REG.
BACKUP / START/STOP REG. /
VALVE FORCED 100% OPEN /
BATTERY ALARM MNG. / VALVE
REGULATION OPT. AFTER
DEFROST
DISABLED / ALARM RELAY
/ SOLENOID VALVE RELAY /
VALVE + ALARM RELAY / REVERSED ALARM RELAY / VALVE
POSITION RELAY
DISABLED / ALARM RELAY
/ SOLENOID VALVE RELAY /
VALVE + ALARM RELAY / REVERSED ALARM RELAY / VALVE
POSITION RELAY
%
0…100
NO/YES
Start control delay after defrost (valve 1)
10
min
0…60
Stationary time when valve pre-positions (valve 1)
6
s
0…18000
68
ENG
Mask index
Eid06
Eid08
Eid10
Eid11
Eid13
Eid15
Eid17
Eid19
Eid21
Eid23
Eid24
Eid26
Eie02
Eie04
Eif01
Eif02
Eif03
Display description
Prop Gain:
Integral time:
Derivat.time:
LowSH protect.:
LOP protection:
MOP protection:
Threshold:
Integr.time:
Alarm timeout
LowSH:
LOP:
MOP:
Threshold
Timeout
Valve A opening at
start-up
Valve A opened in
stand-by
Start-up delay after
defrost
Valve A preposit. delay
Prop Gain:
Integral time:
Derivat.time:
LowSH protect.:
LOP protection:
MOP protection:
Threshold:
Integr.time:
Alarm timeout
LowSH:
LOP:
MOP:
Threshold
Timeout
Min.steps
Max.steps
Closing steps
Min.steps
Max.steps
Closing steps
Enable EVD in PLB x
EVD valves number
EVS 1 Address
EVS 2 Address
Description
Control proportional gain (valve 1)
Control integral time (valve 1)
Control derivative time (valve 1)
Integral time with low superheat protection (valve 1)
Integral time with low operating pressure protection (valve 1)
Integral time with maximum operating pressure protection (valve 1)
High condensing temperature protection activation threshold (valve 1)
Integral time with high condensing temperature protection (valve 1)
High condensing temperature alarm delay (valve 1)
Low superheat alarm delay (valve 1)
Low operating pressure alarm delay (valve 1)
Maximum operating pressure alarm delay (valve 1)
Low suction temperature protection threshold (valve 1)
Low suction temperature alarm delay (valve 1)
Default
15.0
150
5.0
10.0
10.0
20.0
30.0
0.5
600
300
300
600
-50.0
300
s
s
s
s
s
&deg;C/&deg;F
s
s
s
s
s
&deg;C/&deg;F
s
Values
0.0…800.0
0…1000
0…1000
0.0…800.0
0.0…800.0
0.0…800.0
-60.0…200.0
0.0…800.0
0…18000
0…18000
0…18000
0…18000
-60.0…200.0
0…18000
Valve opening at start of control (valve 2)
50
%
0…100
Enable valve opening with control not active (valve 2)
NO
10
min
0…60
Stationary time when valve pre-positions (valve 2)
Control proportional gain (valve 2)
Control integral time (valve 2)
Control derivative time (valve 2)
Integral time with low superheat protection (valve 2)
Integral time with low operating pressure protection (valve 2)
Integral time with maximum operating pressure protection (valve 2)
High condensing temperature protection activation threshold (valve 2)
Integral time with high condensing temperature protection (valve 2)
High condensing temperature alarm delay (valve 2)
Low superheat alarm delay (valve 2)
Low operating pressure alarm delay (valve 2)
Maximum operating pressure alarm delay (valve 2)
Low suction temperature protection threshold (valve 2)
Low suction temperature alarm delay (valve 2)
Minimum step conﬁguration, valve 1
Maximum step conﬁguration, valve 1
Closing step conﬁguration, valve 1
Minimum step conﬁguration, valve 2
Maximum step conﬁguration, valve 2
Closing step conﬁguration, valve 2
Enable the EVD management on current board
Number of drivers managed
Serial address of driver 1
6
15.0
150
5.0
10.0
10.0
20.0
30.0
0.5
600
300
300
600
-50.0
300
50
480
500
50
480
500
NO
1
198
s
0…18000
0.0…800.0
0…1000
0…1000
0.0…800.0
0.0…800.0
0.0…800.0
-60.0…200.0
0.0…800.0
0…18000
0…18000
0…18000
0…18000
-60.0…200.0
0…18000
0…9999
0…9999
0…9999
0…9999
0…9999
0…9999
NO/YES
1/2
0…207
s
s
s
s
s
&deg;C/&deg;F
s
s
s
s
s
&deg;C/&deg;F
s
Serial address of driver 2
199
Defaults:
Force Parameters:
Regulation based on:
Run driver parameter setting procedure
Override driver parameter settings
Select cooling capacity used for control
NO
NO
LINE 1 COMP
Valve:
Type of valve connected to the driver
CAREL EXV
Main Regulation:
Main control for the valve, for details refer to manual +0300005EN
Auxiliary regulation:
Safety or auxiliary control
Auxiliary refrigerant:
Refrigerant used for P -&gt; T conversion of probe S3 with high condensing
R744
temperature protection
S1 probe alarm manag:
Type of action in the event of probe S1 fault
VALVE AT
FIXED POS.
S2 probe alarm manag:
Type of action in the event of probe S2 fault
VALVE AT
FIXED POS.
DC power supply
Conﬁgure the type of power supply used for the driver
NO
69
0…207
R404 CONDENSER FOR
SUBCRITICAL
CO2
INVERSE HIGH
CONDENS.
TEMP.
PROTECTION
ON S3
Eif09
Eif11
NO/YES
Start control delay after defrost (valve 2)
Eif05
Eif06
UOM
LINE 1 COMP. / LINE 2 COMP
USER DEFINED / CAREL EXV
/ ALCO EX4 / ALCO EX5 /
ALCO EX6 / ALCO EX7 /
ALCO EX8 CAREL RECOMMENDED / ALCO EX8 ALCO
SPECIFICATION / SPORLAN SEI
0.5-11 / SPORLAN SER 1.5-20
/ SPORLAN SEI 30 / SPORLAN
SEI 50 / SPORLAN SEH 100 /
SPORLAN SEH 175 / Danfoss
ETS 12.5-25B / Danfoss ETS 50B
/ Danfoss ETS 100B / Danfoss
ETS 250 / Danfoss ETS 400 /
TWO CAREL EXV TOGETHER /
SPORLAN SER(I) G, J, K / Danfoss CCM 10-20-30 / Danfoss
CCM 40
Possible control functions in
manual +0300005EN
Possible control functions in
manual +0300005EN
NO ACTION / VALVE FORCE
CLOSED / VALVE AT FIXED POS
/ USE BACKUP S3
NO ACTION / VALVE FORCE
CLOSED / VALVE AT FIXED POS
/ USE BACKUP S4
NO / YES
pRack +0300025EN rel. 1.3 - 17.12.2015
ENG
Mask index
Eif12
Display description
Description
Valve:
Type of valve connected to the driver
Main Regulation:
Main control for the valve, for details refer to manual +0300005EN
Auxiliary regulation:
Safety or auxiliary control
Auxiliary refrigerant:
Refrigerant used for P -&gt; T conversion of probe S3 with high condensing
R744
temperature protection
S1 probe alarm manag:
Type of action in the event of probe S1 fault
VALVE AT
FIXED POS.
S2 probe alarm manag:
Type of action in the event of probe S2 fault
VALVE AT
FIXED POS.
DC power supply
Conﬁgure the type of power supply used for the driver
NO
UOM
CAREL EXV
Eif14
Eif15
Default
R404 CONDENSER FOR
SUBCRITICAL
CO2
INVERSE HIGH
CONDENS.
TEMP.
PROTECTION
ON S3
Possible control functions in
manual +0300005EN
Possible control functions in
manual +0300005EN
NO ACTION / VALVE FORCE
CLOSED / VALVE AT FIXED POS
/ USE BACKUP S3
NO ACTION / VALVE FORCE
CLOSED / VALVE AT FIXED POS
/ USE BACKUP S4
NO / YES
Eif18
Eif20
Values
USER DEFINED / CAREL EXV /
ALCO EX4 / ALCO EX5 / ALCO
EX6 / ALCO EX7 / ALCO EX8
CAREL RECOMMENDED / ALCO
EX8 ALCO SPECIFICATION /
SPORLAN SEI 0.5-11 / SPORLAN
SER 1.5-20 / SPORLAN SEI 30
/ SPORLAN SEI 50 / SPORLAN
SEH 100 / SPORLAN SEH 175 /
Danfoss ETS 12.5-25B / Danfoss
ETS 50B / Danfoss ETS 100B
/ Danfoss ETS 250 / Danfoss
ETS 400 / TWO CAREL EXV
TOGETHER / SPORLAN SER(I) G,
J, K / Danfoss CCM 10-20-30 /
Danfoss CCM 40
The following parameters refer to line 2, for details see the corresponding parameters for line 1 above
Eaba04
…
Eabb04
…
Ebba01
…
Ebbb01
…
Ecbb04
…
-----
Oil temperature probe position (line 2)
Oil temperature probe type (line 2)
B1
4-20mA
-----
--- (display only)
Upper value
Lower value
Calibration
…
Oil pumps number
Oil temperature probe value (line 2)
Oil temperature probe max. limit (line 2)
Oil temperature probe min. limit (line 2)
Oil temperature probe adjustment (line 2)
…
Number of oil pumps for common oil cooler (line 2)
--30.0 barg
0.0 barg
0.0 barg
…
0
…
…
…
…
…
---
Enable Aout pump
Enable AO of common oil cooler pump (line 2)
YES
---
…
DO
Status (display only)
Logic
Function (display only)
…
Subcooling control
---
…
Subcooling valve DO position (line 2)
Status of subcooling valve DO (line 2)
Logic of subcooling valve (line 2)
Subcooling valve function status (line 2)
…
Enable subcooling function (line2)
Subcooling control type (line 2)
…
--------…
-----
Threshold
Subcool.value
(display only)
…
Economizer
Compr.Power Thr.
Press.Lim.
Disch.T.Thr.
…
-----
Threshold for subcooling control (line 2)
Value of subcooling (line 2)
…
…
--NO
--…
NO
COND&amp;
LIQUID TEMP.
0.0 &deg;C
0.0 &deg;C
…
…
-9999.9…9999.9
-999.9…999.9
…
Enable economizer function (line 2)
Capacity percent threshold for economizer activation (line 2)
Condensing temperature threshold for economizer activation (line 2)
Discharge temperature threshold for economizer activation (line 2)
…
Compressor 1 discharge temperature probe position (line 2)
Compressor 1 discharge temperature probe type (line 2)
…
NO
0
0.0 &deg;C
0.0 &deg;C
…
B1
4-20mA
…
--%
…
…
…
-----
--- (display only)
Upper value
Lower value
Calibration
…
Liquid Injection
Threshold
Diﬀerential
…
DI
Status
Logic
Function
Enable Heat Reclaim
…
DI
Status
Logic
Function
Compressor 1 discharge temperature probe value (line 2)
Compressor 1 discharge temperature probe max. limit (line 2)
Compressor 1 discharge temperature probe min. limit (line 2)
Compressor 1 discharge temperature probe adjustment (line 2)
…
Enable liquid injection function (line 2)
Liquid injection setpoint (line 2)
Liquid injection diﬀerential (line 2)
…
Heat recovery from digital input DI position (line 2)
Status of heat recovery DI (line 2)
Logic of heat recovery DI (line 2)
Status of heat recovery from digital input DI function (line 2)
Enable heat recovery function (line 2)
…
ChillBooster fault DI position (line 2)
Status of ChillBooster fault DI (line 2)
Logic of ChillBooster fault DI (line 2)
Status of ChillBooster fault DI (line 21)
--30.0 barg
0.0 barg
0.0 barg
…
DIS
70.0 &deg;C
5,0
…
…
--NC
--NO
…
----NC
---
…
…
…
…
…
--…
…
…
----------…
---------
…
NO / YES
0…100
-999.9…999.9
-999.9…999.9
…
---, B1…B10 (****)
--NTC - PT1000 - 0-1V - 0-10V 4-20mA - 0-5V - HTNTC
… (**)
… (**)
… (**)
… (**)
…
DIS / EN
… (**)
… (**)
…
---, 01…18, B1…B10 (****)
Closed / Open
NC / NO
Not active / Active
NO / YES
…
---, 01…18, B1…B10 (****)
Closed / Open
NC / NO
Not active / Active
Edba01
Edba01
…
Edbb01
…
Eeba02
Eebb01
…
Egba01
pRack +0300025EN rel. 1.3 - 17.12.2015
70
---, B1…B10 (****)
--NTC - PT1000 - 0-1V - 0-10V 4-20mA - 0-5V - HTNTC
… (**)
… (**)
… (**)
… (**)
…
0 to 1 (digital input)
0 to 2 (Digital outputs)
NO (Digital outputs)
YES (digital input)
…
---, 01…29 (****)
Closed / Open
NC / NO
Not active / Active
…
NO / YES
COND&amp;LIQUID TEMP.
LIQUID TEMP. ONLY
ENG
Mask index
…
Egbb01
…
Mask index
Display description
…
Device present
Deactivation when fanspower falls under
…
Display description
F.settings
Summer/Winter
Special days
Holiday periods
Begin
End
Day 01
…
Day 10
P1
--…
P5
--Date format
Description
…
ChillBooster function enable (line 2)
Fans capacity under which ChillBooster is deactivated (line 2)
Default
…
NO
95
UOM
…
--%
…
NO / YES
0…100
…
…
…
…
Description
Default
UOM
Enable Summer/Winter period management (line 1)
Enable special days management (line 1)
Enable holiday period management (line 1)
Summer period beginning date (line 1)
Summer period end date (line 1)
Special day 1 date (line 1)
…
Special day 10 date (line 1)
Holiday period P1 beginning date (line 1)
Holiday period P1 end date (line 1)
…
Holiday period P5 beginning date (line 1)
Holiday period P5 end date (line 1)
Date format
NO
NO
NO
------…
------…
----DD/MM/YY
------------…
------…
-------
Hour
Faab02/Faab03/
Date
Faab04
Day (display only)
Daily saving time
Transition time
Faab05
Start, ...
End, ...
Fb01
Language
Disable language mask at
start-up
Fb02
Countdown
Main mask selection
Fb03
Hour and minute
Date
Day of the week calculated from current date
Enable daylight saving time
Oﬀset time
Starting week, day and month and hour for daylight saving time
End week, day and month and hour for daylight saving time
Current language
Disable the change language screen at start-up
…
…
…
DISABLE
60
…
…
ENGLISH
YES
…
…
…
----…
…
-----
Starting value for countdown, time change language screen active.
Main screen selection
60
LINE 1
s
---
Address
Protocol
Address of the controller in a supervisory system network (line 1)
Supervisor communication protocol (line 1)
196
pRACK
MANAGER
-----
Baudrate
Address
Protocol
Supervisor communication baud rate (line 1)
Address of the controller in a supervisory system network (line 1)
Supervisor communication protocol (line 1)
19200
1
-----
CAREL
---
19200
0000
--NO
0000
1234
1234
---------------
196
pRACK
MANAGER
-----
19200
1
-----
MODBUS
SLAVE
---
19200
---
Faaa01
Faaa02
Faaa03
…
Faaa04
Faaa05
Faab01
Fca01
Fca02
Fd01
Fd02
Fd03
Baudrate
Insert password
Logged as (display only)
Logout
User
Service
Manufacturer
Supervisor communication baud rate (line 1)
Password
Current password level
Logout
User password
Service password
Manufacturer password
The following parameters refer to line 2, for details see the corresponding parameters for line 1 above
Address
Enable summer/winter period management (line 2)
Protocol
Enable special days management (line 2)
Fcb01
Baudrate
Address
Protocol
Enable holiday period management (line 2)
Enable summer/winter period management (line 2)
Enable special days management (line 2)
Fcb01
Baudrate
Mask index
Display description
G.Safety
Gba01
Prevent enable
Setpoint
Diﬀerential
Gba02
Decrease compressor
power time
Enable Heat Reclaim as
Gba03
ﬁrst prevent step
Oﬀset HeatR.
Enable holiday period management (line 2)
Description
Default
Values
Values
NO / YES
NO / YES
NO / YES
01/Gen…31/Dic
01/Gen…31/Dic
01/Gen…31/Dic
…
01/Gen…31/Dic
01/Gen…31/Dic
01/Gen…31/Dic
…
01/Gen…31/Dic
01/Gen…31/Dic
---DD/MM/YY
MM/DD/YY
YY/MM/DD
…
…
Monday… Sunday
DISABLE / ENABLE
0 to 240
…
…
…
NO / YES
0…60
LINE 1 / LINE 2
DOUBLE SUCTION
DOUBLE CONDENSER
0 to 207
-CAREL SLAVE LOCAL
CAREL SLAVE REMOTE
MODBUS SLAVE
pRACK MANAGER
CAREL SLAVE GSM
1200 to 19200
0…207
--CAREL SLAVE LOCAL
MODBUS SLAVE
pRACK MANAGER
1200…19200
0…9999
User, Service, Manufacturer
NO / YES
0…9999
0…9999
0…9999
0 to 207
-CAREL SLAVE LOCAL
CAREL SLAVE REMOTE
MODBUS SLAVE
pRACK MANAGER
CAREL SLAVE GSM
1200 to 19200
0…207
--CAREL SLAVE LOCAL
MODBUS SLAVE
pRACK MANAGER
1200…19200
UOM
Values
Enable condensing pressure prevent (line 1)
Condensing pressure prevent threshold (line 1)
Condensing pressure prevent diﬀerential (line 1)
Decreasing capacity time (line 1)
NO
0.0 barg
0.0 barg
0
--…
…
s
NO / YES
… (**)
0.0 to 99.9
0…999
Enabling heat recovery as ﬁrst stage for condensing HP prevent
(line 1)
Oﬀset between heat recovery and prevent setpoint (line 1)
NO
---
NO / YES
0.0 barg
…
0.0 to 99.9
71
pRack +0300025EN rel. 1.3 - 17.12.2015
ENG
Mask index
Gba04
Gba05
Display description
Enable ChillBooster as ﬁrst
prevent step
Oﬀset Chill.
Prevent max.num
Prevent max.number
evaluation time
Reset automatic prevent
Max.num prevent
Gba07
Gba08
Gba09
Tempo di valutaz.num.
max prevent
Riabilita prevent automatico
Gca02
Gca03
Gca04
Gca05
Values
Oﬀset between ChillBooster and prevent setpoint (line 1)
0.0 barg
Maximum number of prevent allowed before locking compressor (line 1) 3
Prevent maximum number evaluation time
60
…
--h
0.0 to 99.9
1…5
0…999
Reset number of prevent (line 1)
Maximum number of prevent allowed before locking compressor (line
1, auxiliary regulation)
NO
---
NO / YES
3
---
1…5
Prevent maximum number evaluation time (auxiliary regulation)
60
h
0…999
Reset number of prevent (line 1, auxiliary regulation)
NO
---
NO / SI
Threshold for low pressure prevent with auxiliary regulation
Band:
Diﬀerential for the prevent re-enter
NO
UOM
NO / YES
0.5
0.1
Minimum Power request: Minimum power request in prevent
At the end of prevent action power requst is calculated starting from
Align Pow.Req at the end
the last request value and not from the value available before the
of prevent
prevent action
Use Suction UoM
Unit selection for prevent threshold and diﬀerential
20.0
Barg/
psig
Barg/
psig
%
-1.0…150.0
0.0…60.0
0.0…100.0
NO
NO / YES
NO
NO / YES
Type of reset for common HP alarm (line 1)
Common high pressure delay (line 1)
Low common condensing pressure delay at start up (line 1)
Low common condensing pressure delay during operation (line 1)
Period of LP evaluation (line 1)
AUTO
10
60
20
120
--s
s
s
min
AUTO / MAN
0…999
0…999
0…999
0…999
Number of LP in period after which the alarm becomes manual
(line 1)
Liquid level alarm delay (line 1)
Common oil alarm delay (line 1)
Select alarm relay output activation for active alarms or alarms not reset
5
---
0…999
0
0
Active
alarms
s
s
0…999
0…999
Active alarms
Alarms not reset
NO
…
AUTO
10
…
--…
--s
…
NO / YES
…
AUTO / MAN
0…999
…
The following parameters refer to line 2, for details see the corresponding parameters for line 1 above
Gbb01
Prevent enable
Enable condensing pressure prevent (line 2)
…
…
…
Common HP type
Type of reset for common HP alarm (line 2)
Gcb01
Common HP delay
Common high pressure delay (line 2)
…
…
…
Mask index
Default
---
Threshold:
Common HP type
Common HP delay
Common LP start delay
Common LP delay
Time of semi-automatic
alarm evaluation
N&deg; of reties before alarm
becomes manual
Liquid alarm delay
Oil alarm delay
Output alarms relays
activation with
Gca01
Description
Enable ChillBooster as ﬁrst stage for condensing HP prevent (line 1)
Display description
Description
Default
UOM
Values
H.Info
H01
(display only)
H02
(display only)
Mask index
Ver.
Bios
Boot
Board type
Board size
Total ﬂash
RAM
Built-In type
Software version and date
Bios version and date
Boot version and date
Type of hardware
Hardware size
Flash memory size
RAM size
Type of built-in display
…
…
…
…
…
-------
----------kB
kB
---
Main cycle
Number of cycles per second and software cycle time
---
cycles/s …
ms
Display description
Description
Default
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
None / PGD1
UOM
Values
I.Setup
Pre-conﬁguration
Pre-conﬁguration selected
01. RS2
---
Boards necessary
Suction line
Condenser line
Num.Comp. L1
Comp.type L1
pLAN boards required for the selected pre-conﬁguration
Number of suction lines featured in the pre-conﬁguration
Number of condenser lines featured in the pre-conﬁguration
Number of compressors featured in the pre-conﬁguration (line 1)
Type of compressors featured in the pre-conﬁguration (line 1)
------…
RECIPROCATING
-----------
Num.Comp. L2
Comp.type L2
Num.alarms per comp.
Cond.Gen.Alarm
Ia05 (display only)
HP comm.pressostat
LP comm.pressostat
Type of Installation
Ib01
Number of compressors featured in the pre-conﬁguration (line 2)
Type of compressors featured in the pre-conﬁguration (line 2)
Number of alarms for compressor featured in the pre-conﬁguration
Enable common condenser alarm
Enable common HP pressure switch
Enable common LP pressure switch
Type of system
---------------
Ib02
Unit of measure
…
RECIPROCATING
1/4 (*)
EN
EN
EN
SUCTION +
CONDENSER
&deg;C/barg
Ia01
Ia02 (disp. only)
Ia03 (disp. only)
Ia04 (display only)
Measure Units
pRack +0300025EN rel. 1.3 - 17.12.2015
72
---
--NOT USED— 08. SL5d
01. RS2
09. SW1
02. RS3
10. SW2
03. RS3p
11. SW3
04. RS3i
12. d-RS2
05. RS4
13. d-RS3
06. RS4i
14. d-RS4
07. SL3d
--0 to 2
0 to 2
1…12
RECIPROCATING / SCROLL
SCREW
1…12
RECIPROCATING / SCROLL
0 to 4/7 (*)
EN/DIS
EN/DIS
EN/DIS
SUCTION / CONDENSER
SUCTION + CONDENSER
&deg;C/barg / &deg;F/psig
ENG
Mask index
Display description
Compressors type
Description
Compressors number
Number of alarms for
each compressor
Modulate speed device
Number of compressors (line 1)
Number of alarms for each compressor (line 1)
Default
UOM
Values
RECIPROCATING --RECIPROCATING
SCROLL / SCREW
2/3 (*)
--1…6/12 (*)
1
--0 to 4/7 (*)
Modulating speed device for ﬁrst compressor (line 1)
None
Compressors sizes
Compressors sizes (line 1)
SAME CAPACITY --&amp; SAME STAGE
CONF.
S1
Enable size and size for compressor group 1 (line 1)
…
S4
…
Enable size and size for compressor group 4 (line 1)
S1
Enable stages and stages for compressor group 1 (line 1)
YES
10.0
…
NO
--YES
100
--kW
…
--kW
--%
…
S4
…
Enable stages and stages for compressor group 4 (line 1))
…
NO
---
…
--kW
C01
…
C12
Compr.Manufacturer
Size group for compressor 1 (line 1) or presence of inverter
…
Size group for compressor 12 (line 1)
Compressor manufacturer for screw compressors
S1
…
S1
Generic
--…
-----
Compressor series
Compressors sizes
S1
Compressor series
Compressor sizes (line 1)
Enable size and size for compressor group 1 (line 1)
Ib16
…
S4
…
Enable size and size for compressor group 4 (line 1)
…(***)
SAME CAPACITY
YES
--…
NO
---
------kW
…
--kW
---
--C01
…
C06
Compressors sizes
S1
Size group for compressor 1 (line 1) or presence of inverter
…
Size group for compressor 12 (line 1)
Compressors sizes (line 1)
Enable size and size for compressor group 1 (line 1)
…
S4
…
Enable size and size for compressor group 4 (line 1)
C01
…
C12
Regulation by
Measure unit
Refrigerant
Size group for compressor 1 (line 1) or presence of inverter
…
Size group for compressor 6 (line 1)
Compressor control by temperature or pressure (line 1)
Unit of measure (line 1)
Type of refrigerant (suction Line 1)
S1
…
--SAME CAPACITY
YES
--…
NO
--S1
…
S1
PRESSURE
barg
R404A
--…
------kW
…
--kW
--…
---------
Regulation type
Compressor control type (line 1)
NEUTRAL ZONE ---
Enable integral time
action
Setpoint
Diﬀerential
Conﬁgure another
suction line
Dedicated pRack board
for suction line
Compressors type
Compressors number
Number of alarms for
each compressor
Modulate speed device
Enable integral time for proportional suction line control (line 1)
NO
---
Setpoint without compensation (suction line 1)
Diﬀerential (suction line 1)
Second suction line conﬁguration
3,5 barg
0,3 barg
NO
… (**) … (**)
… (**) … (**)
--NO / YES
Suction lines on diﬀerent boards
NO
---
Type of compressors (line 2)
Number of compressors (line 2)
Number of alarms for each compressor (line 2)
RECIPROCATING --3
--1
---
RECIPROCATING / SCROLL
1…12
0 to 4
Modulating speed device for ﬁrst compressor (line 2)
NONE
---
Compressors sizes
Compressors sizes (line 1)
SAME
CAPACITY
---
S1
Enable size and size for compressor group 1 (line 1)
…
S4
…
Enable size and size for compressor group 4 (line 1)
YES
--…
NO
---
--kW
…
--kW
NONE
INVERTER
---/DIGITAL SCROLL(*)
SAME CAPAC.&amp;SAME STAGE
CONF.
SAME CAPAC.&amp;DIFF. STAGE
CONF.
DEFINE SIZES
NO / YES
0.0…500.0
…
NO / YES
0.0…500.0
Type of compressors (line 1)
Ib03
Ib04
---
Ib05
Ib30
Ib34
Ib35
Ib36
Ib10
Ib11
Ib17
Ib20
Ib21
Ib22
Ib40
Ib41
Ib42
Ib43
Ib45
Ib50
Ib51
Ib52
Ib70
Ib74
73
NONE / INVERTER
---/DIGITAL SCROLL(*)
---/STEPLESS*)
SAME CAPAC&amp;SAME STAGE
CONF.
SAME CAPAC.&amp;DIFF. STAGE
CONF.
DEFINE SIZES
NO / YES
0.0…500.0
…
NO / YES
0.0…500.0
NO / YES
100; 50/100; 50/75/100;
25/50/75/100; 33/66/100
…
NO / YES
100; 50/100; 50/75/100;
25/50/75/100; 33/66/100
S1…S4/INV
…
S1…S4
GENERIC
BITZER
REFCOMP
HANBELL
…(***)
SAME CAPACITY / DEFINE SIZES
NO / YES
0.0…500.0
…
NO / YES
0.0…500.0
S1…S4/INV
…
S1…S4
SAME CAPACITY / DEFINE SIZES
NO / YES
0.0…500.0
…
NO / YES
0.0…500.0
S1…S4/INV
…
S1…S4
PRESSURE / TEMPERATURE
…
R22 - R134a - R404A - R407C R410A - R507A - R290 - R600 R600a - R717 -R744 - R728 R1270 - R417A - R422D -R413A R422A - R423A - R407A - R427A
- R245Fa - R407F - R32
PROPORTIONAL BAND
NEUTRAL ZONE
NO / YES
NO / YES
pRack +0300025EN rel. 1.3 - 17.12.2015
ENG
Mask index
Ib75
Ib76
Ib60
Ib61
Ib62
S1
Display description
Description
Enable stages and stages for compressor group 1 (line 1)
…
S4
…
Enable stages and stages for compressor group 4 (line 1))
C01
…
C12
Compressors sizes
Size group for compressor 1 (line 1) or presence of inverter
…
Size group for compressor 6 (line 1)
Compressors sizes (line 1)
S1
Enable size and size for compressor group 1 (line 1)
…
S4
…
Enable size and size for compressor group 4 (line 1)
C01
…
C12
Regulation by
Measure unit
Refrigerant
Size group for compressor 1 (line 1) or presence of inverter
…
Size group for compressor 6 (line 1)
Compressor control by temperature or pressure (line 1)
Unit of measure (line 1)
Type of refrigerant (suction Line 1)
Regulation type
Compressor control type (line 1)
Enable integral time
action
Setpoint
Diﬀerential
Dedicated pRack board
for condenser line
Fans number
Modulate speed device
Enable integral time for proportional suction line control (line 2)
Setpoint without compensation (suction line 2)
Diﬀerential (suction line 2)
Suct.line(s) and cond.line(s) on diﬀerent boards, that is, condenser
line(s) on dedicated board
Number of fans (line 1)
Fan modulating speed device (line 1)
3.5 barg
0.3 barg
NO
… (**) … (**)
… (**) … (**)
--NO / YES
3
NONE
-----
Regulation by
Measure unit
Refrigerant
Fans control by temperature or pressure value (line 1)
Unit of measure (line 1)
Type of refrigerant (condenser line 1)
PRESSURE
barg
R404A
-------
Regulation type
Fan control type (line 1)
Enable integral time
action
Setpoint
Diﬀerential
Conﬁgure another
condensing line
Fans number
…
Diﬀerential
Type of Installation
Enable integral time for proportional band control
PROPORTIONAL --BAND
NO
---
Setpoint without compensation (condenser line 1)
Diﬀerential (condenser line 1)
Second condenser line conﬁguration
12,0 barg
2,0 barg
NO
… (**) … (**)
… (**) … (**)
--NO / YES
Number of fans (line 2)
…
Diﬀerential (condenser line 2)
Type of plant
3
…
2,0 barg
SUCTION +
CONDENSER
--…
… (**)
---
Measure Units
Number of suction lines
Dedicated pRack board
for suction line
Compressors type
Unit of measure
Number of suction lines
Suction lines are on diﬀerent boards
&deg;C/barg
1
NO
-------
Type of compressors (line 1)
RECIPROCATING ---
Compressors number
Compressors type
Number of compressors (line 1)
Type of compressors (line 2)
4
--RECIPROCATING ---
Number of compressors (line 2)
Number of condenser lines in the system
0
1
-----
RECIPROCATING / SCROLL
SCREW
1…6/12 (*)
RECIPROCATING / SCROLL
SCREW
1…6
0…2
Number of fans (line 1)
Number of fans (line 2)
Condenser lines are on diﬀerent boards
4
0
NO
-------
0…16
0…16
NO / YES
pLAN boards required for the selected pre-conﬁguration
Save Manufacturer conﬁguration
Manual installation of Manufacturer conﬁguration
Manual installation of Carel default values
--NO
NO
NO
---------
--NO / YES
NO / YES
NO / YES
Ib80
Ib81
Ib82
Ib90
Ib91
Default
UOM
Values
--NO / YES
100; 50/100; 50/75/100;
%
25/50/75/100; 33/66/100
…
…
…
NO
--NO / YES
S1…S4
--kW
S1
--S1…S4/INV
…
…
…
S1
--S1…S4
SAME
--SAME CAPACITY
DEFINE SIZES
CAPACITY
YES
--NO / YES
0.0…500.0
--kW
…
…
…
NO
--NO / YES
0.0…500.0
--kW
S1
--S1…S4/INV
…
…
…
S1
--S1…S4
PRESSURE
--PRESSURE / TEMPERATURE
barg
--…
R404A
--R22 - R134a - R404A - R407C R410A - R507A - R290 - R600 R600a - R717 -R744 - R728 R1270 - R417A - R422D -R413A R422A - R423A - R407A - R427A
- R245Fa - R407F - R32
NEUTRAL ZONE --PROPORTIONAL BAND
NEUTRAL ZONE
NO
--NO / YES
YES
100
Ib92
Ib93
Ib94
Ib95
Ib96
Ib1a
…
Ib1e
Ic01
Ic02
Ic03
Ic04
Ic05
Ic06
Compressors number
Number of condensing
lines
Line 1
Ic08
Line 2
Dedicated pRack board
Ic09
for condenser line
Ic10 (display only) Boards necessary
Save conﬁguration
Id01
Load conﬁguration
Id02
Restore Carel default
Ic07
0 to 16
NONE
INVERTER
PHASE CONTROL
PRESSURE / TEMPERATURE
…
R22 - R134a - R404A - R407C R410A - R507A - R290 - R600 R600a - R717 -R744 - R728 R1270 - R417A - R422D -R413A R422A - R423A - R407A - R427A
- R245Fa - R407F - R32
PROPORTIONAL BAND
NEUTRAL ZONE
NO / YES
0…16
…
… (**)
SUCTION
CONDENSER
SUCTION + CONDENSER
&deg;C/barg / &deg;F/psig
0…2
NO / YES
Tab. 7.a
(*) Depending on the type of compressor
(**) Depending on the unit of measure selected
(***) Depending on the compressor manufacturer, see relative paragraph
(****) Depending on the hardware size
pRack +0300025EN rel. 1.3 - 17.12.2015
74
ENG
8. ALARMS
pRack pR300 can manage both alarms relating to the status of the digital
inputs and to operation of the system. For each alarm, the following are
controlled:
• The actions on the devices, if necessary
• The output relays (one global and two with diﬀerent priorities, if
conﬁgured)
• The red LED on the terminal and the buzzer, where present
• The type of acknowledgement (automatic, manual, semiautomatic)
• Any activation delay
8.1.3
• by pressing the
(Alarm) button and then
(Enter) when there are
no active alarms
• by pressing
(Enter) after having scrolled all the alarms.
The alarm log screens show:
1. Order of activation (no. 01 is the oldest alarm)
2. Hour and date the alarm was activated
3. Short description
4. Main values recorded at the moment the alarm was activated (suction
pressure and condensing pressure)
Note: A maximum of 50 alarms can be logged; after this limit any
new events overwrite the oldest ones, which are therefore deleted.
The complete list of alarms, with the related information as described
above, is available in Appendix A.4.
8.1 Alarm management
All alarms feature the following behaviour:
• When an alarm is activated, the red LED ﬂashes and the buzzer is
activated (where present); the output relays corresponding to the
global alarm and to any alarms with priority are activated (if conﬁgured)
8.2 Compressor alarms
The number of alarms for each compressor can be set during the
conﬁguration phase using the Wizard or subsequently from branch C.a.e/
C.b.e of the main menu. The number of alarms is the same for all the
compressors on the same line.
• Pressing the
(Alarm) button, the red LED stays on steady, the buzzer
is muted and the alarm screen is shown
• If there is more than one active alarm, these can be scrolled using
(Down). This condition is signalled by an arrow at the bottom
(Up)
right of the screen
Alarms
• Pressing the
(Alarm) button again for at least 3 seconds
acknowledges the alarms manually, and these are cleared from the
display unless others are active (they are saved in the log)
8.1.1
Cae01
Number of alarms
for each compressor:
3
Priority
For certain alarms, the alarm output relay can be set with two types of
priority:
• R1: serious alarm
• R2: normal alarm
Note: The maximum number of alarms that can be conﬁgured for
each compressor depends not only on the type of compressor, but
also on the size of pRack and the number of compressors ﬁtted.
The corresponding relays, once conﬁgured, are activated when an alarm
with the corresponding priority occurs.
For the other alarms, the priority is ﬁxed and is associated by default with
one of the two relays.
8.1.2
Log
The alarm log can be accessed:
• from branch G.a of the main menu
After having selected the number of alarms (maximum 4 for the
reciprocating or scroll compressors and 7 for screw compressors), the
settings can be conﬁgured for each alarm, choosing a description from
the options shown in the table, the output relay, the type of reset, delay
and priority. The eﬀect of the alarm on the devices is set and involves
stopping the compressor, except for the oil warning.
Acknowledgement
The alarms can have
acknowledgement:
manual,
automatic
or
semiautomatic
• Manual: the alarm is acknowledged by pressing the
(Alarm)
button twice, the ﬁrst time displays the corresponding alarm screen
and mutes the buzzer, the second (extended, for at least 3 seconds)
cancels the alarm (which is saved in the log). If the alarm is still active,
acknowledgement has no eﬀect and the signal is shown again.
• Automatic: when the alarm condition ceases, the alarm is automatically
reset, the LED comes on steady and the corresponding screen remains
Possible descriptions for compressor alarms
Reciprocating or scroll
Generic
Overload
High pressure
Low pressure
Oil
displayed until the
(Alarm) button is pressed and held; the alarm is
saved in the log.
• Semiautomatic: acknowledgement is automatic, until a maximum
number of activations in set time. If the number reaches the maximum
set, acknowledgement becomes manual.
Screw
Generic
Overload
High pressure
Low pressure
Oil
Screw rotation
Oil warning (Filter Blocked)
Tab. 8.a
An example of a screen for selecting the description of the alarm is shown
in the ﬁgure:
For manual acknowledgement, the functions associated with the alarm
are not reactivated until acknowledgement has been completed, while
for automatic acknowledgement they’re reactivated as soon as the alarm
condition ceases.
Alarms
Cae02
Alarm 1 description:
Generic:
Overload:
High pressure:
Low pressure:
Oil:
75
pRack +0300025EN rel. 1.3 - 17.12.2015
ENG
After having selected the ‘generic’ description, no other description can
be selected. In general, the descriptions are divided into four groups:
• generic
• others (overload, oil, high pressure , low pressure)
• screw rotation
• oil warning
After a description has been selected for a certain group, descriptions
from a diﬀerent group can not be selected for that alarm.
For example, generic only, or overload + oil, or rotation only or overload +
high pressure., etc. can be selected.
8.3 Pressure and prevent alarms
pRack pR300 can manage pressure alarms from a pressure switch or
probe, according to the following diagram.
Alarms from pressure switch:
• Low suction pressure
• High condensing pressure
Alarms from probe:
Low suction pressure
High suction pressure
Low condensing pressure
High condensing pressure
One possible example for the low pressure alarms is shown in the ﬁgure:
•
•
•
•
Each alarm will have one alarm screen, which will show all the descriptions
associated to that alarm.
Based on the number of alarms selected, the descriptions associated by
default are shown in the table below
LP
Default descriptions based on the number of alarms
Number of alarms
Descriptions
1
Generic
Overload
HP-LP
Overload
HP-LP
Oil
Overload
HP
LP
Oil
Overload
HP
LP
Oil
Oil warning
Overload
HP
LP
Oil
Oil warning
Rotation
Overload
HP
LP
Oil
Oil warning
Rotation
Generic
2
3
4
5
6
7
Diﬀerential
Pressostat alarm
Probe alarm
Fig. 8.a
In addition, the high pressure alarm features a prevent function, available
by manually overriding the devices as well as using additional functions,
such as heat recovery and ChillBooster.
Operation of the alarms and prevent function is described below.
8.3.1
Pressure alarms from pressure switch
The parameters corresponding to these alarms can be set in branch
G.c.a/G.c.b of the main menu.
Low suction pressure from pressure switch
The low suction pressure alarm from pressure switch has the eﬀect of
stopping all the compressors without observing the various times,
therefore when the digital input conﬁgured as low pressure switch
is activated, all the compressors on the line aﬀected are stopped
immediately.
This alarm features semiautomatic reset, and both the monitoring time
and the number of activations in the speciﬁed period can be set. If the
number of activations is higher, reset becomes manual.
In addition, the delay after which the alarm is activated on both start-up
and during operation can be set.
The delay at start-up only applies to unit start-up and not compressor
power-up.
Tab. 8.b
Note: for oil alarms, special management is available whereby the
alarm is interpreted as an oil level alarm. When the alarm is
activated, a number of attempts are made to restore the level for a set
time before the alarm is signalled and the compressor stopped; see
paragraph 6.6.1 for details.
High condensing pressure from pressure switch
The high condensing pressure alarm from pressure switch has the eﬀect
of stopping all the compressors without observing the various times
and forcing the fans on at maximum speed, therefore when the digital
input conﬁgured as high pressure switch is activated, all the compressors
on the line aﬀected are stopped immediately and the fans operate at
maximum output.
If a modulating device is used for the compressors, further alarms
become available:
• compressor inverter warning, common for the entire suction line,
when the device is an inverter
• oil sump temperature alarm, high discharge temperature and oil
dilution, for Digital Scroll™ compressors
This alarm features manual or automatic reset, as conﬁgured by the user.
The delay after which the alarm is activated can also be set
For each compressor, two alarm variables are sent to the supervisor, one
for each priority. As well as the alarm signal, the description of the alarm is
also sent to the supervisor, using the values shown in the table:
The supervisor can interpret the variables sent by pRack pR300 and
provide the correct description of the alarm.
pRack +0300025EN rel. 1.3 - 17.12.2015
Pressure
76
ENG
8.3.2
Prevent by activating heat recovery
The parameters corresponding to this function can be set in branch
G.b.a/G.b.b of the main menu, if the heat recovery function is present.
Pressure alarms from probe
The parameters corresponding to these alarms can be set in branch
C.a.e/C.b.e of the main menu for the suction pressure and D.a.e/D.b.e for
the condensing pressure.
As well as enabling the function, an oﬀset from the activation threshold
for the prevent by overriding devices function must be set. The activation
diﬀerential for this function is the same as set for the prevent by overriding
devices function.
For these types of alarms, reset is automatic and the activation threshold
and diﬀerential can be set, as well as the type of threshold, which may be
absolute or relative to the control set point. The ﬁgure shows an example
of setting the threshold to relative.
When reaching the threshold, pRack pR300 activates the heat recovery
function, if the conditions allow; see paragraph 6.6.3 for details.
HP
Prevent by activating ChillBooster
The parameters relating to this function can be set in branch G.b.a/G.b.b
of the main menu, if the ChillBooster function is present.
Pressure
Differential
Relative threshold
Setpoint
As well as enabling the function, an oﬀset from the activation threshold
for the prevent by overriding devices function must be set. The activation
diﬀerential for this function is the same as set for the prevent by overriding
devices function.
Alarm
Fig. 8.b
Note: for temperature control, the alarms from probe are managed
based on temperature even when pressure probes are ﬁtted.
When reaching the threshold, pRack pR300 force activates the
ChillBooster, if the conditions allow; see paragraph 6.6.5 for details.
The eﬀects of the diﬀerent pressure alarms from probe are described
below.
The following ﬁgure illustrates the activation thresholds for the prevent
function and the safety devices:
Low suction pressure from probe
The low suction pressure alarm from probe has the eﬀect of stopping all
the compressors, ignoring the times.
Pressure
HP by pressostat
High suction pressure from probe
The high suction pressure alarm from probe has the eﬀect of forcing
all the compressors on, ignoring the control times, but observing the
compressor protection times.
HP by probe
Low condensing pressure from probe
The low condensing pressure alarm from probe has the eﬀect of stopping
all the fans, ignoring the times.
Prevent
Offset
Heat reclaim
or ChillBooster
High condensing pressure from probe
The high condensing pressure alarm from probe has the eﬀect of forcing
all the fans on and stopping all the compressors, ignoring the times.
time
Fig. 8.c
8.3.3
High pressure prevention
8.3.4
pRack pR300 can manage 3 types of high condensing pressure prevention
actions, involving:
• overriding the compressors and fans
• activating heat recovery
• activating ChillBooster
Prevent low suction pressure
pR300 oﬀers the possibility to reduce compressor capacity in the event of
low suction pressure. The parameters relating to this function can be set
in branch G.b.a/G.b.b of the main menu.
The eﬀect of this function is to operate the compressors at a set
percentage of capacity as soon as pressure falls below the prevent set
point and related diﬀerential (screen Gab06)
In addition to the activation threshold, which is always absolute, and
the activation diﬀerential, a compressor deactivation time can be set,
corresponding to the time needed to switch oﬀ all the compressors
except for the minimum capacity step.
The evaluation time and number of activations allowed in a certain time
period can also be set. If the number of activations exceeds the setting,
manual reset is required (screen Gab07)
When the prevent function is activated, an alarm icon is shown on the
main screen, and a warning screen appears in the alarms.
Prevent by overriding the compressors and fans
The parameters relating to this function can be set in branch G.b.a/G.b.b
of the main menu.
The eﬀect of this type of prevent action is to force all the fans on at
maximum and switch all the compressors oﬀ, except for the minimum
capacity stage, ignoring the control times but observing the compressor
protection times. The minimum capacity stage means one compressor in
the case of compressors without capacity control and modulation devices,
or the minimum capacity stage for capacity-controlled compressors (e.g.
25%), or alternatively the minimum output of the modulation device in
the case of inverters, Digital ScrollTM compressors or screw compressors
with continuous modulation.
Prevent low suction pressure with auxiliary control
Advanced conﬁgurations are available when using auxiliary control, so as
to ensure a better response when activated.
As well as the activation threshold, which is always absolute, and the
activation diﬀerential, a compressor deactivation time can be set,
corresponding to the time needed to switch oﬀ all the compressors,
except for the minimum capacity stage.
If the suction pressure falls below the set threshold (screen Gba08),
compressor capacity is reduced proportionally to the limit set point.
Normally, when the prevent function ends, the current capacity is
instantly brought to the level needed to meet the control request.
If the parameter “Align request after prevent” is enabled (screen Gba09),
the current request is aligned with the limit value.
In addition, both the monitoring time and the number of activations in
the speciﬁed period can be set. If the number of activations is higher,
reset becomes manual.
77
pRack +0300025EN rel. 1.3 - 17.12.2015
ENG
9. SUPERVISORY AND COMMISSIONING SYSTEMS
pRack pR300 can be connected to various supervisory systems,
speciﬁcally the Carel and Modbus communication protocols can be used.
For the Carel protocol, the PlantVisor PRO and PlantWatch PRO models
are available.
9.2 Commissioning software
pRack Manager is conﬁguration and real-time monitoring software used
to check the operation of pRack pR300, for commissioning, debug and
maintenance operations.
In addition, pRack pR300 can be connected to the pRack Manager
commissioning software.
The software is available on the internet at http://ksa.CAREL.com in the
section “download &agrave; support &agrave; software utilities”.The installation includes,
in addition to the program, the user manual and the necessary drivers.
pRack Manager can be used to set the conﬁguration parameters, modify
the values of volatile and permanent variables, save graphs of the main
system values to ﬁle, manually manage the unit I/Os using simulation ﬁles
and monitor/reset alarms on the unit where the device is installed.
9.1 PlantVisor PRO and PlantWatch PRO
supervisory systems
Connection to Carel PlantVisor PRO and PlantWatch PRO supervisor
systems uses the RS485 card already ﬁtted on some models of pRack
pR300. For details on the models of card available, see Chapter 1.
pRack pR300 is able to virtualise all the inputs and outputs, both digital
and analogue, therefore each input and output can be overridden by
pRack Manager.
Note: In general, the pRack boards that manage the suction lines
must be ﬁtted with the supervisor connection card, consequently
boards with pLAN address 1 or 2. It is also possible to use the CAREL
protocoll to both BMS ports (J25 biul-it and optional) of eacn board. If a
port is used with CAREL protocoll, it is necessary to set the other with sar&agrave;
MODBUS protocoll.
pRack Manager manages &lt;ﬁle name&gt;.DEV ﬁles that contain the user
parameter conﬁgurations and that can be downloaded from the pRack
pR300 board and then subsequently uploaded.
To use the pRack Manager program, a serial converter output RS485 with
CVSTDUTLF0 (telephone connector) or CVSTDUMOR0 (3 pin terminal)
must be connected to the board.
The connection to pRack Manager can be made:
1. Via the RS485 serial port used for the “pLAN” connection
2. Via the BMS serial port with RS485 serial card and activating the pRack
Manager protocol by parameter on screen Fca01 or connecting
pRack Manager and selecting SearchDevice = Auto (BMS or FB)
on the “Connection settings” tab. In this case, the connection is
established after around 15-20 seconds.
Three diﬀerent models of PlantVisor PRO and PlantWatch PRO are
available, used to supervise system conﬁgurations with one or two lines:
• L1 – one line: can be used for system conﬁgurations with just one
suction and/or condenser line.
• L2 – one line: can be used for system conﬁgurations with two suction
and/or condenser lines, and the two suction lines are managed by
separate boards.
• Two lines: can be used for system conﬁgurations with two suction and/
or condenser lines, and the two suction lines are managed by the same
board.
Important: the BMS serial port should only be used for monitoring
the variables, while to update the software use the RS485 serial
port dedicated to the pLAN connection.
Important: model L2 – One line must be used only in association
with model L1 – One line. For supervision of system conﬁgurations
with just one line only model L1 – One line can be used.
The following ﬁgure shows an example of connection to the PC via the
RS485 serial port used for the “pLAN” connection
Tutorial: the rule applied for using the models is summarised
below:
• cconﬁguration with board with pLAN address 2 &AElig; separate models
• conﬁguration without board with pLAN address 2 &AElig; one model only
A connection example for using PlantVisor PRO and PlantWatch PRO is
shown in the ﬁgure.
J10
4
J25 BMS2
3
2
C8
C7
J14
NC8
C7
J13
NO8
C4
NO7
J15
1
J25 BMS2
2
C8
C7
NC8
J15
1
J26 FBus2
pR300
B M S card
IDC1
ID8
ID7
ID6
ID5
ID4
ID3
ID2
Y4
Y3
J5
Y2
VG0
VG
GND
U5
GND
U4
+VDC
Y1
J4
J3
GND
U3
U2
U1
G0
GND
J2
Power
supply
Fig. 9.b
Fig. 9.a
Note: for further details see the pRack Manager program online
help.
The complete list of supervisor variables, with the corresponding
addresses and descriptions, can be supplied upon request.
pRack +0300025EN rel. 1.3 - 17.12.2015
+Vterm
G
CVSTDUMOR0
J24
+5 VREF
FieldBus card
J1
ID1
IDC1
ID8
ID7
ID6
ID5
ID4
ID3
Y4
ID2
ID1
Y3
J5
Y2
VG0
VG
GND
Y1
J4
U5
GND
U4
+VDC
3
B M S card
J3
GND
U3
+5 VREF
J2
U2
GND
J24
U1
G0
+Vterm
G
J1
C7
4
pR300
NO8
C4
J14
J13
J10
FieldBus card
NO7
C4
NO6
NO5
C1
J12
J11 pLAN
NO4
C1
NO3
NO2
J26 FBus2
NO1
C4
NO6
C1
NO5
NO4
C1
NO3
NO2
NO1
CVSTDUTLF0
J12
J11 pLAN
78
ENG
10. UPDATING THE SOFTWARE
The pRack pR300 boards are supplied with the software already loaded. If
an update is required, the following can be used:
• pRack Manager
• SmartKey programming key
10.3 Pendrive: operating instructions
10.3.1 File extensions, names and contents
Various types of ﬁles can be uploaded and downloaded and are
distinguished by their extension.
Note: The pRack pR300 software is protected by digital signature
and cannot be loaded onto hardware other than pRack pR300 (e.g.
pCO3), otherwise after 5 minutes of operation the software locks up, all
the relays open and the warning “INVALID OEM IDENTIFIER” is shown’.
File names
In order to be recognised, the names of the directories and ﬁles on the
pendrive must have no more than 8 characters; the controller makes no
distinction between upper-case and lower-case characters. However,
during DOWNLOAD the names of the directories created by the controller
on the pendrive are always in upper-case.
The update ﬁles are available at http://ksa.CAREL.com.
Important: each version of the pRack pR300 software is associated
with a speciﬁc controller ﬁrmware version (BIOS), therefore if
updating the version, always check and where necessary update the BIOS
on the board. The appropriate BIOS version is supplied together with the
pRack pR300 update ﬁles.
FILE TYPES FOR UPLOAD
File extension Description
.IUP
Contains the deﬁnitions of the screens on the terminal
.BLB
Contains the application
.BIN
Contains the application (with pLAN table)
.BLX
Contains the Logique of atoms custom in C language
.GRP
Contains the graphics
.DEV
Contains the preset conﬁguration parameter values
PVT,.LCT
Contains the descriptions of the public variables to be logged.
Generated by 1Tool, this is used by the LogEditor module and
must be loaded together with the.LCT ﬁle
10.1 Updating using pRack Manager
The software resident in the pRack pR300 boards can be updated from
a PC.
For the connection procedure see Chapter 9, while for further details see
the pRack Manager program online help..
Downloaded ﬁles are saved in directories created automatically, with the
following name format:
NAMXY_WZ
Where:
NAM: identiﬁes the type of data downloaded (LOG for logs, BKP for the
application, DEV for the buﬀer memory, CPY for all the data from the
controller).
XY: progressive number from 0 to 99
WZ: controller pLAN address.
Note: The pCOLoad program can also be used to update the pRack
pR300 software, however Winload cannot be used.
10.2 Updating using SmartKey
The SMARTKEY programming key can copy the contents of one pRack
pR300 board to another identical board, using the telephone connector
on the terminal (the pLAN must be disconnected).
Example: a directory named LOG00_01 contains the log ﬁles (LOG)
downloaded from a device whose pLAN address is 1. Since the key
contained no directory of this type before download, it is indicated with 00.
From a PC, with the SmartKey Programmer software running, the key can
be conﬁgured to perform speciﬁc operations: acquire log ﬁles, program
applications, etc.
The SmartKey Programmer software is installed together with pRack
Manager.
Important: No more than 100 ﬁles of the same type can be
downloaded to the pendrive, as the directories created can only be
numbered with XY=00 to 99.
The following ﬁgure shows the connection of the SmartKey to the PC
using the PCOSO0AKY0 converter.
FILE TYPES FOR DOWNLOAD (controller pLAN address = 1)
File extension
Directory name
Description
.DWL
LOG00_01
Logged data
.DWL,.DEV,.LCT,.PVT BKP00_01
Application
.DEV
DEV00_01
Non-volatile parameters
.DWL,.DEV,.LCT,.PVT CPY00_01
All data on the controller
The downloaded ﬁles to have ﬁxed names. In particular, the application
ﬁle is called “ppl–pRack.dwl”, the BIOS ﬁle “bios–pRack.bin”, the ﬁles
containing the logs and related information are “logs.dwl”, “logs.lot” and
“logs.pvt”, respectively. Finally, the buﬀer memory is saved to the ﬁle on
the pendrive.
PRGH
PCOS00AKY0
VWDUW
Tab. 10.c
Fig. 10.a
Note: for further details on using the SmartKey, see the
corresponding instruction sheet. For details on the SmartKey
Programmer see the online manual.
79
pRack +0300025EN rel. 1.3 - 17.12.2015
ENG
Menu access
The following are the steps for accessing the pendrive management
menu. Procedure:
1. Connect the pendrive to the master port.
After the description of the desired function, various options are available:
1. To copy the complete contents of the directory, simply write the
name of the directory (e.g. the entire contents of the CHILLER
directory):
[FUNCTION]
Upload non volatile memory
USB key
[DIR]
CHILLER
2.
B M S ca rd
To copy just 1 ﬁle in a directory, enter the ﬁle’s name (e.g. the
CHILLER.DEV ﬁle in the CHILLER directory).
[FUNCTION]
Upload non volatile memory
Fig. 10.b
2.
[DIR]
Press Alarm and Enter together for 3 seconds to enter the option menu.
Select FLASH/USB memory and press Enter to conﬁrm.
CHILLER
4:45&amp;.*/'03.&quot;5*0/
-0(%&quot;5&quot;
05)&amp;3*/'03.&quot;5*0/
'-&quot;4)64#.&amp;.03:
CHILLER.DEV
To show a string on the display describing the operation being
performed, add the “[NAM]” instruction, followed by the string to display.
The following ﬁle will display the string:
Fig. 10.c
“UPL CHILLER.DEV”
3.
Select USB pen drive and press Enter to conﬁrm.
[FUNCTION]
Upload non volatile memory
/&quot;/%'-&quot;4)'*-&amp;4
64#1&amp;/%3*7&amp;
[DIR]
CHILLER
Fig. 10.d
[NAM]
UPL CHILLER.DEV
Important: Wait a few seconds after the pendrive has been
plugged in for it to be recognised by the controller. If the message “No
USB disk or PC connected” is displayed momentarily with the request to
connect a pendrive key or computer USB cable, wait a few seconds until
the recognition message is shown (“USB disk found”) and the following
screen appears.
CHILLER.DEV
3. To select only some of the ﬁles in the same directory, list them after
4.
a label. The following labels are allowed and must be entered in the
order shown in the table:
Select UPLOAD.
4ELECTFUNCTION
61-0&quot;% PENP$0
%08/-0&quot;% P$0PEN
UPLOAD ﬁle labels
No. Label
File type
No.
Label
File type
1
[BIO] (*)
ﬁle.bin
6
[PVT]
ﬁle.pvt
2
[IUP]
ﬁle.iup
7
[LCT]
ﬁle.lct
3
[BIN]
ﬁle.bin, blb
8
[OED]
ﬁle.oed
10.3.2 Upload
4
[DEV]
ﬁle.dev
9
[SGN]
ﬁle.sgn
An application plus BIOS or buﬀer memory (parameters) can be uploaded
from the pendrive. The following modes are available: automatic, autorun
and manual. Automatic and autorun modes require using conﬁguration ﬁles.
5
[GRP]
ﬁle.grp
Fig. 10.e
(*) BIO = BIOS ﬁle
Conﬁguration ﬁle structure
Conﬁguration ﬁles must start with the string “[FUNCTION]” followed by a
string that identiﬁes the function, as shown in the table.
Notes:
• to get the.bin file from the BIOS in the format available on http://ksa.
carel.com (.os file), unzip the.os file;
Function
UPLOAD an application or a BIOS ﬁle plus an
application
UPLOAD non-volatile memory (.dev)
UPLOAD the entire contents of the pRack
String
Upload application
• the [IUP] label can be followed by one or more “.iup” files.
Upload non volatile memory
Copy pRack upload
Important:
• the order in which the ﬁle names are entered is fundamental and must
not be changed;
• do not enter empty lines or spaces in the ﬁle (e.g. at the end of a line);
• each ﬁle after the last line of code must contain a “carriage return”
character (CR ), as shown in the following example.
pRack +0300025EN rel. 1.3 - 17.12.2015
80
ENG
Example: The following ﬁle will upload the BIOS and an application.
3.
At the end a message will ask the user to remove the pendrive.
[FUNCTION]
61-0&quot;%*/('*-&amp;
1-&amp;&quot;4&amp;8&quot;*5
Upload application

[DIR] 
NEW AHU 
Fig. 10.h

[NAM] 
10.3.4 Upload in autorun mode
BIOS+APPL+LOGSv58B36 
Uploading in autorun mode is a special case of uploading in automatic
mode. Unlike automatic mode, the user must wait for a speciﬁc message
to appear on the display to start or disable the operation described in the
conﬁguration ﬁle. To upload a ﬁle in autorun mode, a conﬁguration ﬁle
must be created and named “autorun.txt”.

bisn509.bin 

[IUP] 
Example of uploading BIOS+application
The upload involves two steps: ﬁrst the BIOS is updated and then the
application. The information is shown on the pRack’s built-in display and
on the pGDE terminal, when both are featured.
AHU_EN.iup 
AHU_IT.iup 

Procedure:
1. Connect the pendrive to port A.
[BIN] 
AHU.blb 

[DEV] 
AHU.dev 
USB key

[GRP] 
B M S ca rd
AHU.grp 

[PVT] 
Fig. 10.i
AHU.pvt 
2.
After a few seconds, Autorun mode starts. Press Enter to conﬁrm.

[LCT] 
&quot;65036/.0%&amp;
61-0&quot;%&quot;11-*&quot;5*0/
1RESS&amp;/5&amp;3TOSTART
&amp;4$TOEXITAUTORUN
AHU.lct 
10.3.3 Automatic upload
Fig. 10.j
To automatically upload the parameter memory using the ﬁrst
conﬁguration ﬁle shown in the preceding paragraph, access the system
menu as previously described and proceed as follows:
1.
3.
Select automatic mode. A screen is shown describing the function
of the buttons. Press Enter to conﬁrm.
'8VALIDATION
1LEASEWAIT
4ELECTUPLOADMODE
&quot;650.&quot;5*$.0%&amp;
.&quot;/6&quot;-.0%&amp;
Fig. 10.k
4.
Fig. 10.f
2.
The validity of the FW is checked and the BIOS is loaded.
Conﬁrm by selecting Prg. A screen is displayed requesting
conﬁrmation to upload the non-volatile memory. Press Enter to
conﬁrm.
The display ﬂashes to indicate that after loading the new BIOS the
controller is being reset.
'8WBMJEBUJPO
1MFBTFXBJU
61-'*-&amp;?%&amp;7
Fig. 10.l
Fig. 10.g
81
pRack +0300025EN rel. 1.3 - 17.12.2015
ENG
8.
pGD
NO LINK
Remove the pendrive. The update is complete. Wait for the display to
stop ﬂashing, indicating that the controller is being reset before
restarting.
6QMPBEDPNQMFUF
3FNPWF64#LFZ
BOEXBJUSFTFU
Fig. 10.m
5.
The test phase starts.
Fig. 10.t
&quot;PPLICATIONPROGRAM
CORRUPTEDORNOT
PRESENT
8&quot;*5*/(FORUPGRADE
pGD
/0-*/,
Fig. 10.n
pGD
Fig. 10.u
/0-*/,
Important: As can be seen, when updating the BIOS and the
application, the pGDE terminal shows the message “NO LINK”, meaning
that no connection is established. Do not remove the terminal and wait
for the end of the update procedure, when the pGDE terminal replicates
the messages on the built-in display.
Fig. 10.o
6.
The controller warns that no application has been loaded.
Note: Autorun run is especially useful in those cases in which the
same operation needs to be performed on several controllers. For
example, to load diﬀerent applications on controllers connected in a
pLAN network, only one autorun ﬁle needs to be created; this uploads
the various directories contained on the pendrive based on the address
of the controllers. The controller with address XY will only load the
directory called “nomedir_XY” [“DirName_XY”]. The pendrive then only
needs to be plugged into each controller to run the upload, conﬁrming
from the shared terminal.
&quot;PPLICATIONPROGRAM
CORRUPTEDORNOT
PRESENT
8&quot;*5*/(FORUPGRADE
Fig. 10.p
10.3.5 Manual upload
pGD
To manually upload the contents of the pendrive the user must access
the management menu from the system screens, selecting UPLOAD and
then MANUAL. The ﬁles are selected by pressing ENTER when the cursor
is on the desired ﬁle name. A selected ﬁle is marked by the symbol “*”
on the left. Once the ﬁles have been selected (all in the same directory),
press PRG to start the upload. To display the contents of a directory press
ENTER. To go up one directory level press ESC. Once the upload has
started, the messages shown on the screen are the same as in automatic
and autorun mode.
/0-*/,
Fig. 10.q
7.
The application update then starts.
10.3.6 Download
As mentioned above, the DOWNLOAD operation can be managed in two
ways:
1. Manual mode: follow the steps described in the paragraph
“Automatic upload” and select manual operation. Then each ﬁle
must be selected and downloaded.
2. Autorun mode: prepare a ﬁle called “autorun.txt”, containing a string
that identiﬁes the function to be performed.
6PLOADAPPL
1LEASEWAIT
Fig. 10.r
Function
DOWNLOAD the application
DOWNLOAD non-volatile memory
DOWNLOAD the entire contents of
the pRack
pGD
/0-*/,
String
Download application
Download non volatile memory (.dev)
Copy pRack download
The result is the creation of ﬁles with the required extensions, which will
be placed in the respective directories as described in the paragraph “File
names”. When the operation is completed, the display shows a message
with the name of the directory created.
Fig. 10.s
[FUNCTION]
Download application
pRack +0300025EN rel. 1.3 - 17.12.2015
82
ENG
The following screen will be displayed.
1.
10.4 Conﬁguring pCOWeb/pCOnet from a
system screen
Press Enter to conﬁrm.
See par. 6.6 for information on how to access the BIOS system menu.
Starting from:
• BIOS release 5.16 BIOS, and from
• pCOWeb ﬁrmware version A1.5.0, and from
• pCOnet ﬁrmware version A485_A1.2.1
'8VALIDATION
1LEASEWAIT
pCOWeb and pCOnet communication parameters can be conﬁgured.
The purpose is to conﬁgure the network (Ethernet for pCOWeb, RS485
for pCOnet) when the respective card is installed for the ﬁrst time. The
remaining parameters (alarms, events, etc.) can be conﬁgured using the
usual tools, i.e. BACset or web interface (pCOWeb only). Conﬁguration
can be done either when using the Modbus protocol or the CAREL
protocol, but only on the BMS1 serial port. The screens for conﬁguring
pCOWeb and pCOnet can be opened by accessing the system screens
and selecting OTHER INFORMATION and then PCOWEB/NET Konﬁg. Then,
select “PCOWEB settings” to conﬁgure pCOWeb parameters or “PCONET
settings” to conﬁgure pCOnet parameters.
Fig. 10.v
2.
Download completed.
0PERATIONCOMPLETE
%ATADOWNLOADED
TO#,1?
Fig. 10.w
Conﬁguring pCOWeb
When you select “PCOWEB settings” the following screen will appear:
Example: On the controller with address 1, the autorun ﬁle will create
a directory called BKP00_01 and copy the ﬁles APPL_PRack.DWL and
FILE_DEV.DEV to this directory.
D H C P :
Connecting to a computer
Connect the slave USB port on the controller to the USB port on the
computer where pRack Manager is installed.
I P
-
-
A D D R E S S
- - - . - - - .
-
-
-
.
-
-
-
After a short time the ﬁelds are populated with the current parameters.
If the ﬁelds are not populated with the current parameters, check the
ﬁrmware version of pCOWeb and the protocol used by the BMS serial
port. The parameters can now be edited by selecting the respective
ﬁelds using the ENTER button and setting the desired values using the
UP/DOWN buttons. If the DHCP option is set to ON, the IP address and
Netmask ﬁelds cannot be changed. Pressing ENTER repeatedly will display
all the parameters available, as listed in the following screens:
USB connector
from computer
B M S card
-
N e
Fig. 10.x
G a
Important:
• do not install any type of converter between the computer and port B,
even if requested by the program’s guided procedure;
t m a
- - t e w
- - -
D N S
D N S
-
• pRack Manager manages compressed ﬁles (.GRT/.OS).
Once the connection is established, the following operations are available:
1. UPLOADING the application or BIOS+application.
2. DOWNLOADING the non-volatile memory.
3. Commissioning
4. Managing the NAND ﬂash memory.
Once the USB cable is removed, the port will become available again
after approximately 5 s.
1
1
-
:
:
-
s k
. a y
. -
:
:
-
.
-
.
-
B A C n e
t
B A C n e
t
-
.
-
-
-
.
-
-
-
-
.
-
-
-
.
-
-
-
-
-
.
-
-
-
.
-
-
-
-
-
.
-
-
-
.
-
-
-
:
- p e
- -
:
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
I D
T y
-
Once the parameters have been chosen they can be updated by going to
the following screen and pressing ENTER.
Important: If no connection is established with pRack Manager
after plugging in the USB cable, wait at least 1 minute before using the
USB ports again after removing the cable.
P C O W E B
U p d a t e
C O N F I G
E N A B L E
p C O W e b ?
N O
While the parameters are being updated, the following message is
displayed:
P C O W E B
P l e a s e
e n d
o f
83
C O N F
w a i t
u p d a
I G
E N A B L E
f o r
t e
pRack +0300025EN rel. 1.3 - 17.12.2015
ENG
13. Reconnect pRack Manager and power up again
14. In Commissioning/Settings select the .2cf ﬁle relating to the new version
At the end, the screen shows:
P
U
R
a
C
p
e
p
O
d
b
p
W
a
o
l
E B
t e
o t
y
n
C
c
p
e
O N F I G
E N A B L E
o m p l e t e
C O W e b
t o
s e t t i n g
w
now loaded on pRack
15. From Device Conﬁguration, import the previously saved .txt ﬁle and
write all the variables
16. Power down, disconnect the PC and reconnect the terminal if
necessary
17. Power up again
Conﬁguring pCOnet
When you select “PCONET settings” the following screen will appear:
B A C n e
t
B A C n e
t
-
I D
b a
- -
:
- u d
- -
:
-
-
-
-
-
At the end of the procedure, pRack pR300 will be programmed with the
updated software and the previously conﬁgured parameters.
Important: if using the BMS serial port to read/write variables,
pRack pR300 continues operating, and therefore software malfunctions
may occur. Consequently, use the RS485 serial port provided for the pLAN
connection when carrying out the software update operations described
above.
-
After a short time the ﬁelds are populated with the current parameters.
The parameters can now be edited by selecting the respective ﬁelds
using the ENTER button and setting the desired values using the UP/
DOWN buttons. Pressing ENTER repeatedly will display all the parameters
available, as listed in the following screen:
B A C n e t
M A C :
M a x
M a s t e r s
M a x
F r a m e s :
:
-
-
-
-
Note: to update the software without maintaining the parameter
conﬁguration, simply complete steps 1 to 4 and 8 to 10 in the previous
procedure. In this case, the unit will need to be reconﬁgured using the
complete start-up procedure.
-
Once the parameters have been chosen they can be updated following
the procedure described for conﬁguring pCOWeb.
10.5 Saving parameters between diﬀerent
software versions
The conﬁguration parameters can be saved and loaded after having
updated the software. The update requires the ﬁles relating to the new
version being loaded (ﬁles with the following extensions: .iup, .blx., .blb,
.grt, .dev) and the connection ﬁles (ﬁles with the following extensions:
.2cf, .2ct, .2cd) for the installed version and the new version.
The connection ﬁles must be copied to the ''2cf'' directory under pRack
Manager, for example C:\Program Files\CAREL\pRackManager\2cf.
The update procedure including saving the parameters is as follows (for
details on the functions of the pRack Manager software see the online
manual):
1. Switch the unit oﬀ from the user terminal or supervisor or digital
input
2. Connect the PC where pRack Manager is installed using the pLAN
serial (disconnect the terminal if necessary) and disconnect any BMS
connections
3. Start the pRack Manager software
4. In the ''Connection settings'' panel, set Baud rate to ''Auto'' and
SearchDevice to ''Auto (pLAN)'' and select the COM port under
PortNumber (if necessary, use the Wizard to detect the correct COM)
5. In Commissioning/Settings select the .2cf ﬁle relating to the version
on pRack pR300, e.g. 1.0
6. Power down pRack pR300, power up again and wait for the controller
to come “On line”
7. In Device Conﬁguration read all the variables and save them to an .txt
ﬁle (required)
8. Update the software version on pRack pR300, selecting from pRack
Load the following update ﬁles and selecting ''Update graphic
resources and ''Enable zipped upload'':
• .iup (maximum 2 ﬁles)
• .blx
• .blb
• ClearAllx.dev, where x is the pLAN address of the board being
updated
9. Wait for the update procedure to end.
10. Power down, disconnect the PC and if necessary reconnect the terminal
11. Power up again and run a quick start-up procedure (pre-conﬁgurations
or Wizard, conﬁrming the default parameters)
12. Power down
pRack +0300025EN rel. 1.3 - 17.12.2015
84
ENG
11. APPENDIX
A.1 System conﬁgurations available
The system conﬁgurations available are shown in the table:
System conﬁgurations:
Conﬁguration
number
Description
1
2
3
No suction line, one condenser line
No suction line, two condenser lines
1 suction line (scroll or piston compressors), no condenser
line
1 suction line (scroll or piston compressors), 1 condenser line
1 suction line (scroll or piston compressors), 1 condenser line
on a separate board
2 suction lines on the same board (scroll or piston compressors), no condenser line
2 suction lines on the same board (scroll or piston compressors), 1 condenser line
2 suction lines on the same board (scroll or piston compressors), 1 condenser line on a separate board
2 suction lines (scroll or piston compressors), 2 condenser
lines on the same board
2 suction lines on the same board (scroll or piston compressors), 2 condenser lines on separate boards
2 suction lines on separate boards (scroll or piston compressors), 1 condenser line on suction line 1 board
2 suction lines on separate boards (scroll or piston compressors), 1 condenser line on a separate board
2 suction lines on separate boards (scroll or piston compressors), 2 condenser lines (one for each suction line board)
2 suction lines on separate boards (scroll or piston compressors), 2 condenser lines on separate boards
1 suction line (up to 2 screw compressors), no condenser line
1 suction line (up to 2 screw compressors), 1 condenser line
1 suction line (up to 2 screw compressors), 1 condenser line
on a separate board
2 suction lines on separate boards (up to 2 screw compressors on line 1 and scroll or piston compressors on line 2), 1
condenser line on suction line 1 board
2 suction lines on separate boards (up to 2 screw compressors on line 1 and scroll or piston compressors on line 2), 1
condenser line on a separate board
2 suction lines on separate boards (up to 2 screw compressors on line 1 and scroll or piston compressors on line 2), 2
condenser lines (one for each suction line board)
2 suction lines on separate boards (up to 2 screw compressors on line 1 and scroll or piston compressors on line 2), 2
condenser lines on separate boards
2 suction lines on separate boards (scroll or piston compressors), 2 condenser lines (line 1 on separate board, line 2 on
board in common with suction)
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
Suction
lines
Condenser
lines
Compressors
L1/L2
Maximum
Units present
number of
in pLAN (in
compressors per addition to the
line L1/L2
terminal)
1
1
12
1
0
0
1
1
2
0
scroll, piston
1
1
1
1
scroll, piston
scroll, piston
12
12
1
1, 3
a
b
2
0
12/12
1
c
2
1
12/12
1
c
2
1
12/12
1, 3
e
2
2
12/12
1
f
2
2
12/12
1, 3
g
2
1
12/12
1, 2
h
2
1
12/12
1, 2 ,3
d
2
2
12/12
1, 2
h
2
2
12/12
1, 2, 3, 4
i
1
1
1
0
1
1
scroll, piston/
scroll, piston
scroll, piston/
scroll, piston
scroll, piston/
scroll, piston
scroll, piston/
scroll, piston
scroll, piston/
scroll, piston
scroll, piston/
scroll, piston
scroll, piston/
scroll, piston
scroll, piston/
scroll, piston
scroll, piston/
scroll, piston
screw
screw
screw
2
2
2
1
1
1, 3
a
a
b
2
1
screw/scroll,
piston
2/12
1, 2
h
2
1
screw/scroll,
piston
2/12
1, 2, 3
d
2
2
screw/scroll,
piston
2/12
1, 2
h
2
2
screw/scroll,
piston
2/12
1, 2, 3, 4
i
2
2
scroll, piston/
scroll, piston
2/12
1, 2, 3, 4
l
Reference
diagram
a
a
a
Tab. A.a
85
pRack +0300025EN rel. 1.3 - 17.12.2015
ENG
d. 2 suction lines on separate boards (up to 2 screw compressors on line
The system conﬁgurations available refer to the following diagrams:
1 and scroll or piston compressors on line 2), 1 condenser line on a
separate board:
a. up to 1 suction line (scroll or piston compressors) and up to 1
condenser line on just one pRack pR300 board:
C8
C7
C7
NC8
C4
NO8
NO6
NO5
C4
C1
NO4
NO3
NO7
Board with
pLAN address 3
1
B M S car d
IDC1
ID8
ID7
ID6
Y4
ID5
ID4
ID3
ID2
ID1
Y1
VG0
VG
GND
U5
GND
U4
+VDC
J5
Y3
J4
J3
GND
U3
U2
U1
G0
G
J2
Board with
pLAN address 2
pLAN
J13
4
I/O
3
2
J25 BMS2
2
C8
C7
C7
3
NC8
C4
NO8
C4
4
J26 FBus2
J15
J14
J13
J10
1
NO7
NO6
NO5
C1
J12
J11 pLAN
NO4
C1
NO3
NO2
J15
NO1
C8
NC8
NO8
J14
J10
J25 BMS2
C7
C7
C4
NO7
NO6
NO5
C4
C1
J12
J11 pLAN
NO4
NO3
NO2
C1
NO1
IDC1
ID8
ID7
ID6
ID4
ID3
ID2
Y4
Y3
Y2
ID1
J5
Y1
VG0
VG
GND
U5
GND
U4
+VDC
GND
U3
U2
U1
+5 VREF
GND
+Vterm
2
J26 FBus2
Board with
pLAN address 1
BMS card
J4
J3
ID5
FieldBus card
J2
J24
+5 VREF
FieldBus card
J1
Y2
Board with
pLAN address 1
pR300
J24
3
J15
pR300
J15
1
GND
2
J26 FBus2
+Vterm
3
C8
C7
J14
4
NC8
C7
C4
J13
NO8
NO7
C4
C1
NO6
NO5
NO4
C1
NO3
NO2
NO1
J12
J25 BMS2
1
J26 FBus2
pLAN
pR300
pR300
BMS card
IDC1
ID8
ID7
ID6
ID5
ID4
ID3
Y4
Y3
Y2
J5
ID2
VG0
VG
GND
U5
GND
U4
+VDC
Y1
J4
J3
GND
U2
U1
G0
G
J2
+5 VREF
+Vterm
J24
GND
IDC1
ID8
ID7
ID6
Y4
J1
ID5
ID4
ID3
ID2
ID1
Y3
Y2
Y1
VG0
VG
GND
U5
GND
U4
+VDC
FieldBus card
J5
ID1
B M S card
J4
J3
GND
U3
U2
J2
U1
G0
G
+5 VREF
J24
GND
+Vterm
FieldBus card
J1
U3
G0
J14
4
J25 BMS2
J11 pLAN
G
J13
J10
J10
J1
NO2
C1
I/O
NO1
I/O
J12
J11 pLAN
Fig. A.a
I/O
b. 1 suction line (scroll or piston compressors) and 1 condenser line on a
I/O
separate board:
Fig. A.d
e. 2 suction lines on the same board (scroll or piston compressors), 1
I/O
J13
3
2
C8
C7
NC8
J15
J14
4
J25 BMS2
NO8
C7
C4
NO7
NO6
NO5
NO4
C4
C1
NO3
NO2
C1
NO1
condenser line on a separate board:
J12
J11 pLAN
J10
Board with
pLAN address 3
1
J26 FBus2
pR300
B M S card
IDC1
ID8
ID7
ID6
ID5
ID4
ID3
ID2
ID1
Y4
Y3
Y1
VG0
VG
GND
3
2
C8
J15
1
J26 FBus2
4
3
2
NC8
C8
C7
C7
C4
J14
J13
J10
J25 BMS2
NO8
NO7
C4
C1
NO6
NO5
NO4
C1
4
NC8
C7
J14
J13
J25 BMS2
NO8
C7
C4
NO7
NO6
NO5
NO4
C4
C1
NO3
NO2
C1
NO1
J12
J11 pLAN
J10
NO3
J12
J11 pLAN
Board with
pLAN address 1
NO2
I/O
pLAN
NO1
U5
GND
U4
+VDC
J5
Y2
J4
J3
GND
U3
U2
J2
U1
G0
G
GND
+Vterm
J24
+5 VREF
FieldBus card
J1
J15
Board with
pLAN address 3
1
J26 FBus2
pR300
BMS card
IDC1
ID8
ID7
ID6
ID4
ID3
ID2
Y4
Y3
Y2
J5
ID1
VG0
VG
GND
U5
GND
U4
+VDC
Y1
J4
J3
GND
U3
U2
J2
U1
+5 VREF
GND
+Vterm
G
J24
IDC1
ID8
ID7
ID6
ID5
ID4
ID3
ID2
Y4
ID1
Y3
J5
Y2
VG0
VG
GND
U5
GND
U4
+VDC
Y1
J4
J3
GND
U3
U2
J2
U1
G0
G
+5 VREF
J24
GND
+Vterm
J1
B M S ca rd
G0
J1
FieldBus card
ID5
FieldBus card
pR300
pLAN
Board
with pLAN
address 1
I/O
pR300
Fig. A.b
c. 2 suction lines on the same board (scroll or piston compressors) and up
to 1 condenser line:
I/O
I/O
Fig. A.e
I/O
Board
with pLAN
address 1
pR300
I/O
I/O
Fig. A.c
pRack +0300025EN rel. 1.3 - 17.12.2015
86
ENG
i.
2 suction lines on separate boards (scroll or piston compressors), 2
condenser lines on separate boards
3
2
C8
C7
C7
3
2
NC8
C4
NO8
NO7
C4
NO6
NO5
C1
1
J26 FBus2
B M S card
IDC1
ID8
ID7
ID5
ID4
ID3
Y4
Y3
ID2
ID1
Y1
VG0
VG
GND
U5
GND
U4
+VDC
J5
Y2
J4
J3
GND
U3
U2
G0
U1
G
J2
+5 VREF
J24
GND
+Vterm
IDC1
ID8
ID7
ID6
ID5
ID4
ID3
Y4
ID2
ID1
J1
ID6
FieldBus card
J5
Y3
VG0
VG
GND
U5
GND
U4
+VDC
J15
J14
4
B M S card
J4
J3
GND
U3
U2
U1
G0
G
J2
J13
J25 BMS2
pR300
FieldBus card
J24
NO4
C1
J12
J11 pLAN
J10
1
J26 FBus2
pR300
J1
NO3
J15
NO2
C8
C7
C7
4
NC8
C4
J14
J13
J25 BMS2
NO8
C4
NO7
C1
NO6
NO5
C1
NO4
NO3
NO2
NO1
J12
J11 pLAN
J10
+5 VREF
pLAN
Board with
pLAN address 1
Board
with
pLAN
address
3
+Vterm
I/O
GND
I/O
I/O
pLAN
NO1
I/O
Y2
2 suction lines (scroll or piston compressors), 2 condenser lines on the
same board:
Y1
f.
Board with pLAN address 4
pR300
4
3
2
3
2
C8
NC8
C7
NO8
NO7
C7
C4
NO6
NO5
NO4
C4
C1
4
FieldBus card
1
J26 FBus2
B M S card
J4
J5
Fig. A.f
IDC1
ID8
ID7
ID6
ID5
ID4
ID3
Y4
Y3
ID2
ID1
Y2
Y1
VG
VG0
Board with pLAN
GND
U5
U4
+VDC
J3
GND
U3
U2
U1
G0
G
J2
+5 VREF
J24
GND
+Vterm
IDC1
ID8
ID7
J1
ID6
ID5
ID4
ID3
Y4
ID2
ID1
Y3
Y1
VG0
VG
GND
J5
GND
B M S card
U5
GND
U4
+VDC
J15
J14
J13
J25 BMS2
J4
J3
GND
U3
U2
U1
G0
G
+5 VREF
+Vterm
GND
J2
NO3
J12
J11 pLAN
J10
pR300
FieldBus card
J24
NO2
J15
1
J26 FBus2
pR300
J1
NO1
C1
NC8
C8
C7
J14
J13
J10
J25 BMS2
NO8
C7
NO7
C4
NO6
NO5
C4
J12
J11 pLAN
NO4
C1
NO3
NO2
C1
Board
with
pLAN
address 1
I/O
Y2
I/O
NO1
pLAN
address 2
g. 2 suction lines on the same board (scroll or piston compressors), 2
I/O
I/O
condenser lines on separate boards:
Fig. A.i
I/O
I/O
j.
2 suction lines on separate boards (scroll or piston compressors), 2
condenser lines (line 1 on separate board, line 2 on common board
with suction)
Board with
pLAN address 3
pR300
J13
4
3
2
C8
NC8
NO8
J14
J10
J25 BMS2
C7
NO7
C7
C4
C4
C1
NO6
NO5
NO4
C1
NO3
J12
J11 pLAN
J15
Board with
pLAN
address 3
1
J26 FBus2
pR300
B M S card
IDC1
J13
4
3
2
J25 BMS2
3
2
NC8
C8
C7
J14
4
J26 FBus2
NO8
C7
J13
J10
1
NO7
C4
NO6
NO5
C4
C1
J12
J11 pLAN
NO4
J15
NO3
C1
C8
I/O
NC8
NO8
J14
J10
J25 BMS2
C7
NO7
C7
C4
C4
NO6
NO5
C1
J12
J11 pLAN
NO4
NO3
NO2
I/O
C1
I/O
NO1
pLAN
NO2
ID8
ID7
ID6
ID5
ID4
ID3
Y4
Y3
Y2
Y1
VG0
ID2
VG
GND
U5
GND
U4
+VDC
J5
ID1
J4
J3
GND
U3
U2
J2
U1
GND
G0
G
+Vterm
pR300
J24
+5 VREF
FieldBus card
J1
NO1
Board with
pLAN address 1
NO2
pLAN
NO1
I/O
J15
1
J26 FBus2
pLAN
pR300
pR300
h. 2 suction lines on separate boards (scroll or piston compressors), 2
B M S card
IDC1
ID8
ID7
ID6
ID5
ID4
Y4
ID3
ID2
Board with
pLAN address 2
ID1
J5
Y3
VG0
VG
GND
U5
GND
U4
+VDC
Y1
J4
J3
GND
U3
U2
J2
U1
G0
+5 VREF
+Vterm
G
Board with
pLAN address 1
J24
GND
IDC1
ID8
ID7
J1
ID6
ID5
ID4
ID3
Y4
Y3
Y2
Y1
VG0
ID2
ID1
VG
GND
U5
GND
U4
+VDC
FieldBus card
J5
Y2
B M S card
J4
J3
GND
U3
U2
J2
U1
+5 VREF
J24
GND
G0
G
J1
+Vterm
FieldBus card
Fig. A.g
condenser lines (one for each suction line board)
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
Board with
pLAN address 1
Fig. A.j
3
2
C8
C7
C7
2
NC8
NO8
NO7
C4
C1
NO6
NO5
C1
C4
3
J15
1
J26 FBus2
B M S card
IDC1
ID8
ID7
ID6
ID5
ID4
Y4
ID3
ID2
ID1
Y3
J5
Y2
VG0
VG
GND
U5
GND
U4
+VDC
Y1
J4
J3
GND
U3
U2
J2
U1
G0
G
+5 VREF
+Vterm
J24
GND
IDC1
ID8
ID7
J1
ID6
ID5
ID4
Y4
ID3
ID2
ID1
Y3
Board with pLAN
address 2
FieldBus card
J5
Y2
Y1
VG0
VG
GND
U5
GND
U4
+VDC
NO4
4
B M S card
J4
J3
GND
U3
U2
G0
U1
G
+5 VREF
GND
+Vterm
J2
J14
J13
J25 BMS2
pR300
FieldBus card
J24
NO3
J12
J11 pLAN
J10
1
J26 FBus2
pR300
J1
NO2
J15
NO1
C8
C7
C7
4
NC8
C4
J14
J13
J10
J25 BMS2
NO8
C4
NO7
C1
NO6
NO5
C1
J12
J11 pLAN
NO4
NO3
NO2
NO1
pLAN
I/O
I/O
Fig. A.h
87
pRack +0300025EN rel. 1.3 - 17.12.2015
ENG
Legenda:
A.2 Special conﬁgurations for subcritical CO2
systems, cascade and pumped systems
ac. Description
Text Outside temperature
PDL1 Discharge pressure line 1
(medium temperature)
TDL1 Discharge temperature line 1
(medium temperature)
PSL1 Suction pressure line 1
(medium temperature)
TSL1 Suction temperature line 1
(medium temperature)
PE Heat exchanger evaporation
pressure
TGS Heat exchanger superheated
gas temperature
PDL2 Discharge pressure line 2
(low temperature)
TDL2 Discharge temperature line 2
(low temperature)
PSL2 Suction pressure line 2 (low
temperature)
TSL2 Suction temperature line 2
(low temperature)
A.2.1 Cascade
The crucial aspect of this type of system is the cascade heat exchanger,
normally a plate heat exchanger, which controls the condensing stage of
the CO2 system. At times there are two heat exchangers, so as to improve
control at low loads and increase safety, and these are normally controlled
by EXV electronic expansion valves with stepper motors. In these
applications, as well as traditional control based on suction superheat,
there is also integration with the low temperature rack, directly when
the rack controller has a built-in driver, or via serial communication for
external EVD EVO drivers. Given the nature of the refrigerant, condensed
liquid CO2 needs to be monitored in order to ensure good performance
and protection. Up to 2 heat exchangers can be connected via Fieldbus
to the pRack controller, with a driver for each heat exchanger. The drivers
are connected to the board that manages the low temperature suction
line. Up to 6 control steps can be conﬁgured for connecting other drivers
controlled via digital input for superheat control. There can be maximum
two plate heat exchangers used to condense CO2, and the expansion valve
is managed using the built-in driver on pRack pR300 or external EVD EVO
driver suitably integrated into the system (Fieldbus communication over
RS485).
Probe type
Notes
NTC - HP
4-20 mA 0-18.2 barg
NTC - HF
4-20 mA 0-7 barg
NTC - HF
To control discharge
temperature (opt.)
Can be used as backup
for PE
To control suction
superheat (opt.)
Ratiometric -1-9.3
barg
NTC – HF
4-20 mA 0-44.8 barg
NTC – HF
To control discharge
temperature (opt.)
4-20 mA 0-44.8 barg
NTC - HF
To control suction
superheat (opt.)
Tab. 11.b
The exchange of information between compressor rack and heat
exchanger allows traditional superheat control to be augmented by
factors that are vital for this type of system, such as variation in low
temperature compressor rack cooling capacity and the trend in CO2
condensing pressure. (pRack only sends the control parameters and the
cooling capacity to vary). The drivers connected via serial have advantages
over external conﬁgurations (via digital inputs) as the parameters are
easier to set (the driver screens can be accessed directly from the pRack
controller) and are more responsive when unit cooling capacity changes
considerably due to due peaks in demand. The drivers connected via
serial can use an estimated percentage of cooling capacity delivered by
the circuit to inﬂuence normal superheat control.
When the variation in capacity exceeds 10% or when control commences,
the driver pre-positions the valve to get closer to the optimum opening.
This operation ensures good control of condensing pressure on the low
temperature rack (S3 or A, conﬁgurable) when compressor on line 2
start. If the compressors on the low temperature rack are controlled by
inverter, capacity modulation will be much more linear and anticipation
of valve movements will have less inﬂuence (in terms of pre-positioning).
If using one or more single drivers, the condensing pressure probe can be
connected directly to the EVD EVO driver (S3), allowing just one pressure
probe to be used for condenser control and for the EVD EVO driver safety
procedure, which tends to open the valve when the CO2 condensing
temperature is too high. In this case, the CO2 condensing pressure probe
connected to pRack is optional.
This function can be used with the following conﬁgurations:
• pRack pR300 with built-in driver and just one heat exchanger
• pRack pR300 with single external EVD EVO driver
• pRack pR300 with 2 single external EVD EVO drivers
• pRack pR300 with 2 EVD EVO drivers, one of which built-in (only 1
exchanger) and 1 single external.
Fig. A.k
Note: if serial communication between driver and pRack is interrupted,
the condensing pressure probe on the pRack, connected to the driver, will be
disconnected and the safety procedures featured on pRack will be activated
(alarm signal, use of the backup probe if conﬁgured, fan operation overridden
to a preset value). One DRIVER is needed for each valve; if a Twin Driver is used,
this will be managed as a single driver. The connection should be done on the
ﬁrst valve too (EXV1- J27 if a built-in driver is used).
Details of the pRack conﬁguration Wizard
Fig. A.l
pRack +0300025EN rel. 1.3 - 17.12.2015
After having selected this type of conﬁguration, the software takes a few
seconds to pre-conﬁgure some settings relating to a typical cascade
system, i.e. the second condenser line; the Wizard will prompt whether to
88
ENG
• Cascade, 2 suction lines, 2 condenser lines (built-in driver for managing
control the CO2 condenser using the fans or the new EVS system:
the heat exchanger on the second line), double board;
EEV
EVD
evolution
FBUS
4
J25 BMS2
3
2
2
C8
C7
C7
C4
3
NC8
NO8
NO7
C4
C1
NO6
NO5
NO4
C1
Board with
pLAN address 1
I/O
1
J26 FBus2
B M S card
Board
with
pLAN
address 2
IDC1
ID8
ID7
ID6
ID5
ID4
ID3
ID2
Y4
ID1
Y3
J5
Y2
VG0
VG
GND
U5
GND
U4
+VDC
Y1
J4
J3
GND
U3
U2
G0
J2
U1
G
+5 VREF
J24
GND
IDC1
ID8
ID7
ID6
ID5
ID4
ID3
ID2
ID1
Y4
Y3
J1
+Vterm
FieldBus card
J5
Y2
Y1
VG0
VG
GND
U5
GND
U4
+VDC
J15
J14
4
B M S card
J4
J3
GND
U3
U2
G0
G
+5 VREF
GND
U1
+Vterm
J2
J13
J25 BMS2
pR300
FieldBus card
J24
NO3
J12
J11 pLAN
J10
pLAN
pR300
J1
NO2
J15
1
J26 FBus2
NO1
C8
C7
C7
J14
J13
J10
NC8
C4
NO8
C4
C1
NO7
NO6
C1
J12
J11 pLAN
NO5
NO4
NO3
NO2
NO1
S1
S2
S3
I/O
I/O
Fig. A.o
Note: carefully check the pressure control settings; for general
uniformity of the software, automatic set point selection is not featured
for the diﬀerent types of control and diﬀerent types of refrigerant. For
example, the suggested default set point for the low temperature
compressors is 3.5 bars; in a cascade system (subcritical CO2) with R744
natural refrigerant, the reference pressure values are around 11 bars.
Together with the set point, the probe limits and probe alarm thresholds
will be correctly conﬁgured.
• Cascade, 2 suction lines, 2 condenser lines (built-in driver for managing
the heat exchanger on the second line), double board;
EEV
2
C8
NC8
C7
C7
NO8
NO7
NO6
C4
3
J15
1
J26 FBus2
pLAN
pR300
pR300
B M S card
I/O
EEV
S1
S2
S3
IDC1
ID8
ID7
ID6
ID5
ID4
ID3
ID2
Y4
Y3
ID1
J5
Y2
VG0
VG
GND
U5
GND
U4
+VDC
Y1
J4
J3
GND
U3
U2
J2
U1
G0
G
+5 VREF
+Vterm
J24
GND
J1
I/O
J14
4
J25 BMS2
FieldBus card
EVD
evolution
NO4
J13
J10
the heat exchanger on the second line), single board;
FBUS
C4
C1
NO3
C1
NO2
NO1
J12
J11 pLAN
• Cascade, 2 suction lines, 2 condenser lines (external driver for managing
NO5
I/O
Board with
pLAN address 1
Board with
pLAN
address 2
I/O
Fig. A.p
A2.2 Pumped
pR300
Less used than traditional cascade subcritical systems, this solution
limits the use of HFC refrigerants to the equipment rooms. The medium
temperature units are supplied with pumped liquid CO2, while the low
temperature units are ﬁtted with expansion valves. The CO2 is cooled
by a dedicated chiller (NH3 or r134a) inside a tank, normally with a tube
bundle evaporator. In addition to traditional systems, these also include
management of the pumps that deliver the liquid CO2 to the medium
temperature evaporators, where it does not expand but rather is only
superheated and returns to the receiver in a semi-liquid state.
Board with
pLAN address 1
I/O
I/O
Fig. A.m
• Cascade, 2 suction lines, 2 condenser lines (built-in driver for managing
the heat exchanger on the second line), single board;
I/O
EEV
pR300
Board with
pLAN address 1
I/O
I/O
Fig. A.n
Fig. A.q
89
pRack +0300025EN rel. 1.3 - 17.12.2015
ENG
In this type of system, it is important to coordinate operation of the
medium temperature rack with tube bundle evaporator control, to
prevent low pressure problems. Pressure control inside the receiver is the
main task; given the quantity of refrigerant contained and consequently
its signiﬁcant inertia, it is essential to activate the compressors based on
the receiver pressure, and medium temperature rack suction pressure will
only be monitored for safety, to prevent low pressure problems.
Medium temperature circuit control
Medium temperature circuit control uses a pressure sensor installed on
the low temperature receiver; in order to exploit this sensor, pRack needs
to use an auxiliary control function available under COMPRESSORSoLINE
1oCONTROL, in screen Cab20
Fig. 11.t
This screen is used to enable the function, set the required type of control
and the refrigerant in the auxiliary circuit.
An “auxiliary” control probe needs to be conﬁgured under INPUTS/
OUTPUTSoSTATUSoANALOG INPUTS in a free position on the controller.
The high and low auxiliary pressure/temperature probe alarms need to
be set under COMPRESSORSoLINE 1oALARMS, checking the control
parameters.
Fig. A.r
pRack pR300 L1 connections
ac. Description
Text Outside temperature
PDL1 Condensing pressure line 1
(medium temperature)
TDL1 Discharge temperature line 1
(medium temperature)
PSL1 Suction pressure line 1 (medium temperature)
TSL1 Suction temperature line 1
(medium temperature)
PREC CO2 receiver pressure
Probe type
Notes
NTC - HP
4-20 mA 0-18.2barg
NTC - HF
To control discharge
temperature
To control low pressure
alarm
To control suction
superheat
To control medium
temperature compressors
4-20 mA 0-10barg
NTC - HF
4-20 mA 0-10barg
EVD EVO and EXV drivers
Management of the tube bundle evaporator is critical in these types
of applications, and the size of the evaporator, inertia of the load and
proximity to the compressors require very ﬁne control, which needs to
adapt rapidly when the compressors are started or stopped, respond
gradually to changes of load, not ﬂood the compressors, and protect
against low suction pressure alarms.
Functions on the EVD EVO driver, such as low superheat, low suction
temperature, low suction pressure and high CO2 condensing pressure
protection, therefore need to be correctly calibrated based on system
features (number and type of compressors, size of the evaporator and the
receiver, whether there are receivers on the suction line, system dynamics).
All these settings are found under OTHER FUNCTIONSoEVS on the board
that manages suction line 1.
Tab. 11.b
pRack pR300T L2 connections
ac. Description
TDL2 Discharge temperature line 2
(low temperature)
PSL2 Suction pressure line 2 (low
temperature)
TSL2 Suction temperature line 2
(low temperature)
Probe type
NTC – HF
Notes
To control discharge
temperature (opt.)
4-20 mA 0-44.8barg
NTC - HF
To control suction
superheat
Tab. 11.c
EVD EVO connections
ac.
PREC
PE
Description
Discharge pressure line 2 (low temperature)
Heat exchanger evaporation pressure
Probe type
4-20 mA 0-44.8barg
Ratiometric -1-9.3barg
TGS
Heat exchanger superheated gas temperature
NTC – HF
Note: One DRIVER is needed for each valve; if a Twin Driver is used, this
will be managed as a single driver. The connection should be done on the ﬁrst
valve too (EXV1- J27 if a built-in driver is used).
• Pumped, 2 suction lines (external driver for managing the heat
Tab. 11.d
exchanger on the ﬁrst line), 1 condenser line, single board;
Dettagli Wizard della conﬁgurazione pRack
I/O
Fig. A.s
pRack +0300025EN rel. 1.3 - 17.12.2015
90
EEV
Board with
pLAN address 1
pR300
I/O
EVD
evolution
S1
S2
S3
I/O
FBUS
ENG
• Pumped, 2 suction lines (built-in driver for managing the heat
A.3 System conﬁgurations with more than
one pLAN board
exchanger on the ﬁrst line), 1 condenser line, single board;
If the system conﬁguration involves the connection of more than one
board in a pLAN, the addresses must be set correct before select a
solution of conﬁguration.
I/O
EEV
For the addresses to be assigned to the pRack pR300 boards see Appendix
A.1.
pRack pR300 can use two user terminals (as well as a built-in terminal)
with addresses 31 and 32. The default user terminal address is 32, so only
if a second terminal is required must the address of this be set to 31,
as described below. The address of the terminal is also required when
having to set the address of the pRack pR300 boards, when multiple
boards are connected to the pLAN.
Board with
pLAN address 1
pR300
I/O
I/O
After having correctly connected and conﬁgured the pLAN network
of pRack pR300 boards, the system can be conﬁgured as described in
paragraph 4.1.
Fig. A.t
A.3.1 Setting the address of the terminal
• Pumped, 2 suction lines (external driver for managing the heat exchanger
on the ﬁrst line), 1 condenser line, double board
EEV
EVD
evolution
FBUS
3
2
3
2
C8
C7
C7
J14
4
J25 BMS2
NC8
C4
J13
J10
J26 FBus2
NO8
NO7
C4
C1
NO6
NO5
C1
J12
J11 pLAN
NO4
NO3
NO2
J15
1
NO1
C8
C7
C7
4
NC8
C4
J14
J13
J10
J25 BMS2
NO8
C4
NO7
C1
NO6
NO5
C1
J12
J11 pLAN
NO4
NO3
NO2
Board
with
pLAN
address 1
NO1
S1
S2
S3
I/O
The pRack pR300 user terminal is supplied with the default address 32,
allowing the terminal to be used without requiring any additional operations;
nonetheless, in order to use an additional terminal or conﬁgure the pLAN
address of the boards, it needs to be changed according to the following
procedure:
1. power the terminal via the special telephone connector;
2. press the 3 buttons, ,
and
together for at least 5 seconds;
the terminal will display a screen similar to the one below, with the
cursor ﬂashing in the top left corner:
J15
1
J26 FBus2
pLAN
pR300
pR300
I/O
Board with
pLAN address 2
IDC1
ID8
ID7
ID6
ID5
ID4
ID3
ID2
ID1
Y4
J5
Y3
Y1
VG0
VG
GND
U5
GND
U4
+VDC
GND
Display address
setting.........:32
B M S card
J4
J3
U3
U2
U1
G0
G
J2
+5 VREF
+Vterm
J24
GND
IDC1
ID8
ID7
J1
ID6
ID5
ID4
Y4
ID3
ID2
ID1
Y3
J5
Y2
Y1
VG0
VG
GND
U5
GND
U4
+VDC
FieldBus card
J4
Y2
B M S card
J3
GND
U3
U2
G0
J2
U1
G
+5 VREF
J24
GND
J1
+Vterm
FieldBus card
I/O Board address:01
I/O
Fig. A.u
3. press
once: the cursor will move to the “Display address setting”
ﬁeld;
• Pumped, 2 suction lines (built-in driver for managing the heat
exchanger on the ﬁrst line), 1 condenser line, double board
4. select the desired value using
and
, and conﬁrm by pressing
again; if the value selected is diﬀerent from the value saved, the
following screen will be displayed and the new value will be saved to
the display’s permanent memory.
EEV
J25 BMS2
3
2
C8
Display address
changed
NC8
NO8
J14
4
pLAN
C7
C7
C4
J13
J10
pR300
NO7
NO6
NO5
C4
J12
J11 pLAN
NO4
C1
NO3
NO2
NO1
I/O
C1
J15
1
J26 FBus2
pR300
B M S card
IDC1
ID8
ID7
ID6
ID5
ID4
ID2
Y4
ID1
Y3
J5
Y2
VG0
VG
GND
U5
GND
U4
+VDC
Y1
J4
J3
GND
U3
U2
G0
Board with
pLAN address 2
J2
U1
+5 VREF
J24
GND
G
I/O
+Vterm
FieldBus card
J1
ID3
Board with
pLAN address 1
I/O
Note: if the address ﬁeld is set to 0, the “I/O Board address” ﬁeld is no
longer displayed, as it has no meaning..
Important
Fig. A.v
• if the settings are not made correctly, the text and the images on the
Note: don't conﬁgure the second condensing line.
display will be displayed incorrectly and out of order.
• if during this operation the terminal detects inactivity of the pRack
board whose output is being displayed, the display is cleared and a
message similar to the one below is shown.
Display address
changed
91
pRack +0300025EN rel. 1.3 - 17.12.2015
ENG
The preliminary operations to be completed before conﬁguration are as
follows:
1. with the boards not connected in the pLAN, power up the second
pRack board and set the pLAN address to 2 (for details see Appendix
A.2)
2. power down and connect the two boards in the pLAN, plus any
terminals, as described in paragraph 3.7
3. power up the boards and wait for the Wizard selection screen to be
displayed
If the terminal detects inactivity of the entire pLAN network, that is, it does
not receive any messages from the network for 10 seconds consecutively,
it clears the display and shows the following message:
NO LINK
Then select the type of system as SUCTION &amp; CONDENSER:
A.3.2
Wizard
Setting the address of the pRack pR300 board
The pLAN address of the pRack boards can be set from any pGD1 terminal,
using the following procedure:
1. set address 0 on the terminal (see the previous paragraph for details
on how to set this address);
2. power down the pRack pR300 board;
3. disconnect any pLAN connections to other boards from the pRack
pR300 board;
4. connect the terminal to the pRack pR300 board;
Ib01
Type of Installation:
SUCTION &amp; CONDENSER
Set the type of compressors and control for suction line 1, answering the
questions prompted by the pRack pR300 software, e.g.:
Wizard
Ib03
Compressor config.
5. power up the pRack pR300 board, while pressing the
and
buttons on the terminal together. After a few seconds the pRack
pR300 board begins the start-up sequence and the display shows a
screen similar to the one below:
Compressor type:
RECIPROCATING
####################
selftest
please wait
####################
Compressor number:
Wizard
Ib40
Compressor config.
Regulation by:
PRESSURE
Measure unit:
barg
6. when this screen is displayed, wait 10 seconds and then release the
buttons;
7. the pRack pR300 board interrupts the start-up sequence and shows
a conﬁguration screen, similar to the one below:
Refrigerant:
pLAN address: 0
UP: increase
DOWN: decrease
ENTER: save &amp; exit
R404A
Wizard
Ib41
Compressor config.
Regulation type:
PROPORTIONAL BAND
Then set the pLAN address using the and buttons on the terminal.
8. Conﬁrm the address by pressing
: the pRack pR300 board
completes the start-up sequence and uses the set address.
Enable integral time
action:
YES
A3.3 Example of conﬁguring a system with 2 suction
and condenser lines using the Wizard
After having conﬁgured suction line 1, a prompt will be shown to
conﬁgure another suction line, obviously the answer is YES:
Below is a possible example of using the Wizard to conﬁgure a typical
system like the one shown in the ﬁgure, with 2 suction lines and 2
condenser lines on diﬀerent boards:
Wizard
Ib43
Compressor config.
Configure another
suction line:
3
2
C8
C7
C7
2
To the next question, which prompts if there is a pRack board dedicated
to the second line, answer YES; in this way, the pRack pR300 software
prepares to conﬁgure the board with address 2 in the pLAN:
NC8
NO8
C4
NO7
C1
NO6
NO5
C1
NO4
NO3
C4
3
J15
1
J26 FBus2
IDC1
ID8
ID7
ID6
ID5
ID4
ID3
Y4
ID2
ID1
Y3
J5
Y2
Y1
VG0
VG
GND
U5
GND
U4
+VDC
Wizard
Ib45
Compressor config.
B M S card
J4
J3
GND
U3
U2
J2
U1
G0
G
+5 VREF
+Vterm
IDC1
ID8
ID7
ID6
ID5
ID4
Y4
ID3
ID2
ID1
Y3
I/O
J24
GND
J1
J5
Y2
Y1
VG0
VG
GND
U5
GND
U4
+VDC
FieldBus card
B M S card
J4
J3
GND
U3
U2
G0
U1
G
+5 VREF
GND
+Vterm
J2
J14
4
J25 BMS2
pR300
FieldBus card
J24
J13
J10
pR300
J1
NO2
J12
J11 pLAN
pLAN
1
NO1
C8
C7
C7
C4
4
J26 FBus2
YES
I/O
NC8
J15
J14
J13
J10
J25 BMS2
NO8
NO7
C4
C1
NO6
NO5
C1
J12
J11 pLAN
NO4
NO3
NO2
NO1
I/O
3
I/O
Dedicated pRack
board for
suction line:
Fig. A.w
pRack +0300025EN rel. 1.3 - 17.12.2015
92
YES
ENG
After having answered the questions for the conﬁguration of the second
suction line, the software then asks if there is a pLAN board dedicated to
condenser line 1. In the case shown in the example, answer NO.
Wizard
Ib90
Compressor config.
Dedicated pRack
board for
condensing line:
NO
After having conﬁgured condenser line 1, the software asks if condenser
line 2 is used; answer YES:
Wizard
Ib96
Configure another
condensing line:
YES
After having conﬁgured the second condenser line, the software oﬀers the
option to automatically conﬁgure the I/Os (choosing YES), as described
in par. 4.1.4. If choosing NO, each individual I/O needs to be conﬁgured
manually at the end of the wizard. In addition, the software asks the user
whether or not to display a summary of the settings made:
Wizard
Ib2a
Enable I/O config: YES
Visualize Wizard
report?
NO
(Push [DOWN]
to continue)
If the settings are correct, the set values can be installed:
Wizard
Ib3a
Boards necessary
1
2
All boards present,
(ENTER) to continue
After waiting a few seconds, the unit can be started.
Wizard
Successfully complete
Press (ENTER) to
continue
Note: after having conﬁgured pRack pR300, the device needs to be
switched oﬀ and on again to permanently save the new data.
93
pRack +0300025EN rel. 1.3 - 17.12.2015
ENG
A.4 Alarm table
Code
ALA01
ALA02
ALA03
ALA04
ALA05
ALA06
ALA07
ALA08
ALA09
ALA10
ALA11
ALA12
ALA13
ALA14
ALA15
ALA16
ALA17
ALA18
ALA19
ALA20
ALA21
ALA22
ALA23
ALA24
ALA25
ALA26
ALA27
ALA28
ALA29
ALA30
ALA31
ALA32
ALA33
ALA34
ALA35
ALA36
ALA39
ALA40
ALA41
ALA42
ALB01
ALB02
ALB03
ALB04
ALB05
ALB06
ALB07
ALB08
ALB09
ALB10
ALB11
Description
Discharge temperature probe malfunction
Condensing pressure probe malfunction
Outside temperature probe malfunction
Generic probe malfunction A, PLB1
Generic probe malfunction B, PLB1
Generic probe malfunction C, PLB1
Generic probe malfunction D, PLB1
Generic probe malfunction E, PLB1
Generic probe malfunction A, PLB2
Generic probe malfunction B, PLB2
Generic probe malfunction C, PLB2
Generic probe malfunction D, PLB2
Generic probe malfunction E, PLB2
Generic probe malfunction A, PLB3
Generic probe malfunction B, PLB3
Generic probe malfunction C, PLB3
Generic probe malfunction D, PLB3
Generic probe malfunction E, PLB3
Generic probe malfunction A, PLB4
Generic probe malfunction B, PLB4
Generic probe malfunction C, PLB4
Generic probe malfunction D, PLB4
Generic probe malfunction E, PLB4
Suction pressure probe malfunction
Suction temperature probe malfunction
Room temperature probe malfunction
Condensing pressure probe malfunction, line 2
Discharge temperature probe malfunction, line 2
Suction pressure probe malfunction, line 2
Suction temperature probe malfunction, line 2
Condensing pressure backup probe malfunction
Condensing pressure backup probe malfunction, line 2
Suction pressure backup probe malfunction
Suction pressure backup probe malfunction, line 2
Common oil temperature probe malfunction
Common oil temperature probe malfunction, line 2
Discharge temperature probe malfunction, compressors 1 to 6
Discharge temperature probe malfunction, compressors 1 to 6, line 2
Oil temperature probe malfunction compressors 1 to 6, line 1
Oil temperature probe malfunction compressor 1, line 2
Low suction pressure from pressure switch
High condensing pressure from pressure switch
Low condensing pressure from probe
High condensing pressure from probe
Liquid level
Common oil diﬀerential
Common fan circuit breaker
Low suction pressure from pressure switch, line 2
High condensing pressure from pressure switch, line 2
Low condensing pressure from probe, line 2
High condensing pressure from probe, line 2
Reset
Automatic
Automatic
Automatic
Automatic
Automatic
Automatic
Automatic
Automatic
Automatic
Automatic
Automatic
Automatic
Automatic
Automatic
Automatic
Automatic
Automatic
Automatic
Automatic
Automatic
Automatic
Automatic
Automatic
Automatic
Automatic
Automatic
Automatic
Automatic
Automatic
Automatic
Automatic
Automatic
Automatic
Automatic
Automatic
Automatic
Automatic
Automatic
Automatic
Automatic
Semiautomatic
Manual/automatic
Automatic
Automatic
Automatic
Automatic
Automatic
Semiautomatic
Manual/automatic
Automatic
Automatic
Delay
60s
60s
60s
60s
60s
60s
60s
60s
60s
60s
60s
60s
60s
60s
60s
60s
60s
60s
60s
60s
60s
60s
60s
60s
60s
60s
60s
60s
60s
60s
60s
60s
60s
60s
60s
60s
60s
60s
60s
60s
Settable
Settable
Settable
Settable
Settable
Settable
Settable
Settable
Settable
Settable
Settable
Alarm relay
R2
R1
R2
R2
R2
R2
R2
R2
R2
R2
R2
R2
R2
R2
R2
R2
R2
R2
R2
R2
R2
R2
R2
R1
R2
R2
R1
R2
R1
R2
R2
R2
R2
R2
R2
R2
R2
R2
R2
R2
R1
R1
R1
R1
R2
R2
Settable
R1
R1
R1
R1
ALB12
ALB13
ALB14
ALB15
ALB16
ALB17
ALB18
ALB21
ALB22
ALC01
ALC02
ALC03
ALC04
ALC05
ALC06
ALC07
ALC08
ALC09
ALC10
ALC11
ALC12
ALC13
ALC14
ALC15
ALC16
ALC17
ALC18
ALC19
ALC20
ALC21
ALC22
ALC23
ALC24
ALC25
ALC26
ALC27
ALC28
ALC29
Liquid level, line 2
Common oil diﬀerential, line 2
Common fan circuit breaker, line 2
High suction pressure from probe
Low suction pressure from probe
High suction pressure from probe, line 2
Low suction pressure from probe, line 2
Shutdown to prevent high pressure
Shutdown to prevent high pressure, line 2
Alarm 1, compressor 1
Alarm 2, compressor 1
Alarm 3, compressor 1
Alarm 4, compressor 1
Alarm 5, compressor 1
Alarm 6, compressor 1
Alarm 7, compressor 1
Alarm 1, compressor 2
Alarm 2, compressor 2
Alarm 3, compressor 2
Alarm 4, compressor 2
Alarm 5, compressor 2
Alarm 6, compressor 2
Alarm 7, compressor 2
Alarm 1, compressor 3
Alarm 2, compressor 3
Alarm 3, compressor 3
Alarm 4, compressor 3
Alarm 5, compressor 3
Alarm 6, compressor 3
Alarm 7, compressor 3
Alarm 1, compressor 4
Alarm 2, compressor 4
Alarm 3, compressor 4
Alarm 4, compressor 4
Alarm 5, compressor 4
Alarm 6, compressor 4
Alarm 7, compressor 4
Alarm 1, compressor 5
Automatic
Automatic
Automatic
Automatic
Automatic
Automatic
Automatic
Manual
Manual
Manual/automatic
Manual/automatic
Manual/automatic
Manual/automatic
Manual/automatic
Manual/automatic
Manual/automatic
Manual/automatic
Manual/automatic
Manual/automatic
Manual/automatic
Manual/automatic
Manual/automatic
Manual/automatic
Manual/automatic
Manual/automatic
Manual/automatic
Manual/automatic
Manual/automatic
Manual/automatic
Manual/automatic
Manual/automatic
Manual/automatic
Manual/automatic
Manual/automatic
Manual/automatic
Manual/automatic
Manual/automatic
Manual/automatic
Settable
Settable
Settable
Settable
Settable
Settable
Settable
Settable
Settable
Settable
Settable
Settable
Settable
Settable
Settable
Settable
Settable
Settable
Settable
Settable
Settable
Settable
Settable
Settable
Settable
Settable
Settable
Settable
Settable
Settable
Settable
Settable
Settable
Settable
Settable
Settable
Settable
Settable
R2
R2
Settable
R1
R1
R1
R1
R1
R1
Settable
Settable
Settable
Settable
Settable
Settable
Settable
Settable
Settable
Settable
Settable
Settable
Settable
Settable
Settable
Settable
Settable
Settable
Settable
Settable
Settable
Settable
Settable
Settable
Settable
Settable
Settable
Settable
Settable
pRack +0300025EN rel. 1.3 - 17.12.2015
94
Action
Related functions disabled
Related functions disabled
Related functions disabled
Related functions disabled
Related functions disabled
Related functions disabled
Related functions disabled
Related functions disabled
Related functions disabled
Related functions disabled
Related functions disabled
Related functions disabled
Related functions disabled
Related functions disabled
Related functions disabled
Related functions disabled
Related functions disabled
Related functions disabled
Related functions disabled
Related functions disabled
Related functions disabled
Related functions disabled
Related functions disabled
Related functions disabled
Related functions disabled
Related functions disabled
Related functions disabled
Related functions disabled
Related functions disabled
Related functions disabled
Related functions disabled
Related functions disabled
Related functions disabled
Related functions disabled
Related functions disabled
Related functions disabled
Related functions disabled
Related functions disabled
Related functions disabled
Related functions disabled
Shutdown compressor
Shutdown compressor
Force fans to 0%
Force fans to 100% and compressor stop
Shutdown compressors, line 2
Shutdown compressors, line 2
Force fans to 0%, line 2
Force fans to 100% and stop compressor, line 2
Shutdown compressor
Shutdown compressors, line 2
Shutdown compressor 1
Shutdown compressor 1
Shutdown compressor 1
Shutdown compressor 1
Shutdown compressor 1
Shutdown compressor 1
Shutdown compressor 1
Shutdown compressor 2
Shutdown compressor 2
Shutdown compressor 2
Shutdown compressor 2
Shutdown compressor 2
Shutdown compressor 2
Shutdown compressor 2
Shutdown compressor 3
Shutdown compressor 3
Shutdown compressor 3
Shutdown compressor 3
Shutdown compressor 3
Shutdown compressor 3
Shutdown compressor 3
Shutdown compressor 4
Shutdown compressor 4
Shutdown compressor 4
Shutdown compressor 4
Shutdown compressor 4
Shutdown compressor 4
Shutdown compressor 5
Shutdown compressor 5
ENG
Code
ALC30
ALC31
ALC32
ALC33
ALC34
ALC35
ALC36
ALC37
ALC38
ALC39
ALC40
ALC41
ALC42
ALC43
ALC44
ALC45
ALC46
ALC47
ALC48
ALC49
ALC50
ALC51
ALC52
ALC53
ALC54
ALC55
ALC56
ALC57
ALC58
ALC59
ALC60
ALC61
ALC62
ALC63
ALC64
ALC65
ALC66
ALC67
ALC68
ALC69
ALC70
ALC71
ALC72
ALC73
ALC74
ALC75
ALC76
ALC77
ALC78
ALC79
ALC80
ALC81
ALC82
ALC83
ALC84
ALC85
ALC86
ALC87
ALC88
ALC89
ALC90
ALC91
ALC92
ALC93
ALC94
ALC95
ALC96
ALC97
ALC98
ALC99
ALCaa
ALCab
ALCac
ALCad
ALCae
ALCaf
ALCag
ALCah
ALCai
ALCal
ALCam
AlCan
ALCao
AlCap
ALF01
ALF02
ALG01
ALG02
ALG11
ALG12
ALG13
ALG14
Description
Alarm 2, compressor 5
Alarm 3, compressor 5
Alarm 4, compressor 5
Alarm 6, compressor 5
Alarm 7, compressor 5
Alarm 7, compressor 5
Alarm 1, compressor 6
Alarm 2, compressor 6
Alarm 3, compressor 6
Alarm 4, compressor 6
Alarm 5, compressor 6
Alarm 6, compressor 6
Alarm 7, compressor 6
Alarm 1, compressor 7
Alarm 2, compressor 7
Alarm 1, compressor 8
Alarm 2, compressor 8
Alarm 1, compressor 9
Alarm 2, compressor 9
Alarm 1, compressor 10
Alarm 1, compressor 11
Alarm 1, compressor 12
Alarm 1, compressor 1, line 2
Alarm 2, compressor 1, line 2
Alarm 3, compressor 1, line 2
Alarm 4, compressor 1, line 2
Alarm 5, compressor 1, line 2
Alarm 6, compressor 1, line 2
Alarm 7, compressor 1, line 2
Alarm 1, compressor 2, line 2
Alarm 2, compressor 2, line 2
Alarm 3, compressor 2, line 2
Alarm 4, compressor 2, line 2
Alarm 5, compressor 2, line 2
Alarm 6, compressor 2, line 2
Alarm 7, compressor 2, line 2
Alarm 1, compressor 3, line 2
Alarm 2, compressor 3, line 2
Alarm 3, compressor 3, line 2
Alarm 4, compressor 3, line 2
Alarm 5, compressor 3, line 2
Alarm 6, compressor 3, line 2
Alarm 7, compressor 3, line 2
Alarm 1, compressor 4, line 2
Alarm 2, compressor 4, line 2
Alarm 3, compressor 4, line 2
Alarm 4, compressor 4, line 2
Alarm 5, compressor 4, line 2
Alarm 6, compressor 4, line 2
Alarm 7, compressor 4, line 2
Alarm 1, compressor 5, line 2
Alarm 2, compressor 5, line 2
Alarm 3, compressor 5, line 2
Alarm 4, compressor 5, line 2
Alarm 5, compressor 5, line 2
Alarm 6, compressor 5, line 2
Alarm 7, compressor 5, line 2
Alarm 1, compressor 6, line 2
Alarm 2, compressor 6, line 2
Alarm 3, compressor 6, line 2
Alarm 4, compressor 6, line 2
Alarm 5, compressor 6, line 2
Alarm 6, compressor 6, line 2
Alarm 7, compressor 6, line 2
Alarm 1, compressor 7, line 2
Alarm 2, compressor 7, line 2
Alarm 1, compressor 8, line 2
Alarm 2, compressor 8, line 2
Alarm 1, compressor 9, line 2
Alarm 2, compressor 9, line 2
Alarm 1, compressor 10, line 2
Alarm 1, compressor 11, line 2
Alarm 1, compressor 12, line 2
High oil sump temperature, Digital Scroll™
High discharge temperature, Digital Scroll™
High oil dilution, Digital Scroll™
High oil sump temperature, Digital Scroll™, line 2
High discharge temperature, Digital Scroll™, line 2
High oil dilution, Digital Scroll™, line 2
High discharge temperature compressors 1 to 6
High discharge temperature compressors 1 to 6, line 2
Compressor envelope
High compressor oil temperature, line 1
High compressor oil temperature, line 2
Fan circuit breaker
Fan circuit breaker, line 2
Clock error
Extended memory error
Generic high temperature alarms 1 to 5, PLB1
Generic high temperature alarms 1 to 5, PLB2
Generic high temperature alarms 1 to 5, PLB3
Generic high temperature alarms 1 to 5, PLB4
Reset
Manual/automatic
Manual/automatic
Manual/automatic
Manual/automatic
Manual/automatic
Manual/automatic
Manual/automatic
Manual/automatic
Manual/automatic
Manual/automatic
Manual/automatic
Manual/automatic
Manual/automatic
Manual/automatic
Manual/automatic
Manual/automatic
Manual/automatic
Manual/automatic
Manual/automatic
Manual/automatic
Manual/automatic
Manual/automatic
Manual/automatic
Manual/automatic
Manual/automatic
Manual/automatic
Manual/automatic
Manual/automatic
Manual/automatic
Manual/automatic
Manual/automatic
Manual/automatic
Manual/automatic
Manual/automatic
Manual/automatic
Manual/automatic
Manual/automatic
Manual/automatic
Manual/automatic
Manual/automatic
Manual/automatic
Manual/automatic
Manual/automatic
Manual/automatic
Manual/automatic
Manual/automatic
Manual/automatic
Manual/automatic
Manual/automatic
Manual/automatic
Manual/automatic
Manual/automatic
Manual/automatic
Manual/automatic
Manual/automatic
Manual/automatic
Manual/automatic
Manual/automatic
Manual/automatic
Manual/automatic
Manual/automatic
Manual/automatic
Manual/automatic
Manual/automatic
Manual/automatic
Manual/automatic
Manual/automatic
Manual/automatic
Manual/automatic
Manual/automatic
Manual/automatic
Manual/automatic
Manual/automatic
Manual/automatic
Manual/automatic
Manual/automatic
Manual/automatic
Manual/automatic
Manual/automatic
Automatic
Automatic
Manual
Automatic
Automatic
Manual/automatic
Manual/automatic
Automatic
Automatic
Manual/automatic
Manual/automatic
Manual/automatic
Manual/automatic
95
Delay
Settable
Settable
Settable
Settable
Settable
Settable
Settable
Settable
Settable
Settable
Settable
Settable
Settable
Settable
Settable
Settable
Settable
Settable
Settable
Settable
Settable
Settable
Settable
Settable
Settable
Settable
Settable
Settable
Settable
Settable
Settable
Settable
Settable
Settable
Settable
Settable
Settable
Settable
Settable
Settable
Settable
Settable
Settable
Settable
Settable
Settable
Settable
Settable
Settable
Settable
Settable
Settable
Settable
Settable
Settable
Settable
Settable
Settable
Settable
Settable
Settable
Settable
Settable
Settable
Settable
Settable
Settable
Settable
Settable
Settable
Settable
Settable
Settable
Settable
Settable
Settable
Settable
Settable
Settable
60s
60s
Settable
Settable
Settable
Settable
Settable
Settable
Settable
Settable
Settable
Alarm relay
Settable
Settable
Settable
Settable
Settable
Settable
Settable
Settable
Settable
Settable
Settable
Settable
Settable
Settable
Settable
Settable
Settable
Settable
Settable
Settable
Settable
Settable
Settable
Settable
Settable
Settable
Settable
Settable
Settable
Settable
Settable
Settable
Settable
Settable
Settable
Settable
Settable
Settable
Settable
Settable
Settable
Settable
Settable
Settable
Settable
Settable
Settable
Settable
Settable
Settable
Settable
Settable
Settable
Settable
Settable
Settable
Settable
Settable
Settable
Settable
Settable
Settable
Settable
Settable
Settable
Settable
Settable
Settable
Settable
Settable
Settable
Settable
Settable
R2
R2
R2
R2
R2
R2
R2
R2
R1
R2
R2
R2
R2
R2
R2
Settable
Settable
Settable
Settable
Action
Shutdown compressor 5
Shutdown compressor 5
Shutdown compressor 5
Shutdown compressor 5
Shutdown compressor 5
Shutdown compressor 5
Shutdown compressor 6
Shutdown compressor 6
Shutdown compressor 6
Shutdown compressor 6
Shutdown compressor 6
Shutdown compressor 6
Shutdown compressor 6
Shutdown compressor 7
Shutdown compressor 7
Shutdown compressor 8
Shutdown compressor 8
Shutdown compressor 9
Shutdown compressor 9
Shutdown compressor 10
Shutdown compressor 11
Shutdown compressor 12
Shutdown compressor 1, line 2
Shutdown compressor 1, line 2
Shutdown compressor 1, line 2
Shutdown compressor 1, line 2
Shutdown compressor 1, line 2
Shutdown compressor 1, line 2
Shutdown compressor 1, line 2
Shutdown compressor 2, line 2
Shutdown compressor 2, line 2
Shutdown compressor 2, line 2
Shutdown compressor 2, line 2
Shutdown compressor 2, line 2
Shutdown compressor 2, line 2
Shutdown compressor 2, line 2
Shutdown compressor 3, line 2
Shutdown compressor 3, line 2
Shutdown compressor 3, line 2
Shutdown compressor 3, line 2
Shutdown compressor 3, line 2
Shutdown compressor 3, line 2
Shutdown compressor 3, line 2
Shutdown compressor 4, line 2
Shutdown compressor 4, line 2
Shutdown compressor 4, line 2
Shutdown compressor 4, line 2
Shutdown compressor 4, line 2
Shutdown compressor 4, line 2
Shutdown compressor 4, line 2
Shutdown compressor 5, line 2
Shutdown compressor 5, line 2
Shutdown compressor 5, line 2
Shutdown compressor 5, line 2
Shutdown compressor 5, line 2
Shutdown compressor 5, line 2
Shutdown compressor 5, line 2
Shutdown compressor 6, line 2
Shutdown compressor 6, line 2
Shutdown compressor 6, line 2
Shutdown compressor 6, line 2
Shutdown compressor 6, line 2
Shutdown compressor 6, line 2
Shutdown compressor 6, line 2
Shutdown compressor 7, line 2
Shutdown compressor 7, line 2
Shutdown compressor 8, line 2
Shutdown compressor 8, line 2
Shutdown compressor 9, line 2
Shutdown compressor 9, line 2
Shutdown compressor 10, line 2
Shutdown compressor 11, line 2
Shutdown compressor 12, line 2
Shutdown compressor
Shutdown compressor
Shutdown compressor
Shutdown compressor
Shutdown compressor
Shutdown compressor
Related functions disabled
Related functions disabled
Shutdown compressor
Shutdown fans
Shutdown fans
Related functions disabled
Related functions disabled
-
pRack +0300025EN rel. 1.3 - 17.12.2015
ENG
Code
ALG15
ALG16
ALG17
ALG18
ALG19
ALG20
ALG21
ALG22
ALG23
ALG24
ALG25
ALG26
ALG27
ALG28
ALG29
ALG30
ALG31
ALG32
ALG33
ALG34
ALH01
ALH02
ALO02
ALT01
ALT02
ALT03
ALT04
ALU01
ALU02
ALW01
Description
Generic low temperature alarms 1 to 5, PLB1
Generic low temperature alarms 1 to 5, PLB2
Generic low temperature alarms 1 to 5, PLB3
Generic low temperature alarms 1 to 5, PLB4
Generic high modulation alarms 6 and 7, PLB1
Generic high modulation alarms 6 and 7, PLB2
Generic high modulation alarms 6 and 7, PLB3
Generic high modulation alarms 6 and 7, PLB4
Generic low modulation alarms 6 and 7, PLB1
Generic low modulation alarms 6 and 7, PLB2
Generic low modulation alarms 6 and 7, PLB3
Generic low modulation alarms 6 and 7, PLB4
Normal alarm generic functions 8/9, PLB1
Serious alarm generic functions 8/9, PLB1
Normal alarm generic functions 8/9, PLB2
Serious alarm generic functions 8/9, PLB2
Normal alarm generic functions 8/9, PLB3
Serious alarm generic functions 8/9, PLB3
Normal alarm generic functions 8/9, PLB4
Serious alarm generic functions 8/9, PLB4
ChillBooster fault
ChillBooster fault, line 2
pLAN malfunction
Compressor maintenance request
Compressor maintenance request, line 2
ChillBooster maintenance request
ChillBooster maintenance request, line 2
Conﬁguration not allowed
Control probes missing
High pressure prevent warning
Reset
Manual/automatic
Manual/automatic
Manual/automatic
Manual/automatic
Manual/automatic
Manual/automatic
Manual/automatic
Manual/automatic
Manual/automatic
Manual/automatic
Manual/automatic
Manual/automatic
Manual/automatic
Manual/automatic
Manual/automatic
Manual/automatic
Manual/automatic
Manual/automatic
Manual/automatic
Manual/automatic
Automatic
Automatic
Automatic
Manual
Manual
manual
manual
Automatic
Automatic
Automatic
Delay
Settable
Settable
Settable
Settable
Settable
Settable
Settable
Settable
Settable
Settable
Settable
Settable
Settable
Settable
Settable
Settable
Settable
Settable
Settable
Settable
Settable
Settable
60s
0s
0s
Not featured
Not featured
Settable
Alarm relay
Settable
Settable
Settable
Settable
Settable
Settable
Settable
Settable
Settable
Settable
Settable
Settable
Settable
Settable
Settable
Settable
Settable
Settable
Settable
Settable
R2
R2
R1
Not featured
Not featured
Not featured
Not featured
Not featured
Not featured
Not featured
ALW02
High pressure prevent warning, line 2
Automatic
Settable
Not featured
ALW03
ALW04
ALW05
ALW06
ALW07
ALW08
ALW09
ALW10
ALW11
ALW12
ALW13
ALE01
ALE01
ALE01
ALE02
ALE02
ALE02
ALE03
ALE03
ALE03
ALE04
ALE04
ALE04
ALE05
ALE05
ALE05
ALE05
ALE05
ALE05
ALE05
ALE07
ALE07
ALE07
ALE07
ALE07
ALE07
ALE07
ALE08
ALE08
ALE08
ALE08
ALE08
ALE08
ALE08
ALE10
ALE10
ALE10
ALE10
ALE10
ALE10
ALE10
ALE11
ALE12
ALE13
ALE14
Compressor inverter warning
Compressor inverter warning, line 2
Fan inverter warning
Fan inverter warning, line 2
Envelope warning: refrigerant not compatible with compressor series
Envelope warning: custom envelope not conﬁgured
Envelope warning: suction or condensing probes not conﬁgured
Low superheat warning
Low superheat warning, line 2
Warning, ChillBooster operating without outside sensor
Warning, ChillBooster operating without outside sensor, line 2
EEV motor error on Driver 1
High condensing temperature on Driver 1
Low suction temperature on Driver 1
Low superheat on Driver 1
Low operating pressure on Driver 1
Maximum operating pressure on Driver 2
EEV motor error on Driver 2
High condensing temperature on Driver 2
Low suction temperature on Driver 2
Low superheat on Driver 2
Low operating pressure on Driver 2
Maximum operating pressure on Driver 2
EEPROM error on Driver 1 in PLB1
Probe S1 error on Driver 1 in PLB1
Probe S2 error on Driver 1 in PLB1
Probe S3 error on Driver 1 in PLB1
Probe S4 error on Driver 1 in PLB1
Oﬄine error on Driver 1 in PLB1
Battery error on Driver 1 in PLB1
EEPROM error on Driver 1 in PLB3
Probe S1 error on Driver 1 in PLB3
Probe S2 error on Driver 1 in PLB3
Probe S3 error on Driver 1 in PLB3
Probe S4 error on Driver 1 in PLB3
Oﬄine error on Driver 1 in PLB3
Battery error on Driver 1 in PLB3
EEPROM error on Driver 2 in PLB1
Probe S1 error on Driver 2 in PLB1
Probe S2 error on Driver 2 in PLB1
Probe S3 error on Driver 2 in PLB1
Probe S4 error on Driver 2 in PLB1
Oﬄine error on Driver 2 in PLB1
Battery error on Driver 2 in PLB1
EEPROM error on Driver 2 in PLB3
Probe S1 error on Driver 2 in PLB3
Probe S2 error on Driver 2 in PLB3
Probe S3 error on Driver 2 in PLB3
Probe S4 error on Driver 2 in PLB3
Oﬄine error on Driver 2 in PLB3
Battery error on Driver 2 in PLB3
Parameter transmission error on Driver 1
Parameter transmission error on Driver 2
FW compatibility error on Driver 1
FW compatibility error on Driver 2
Automatic
Automatic
Automatic
Automatic
Automatic
Automatic
Automatic
Automatic
Automatic
Automatic
Automatic
Automatic
Automatic
Automatic
Automatic
Automatic
Automatic
Automatic
Automatic
Automatic
Automatic
Automatic
Automatic
Automatic
Automatic
Automatic
Automatic
Automatic
Automatic
Automatic
Automatic
Automatic
Automatic
Automatic
Automatic
Automatic
Automatic
Automatic
Automatic
Automatic
Automatic
Automatic
Automatic
Automatic
Automatic
Automatic
Automatic
Automatic
Automatic
Automatic
Automatic
Automatic
Automatic
Automatic
Automatic
Not featured
Not featured
Not featured
Not featured
Not featured
Not featured
Not featured
Not featured
Not featured
0s
0s
Conﬁg.
Conﬁg.
Conﬁg.
Conﬁg.
Conﬁg.
Conﬁg.
Conﬁg.
Conﬁg.
Conﬁg.
Conﬁg.
Conﬁg.
Conﬁg.
Conﬁg.
Conﬁg.
Conﬁg.
Conﬁg.
Conﬁg.
Conﬁg.
Conﬁg.
Conﬁg.
Conﬁg.
Conﬁg.
Conﬁg.
Conﬁg.
Conﬁg.
Conﬁg.
Conﬁg.
Conﬁg.
Conﬁg.
Conﬁg.
Conﬁg.
Conﬁg.
Conﬁg.
Conﬁg.
Conﬁg.
Conﬁg.
Conﬁg.
Conﬁg.
Conﬁg.
Conﬁg.
0
0
0
0
Not featured
Not featured
Not featured
Not featured
Not featured
Not featured
Not featured
Not featured
Not featured
Not featured
Not featured
Conﬁg.
Conﬁg.
Conﬁg.
Conﬁg.
Conﬁg.
Conﬁg.
Conﬁg.
Conﬁg.
Conﬁg.
Conﬁg.
Conﬁg.
Conﬁg.
Conﬁg.
Conﬁg.
Conﬁg.
Conﬁg.
Conﬁg.
Conﬁg.
Conﬁg.
Conﬁg.
Conﬁg.
Conﬁg.
Conﬁg.
Conﬁg.
Conﬁg.
Conﬁg.
Conﬁg.
Conﬁg.
Conﬁg.
Conﬁg.
Conﬁg.
Conﬁg.
Conﬁg.
Conﬁg.
Conﬁg.
Conﬁg.
Conﬁg.
Conﬁg.
Conﬁg.
Conﬁg.
Conﬁg.
Conﬁg.
Conﬁg.
Conﬁg.
Action
Disable ChillBooster
Disable ChillBooster
Shutdown unit
Shutdown unit
Shutdown unit
Shutdown compressor, except minimum load stage
Shutdown compressor line 2, except
minimum load stage
-
Tab. A.e
pRack +0300025EN rel. 1.3 - 17.12.2015
96
ENG
A.5 I/O Table
Other functions
Condenser
Line 1
Suction
Digital inputs
Mask Index
Ac05, Baack
Baa56, Caaah
Baada, Caa14
Baa02, Caa01
Baa03, Caa02
Baa04, Caa03
Baa05, Caa04
Baa06, Caa05
Baa07, Caa06
Baa08. Caa07
Baa09, Caa15
Baa10, Caa16
Baa11, Caa17
Baa12, Caa18
Baa13, Caa19
Baa14, Caa20
Baa15, Caa21
Baa17, Caa28
Baa18, Caa29
Baa19, Caa30
Baa20, Caa31
Baa21, Caa32
Baa22, Caa33
Baa23, Caa34
Baa24, Caa40
Baa25, Caa41
Baa26, Caa42
Baa27, Caa43
Baa28, Caa44
Baa29, Caa45
Baa30, Caa46
Baa32, Caa53
Baa33, Caa54
Baa34, Caa55
Baa35, Caa56
Baa36, Caa57
Baa37, Caa58
Baa38, Caa59
Baa39, Caa65
Baa40, Caa66
Baa41, Caa67
Baa42, Caa68
Baa43, Caa69
Baa44, Caa70
Baa45, Caa71
Baa47, Caa78
Baa48, Caa79
Baa49, Caa84
Baa50, Caa85
Baa51, Caa90
Baa52, Caa91
Baa53, Caa95
Baa54, Caa99
Baa55, Caaad
Baa58, Caaaj
Baa59, Caaak
Baadc
Baa57
Baaau, Daa01
Baaav, Daa02
Baaaw, Daa03
Baaax, Daa04
Baaay, Daa05
Baaaz, Daa06
Baaba, Daa07
Baabb, Daa08
Baabc, Daa09
Baabd, Daa10
Baabe, Daa11
Baabf, Daa12
Baabg, Daa13
Baabh, Daa14
Baabi, Daa15
Baabj, Daa16
Baabk, Daa17
Baabl
Baacx, Egaa01
Baacz
Baacl, Caa00, Daa41
Daa43
Daa44
Daa45
Eeaa02
Description
Unit ON/OFF line 1
Common low pressure switch line 1
Compressor inverter warning
Alarm 1 compressor 1 line 1
Alarm 2 compressor 1 line 1
Alarm 3 compressor 1 line 1
Alarm 4 compressor 1 line 1
Alarm 5 compressor 1 line 1
Alarm 6 compressor 1 line 1
Alarm 7 compressor 1 line 1
Alarm 1 compressor 2 line 1
Alarm 2 compressor 2 line 1
Alarm 3 compressor 2 line 1
Alarm 4 compressor 2 line 1
Alarm 5 compressor 2 line 1
Alarm 6 compressor 2 line 1
Alarm 7 compressor 2 line 1
Alarm 1 compressor 3 line 1
Alarm 2 compressor 3 line 1
Alarm 3 compressor 3 line 1
Alarm 4 compressor 3 line 1
Alarm 5 compressor 3 line 1
Alarm 6 compressor 3 line 1
Alarm 7 compressor 3 line 1
Alarm 1 compressor 4 line 1
Alarm 2 compressor 4 line 1
Alarm 3 compressor 4 line 1
Alarm 4 compressor 4 line 1
Alarm 5 compressor 4 line 1
Alarm 6 compressor 4 line 1
Alarm 7 compressor 4 line 1
Alarm 1 compressor 5 line 1
Alarm 2 compressor 5 line 1
Alarm 3 compressor 5 line 1
Alarm 4 compressor 5 line 1
Alarm 5 compressor 5 line 1
Alarm 6 compressor 5 line 1
Alarm 7 compressor 5 line 1
Alarm 1 compressor 6 line 1
Alarm 2 compressor 6 line 1
Alarm 3 compressor 6 line 1
Alarm 4 compressor 6 line 1
Alarm 5 compressor 6 line 1
Alarm 6 compressor 6 line 1
Alarm 7 compressor 6 line 1
Alarm 1 compressor 7 line 1
Alarm 2 compressor 7 line 1
Alarm 1 compressor 8 line 1
Alarm 2 compressor 8 line 1
Alarm 1 compressor 9 line 1
Alarm 2 compressor 9 line 1
Alarm 1 compressor 10 line 1
Alarm 1 compressor 11 line 1
Alarm 1 compressor 12 line 1
Common oil alarm line 1
Liquid level alarm line 1
Fan inverter warning line 1
Common high pressure switch line 1
Fan overload 1 line 1
Fan overload 2 line 1
Fan overload 3 line 1
Fan overload 4 line 1
Fan overload 5 line 1
Fan overload 6 line 1
Fan overload 7 line 1
Fan overload 8 line 1
Fan overload 9 line 1
Fan overload 10 line 1
Fan overload 11 line 1
Fan overload 12 line 1
Fan overload 13 line 1
Fan overload 14 line 1
Fan overload 15 line 1
Fan overload 16 line 1
Common fan overload line 1
Heat recovery line 1
ChillBooster fault line 1
Enable ﬂoating condensing line 1
Set point compensation line 1
Anti noise line 1
Split condenser line 1
Enable ﬂoating condensing line 1
Heat recovery activation line 1
Chan.
97
Logic
Notes
pRack +0300025EN rel. 1.3 - 17.12.2015
Comuni
Other functions
Condenser
Line 2
Suction
ENG
Mask Index
Ac08, Baacy
Baaap, Cbaah
Baadb, Cba14
Baaar, Cbaaj
Baa61, Cba01
Baa62, Cba02
Baa63, Cba03
Baa64, Cba04
Baa65, Cba05
Baa66, Cba06
Baa67, Cba07
Baa68, Cba15
Baa69, Cba16
Baa70, Cba17
Baa71, Cba18
Baa72, Cba19
Baa73, Cba20
Baa74, Cba21
Baa76, Cba28
Baa77, Cba29
Baa78, Cba30
Baa79, Cba31
Baa80, Cba32
Baa81, Cba33
Baa82, Cba34
Baa83, Cba40
Baa84, Cba41
Baa85, Cba42
Baa86, Cba43
Baa87, Cba44
Baa88, Cba45
Baa89, Cba46
Baa91, Cba53
Baa92, Cba54
Baa93, Cba55
Baa94, Cba56
Baa95, Cba57
Baa96, Cba58
Baa97, Cba59
Baa98, Cba65
Baa99, cba66
Baaaa, Cba67
Baaab, Cba68
Baaac, Cba69
Baaad, Cba70
Baaae, Cba71
Baaag, Cba78
Baaah, Cba79
Baaai, Cba84
Baaaj, Cba85
Baaak, Cba90
Baaal, Cba91
Baaam, Cba95
Baaan, Cba99
Baaao, Cbaad
Baaas, Cbaak
Baadd
Baaaq
Baabn, Dba01
Baabo, Dba02
Baabp, Dba03
Baabq, Dba04
Baabr, Dba05
Baabs, Dba06
Baabt, Dba07
Baabu, Dba08
Baabv, Dba09
Baabw, Dba10
Baabx, Dba11
Baaby, Dba12
Baabz, Dba13
Baaca, Dba14
Baacb, Dba15
Baacc, Dba16
Baacd, Dba17
Baace
Egba01
Baade
Baacm, Cbd06, Dbd08
Dba43
Dba44
Dba45
Eeba02
Baacf, Efe16
Baacg, Efe17
Baach, Efe18
Baaci, Efe19
Baacj, Efe20
Baacn
Baadf
Baadg
Description
Unit ON/OFF line 2
Common low pressure switch line 2
Compressor inverter warning line 2
Common oil alarm line 2
Alarm 1 compressor 1 line 2
Alarm 2 compressor 1 line 2
Alarm 3 compressor 1 line 2
Alarm 4 compressor 1 line 2
Alarm 5 compressor 1 line 2
Alarm 6 compressor 1 line 2
Alarm 7 compressor 1 line 2
Alarm 1 compressor 2 line 2
Alarm 2 compressor 2 line 2
Alarm 3 compressor 2 line 2
Alarm 4 compressor 2 line 2
Alarm 5 compressor 2 line 2
Alarm 6 compressor 2 line 2
Alarm 7 compressor 2 line 2
Alarm 1 compressor 3 line 2
Alarm 2 compressor 3 line 2
Alarm 3 compressor 3 line 2
Alarm 4 compressor 3 line 2
Alarm 5 compressor 3 line 2
Alarm 6 compressor 3 line 2
Alarm 7 compressor 3 line 2
Alarm 1 compressor 4 line 2
Alarm 2 compressor 4 line 2
Alarm 3 compressor 4 line 2
Alarm 4 compressor 4 line 2
Alarm 5 compressor 4 line 2
Alarm 6 compressor 4 line 2
Alarm 7 compressor 4 line 2
Alarm 1 compressor 3 line 2
Alarm 2 compressor 3 line 2
Alarm 3 compressor 3 line 2
Alarm 4 compressor 3 line 2
Alarm 5 compressor 3 line 2
Alarm 6 compressor 3 line 2
Alarm 7 compressor 3 line 2
Alarm 1 compressor 4 line 2
Alarm 2 compressor 4 line 2
Alarm 3 compressor 4 line 2
Alarm 4 compressor 4 line 2
Alarm 5 compressor 4 line 2
Alarm 6 compressor 4 line 2
Alarm 7 compressor 4 line 2
Alarm 1 compressor 7 line 2
Alarm 2 compressor 7 line 2
Alarm 1 compressor 8 line 2
Alarm 2 compressor 8 line 2
Alarm 1 compressor 9 line 2
Alarm 2 compressor 9 line 2
Alarm 1 compressor 10 line 2
Alarm 1 compressor 11 line 2
Alarm 1 compressor 12 line 2
Liquid level alarm line 2
Fan inverter warning line 2
Common high pressure switch line 2
Fan overload 1 line 2
Fan overload 2 line 2
Fan overload 3 line 2
Fan overload 4 line 2
Fan overload 5 line 2
Fan overload 6 line 2
Fan overload 7 line 2
Fan overload 8 line 2
Fan overload 9 line 2
Fan overload 10 line 2
Fan overload 11 line 2
Fan overload 12 line 2
Fan overload 13 line 2
Fan overload 14 line 2
Fan overload 15 line 2
Fan overload 16 line 2
Common fan overload line 2
Heat recovery line 2
ChillBooster fault line 2
Enable ﬂoating condensing line 2
Set point compensation line 2
Anti noise line 2
Split condenser line 2
Enable ﬂoating condensing line 2
Heat recovery activation line 2
Generic DI F
Generic DI G
Generic DI H
Generic DI I
Generic DI J
pRack automatic or manual operation
pLoads digital input 1
pLoads digital input 2
Chan.
Tab. A.f
pRack +0300025EN rel. 1.3 - 17.12.2015
98
Logic
Notes
ENG
Digital outputs
Mask Index
Description
Bac02, Caa08
Line relay compressor 1 line 1
Partwinding/Star relay compressor 1 line 1
Delta relay compressor 1 line 1
Valve 1 compressor 1 line 1
Valve 2 compressor 1 line 1
Valve 3 compressor 1 line 1
Balancing valve compressor 1 line 1
Line relay compressor 2 line 1
Partwinding/Star relay compressor 2 line 1
Delta relay compressor 2 line 1
Valve 1 compressor 2 line 1
Valve 2 compressor 1 line 1
Valve 3 compressor 1 line 1
Balancing valve compressor 1 line 1
Line relay compressor 3 line 1
Partwinding/Star relay compressor 3 line 1
Delta relay compressor 3 line 1
Valve 1 compressor 3 line 1
Valve 2 compressor 3 line 1
Valve 3 compressor 3 line 1
Balancing valve compressor 3 line 1
Line relay compressor 4 line 1
Partwinding/Star relay compressor 4 line 1
Delta relay compressor 4 line 1
Valve 1 compressor 4 line 1
Valve 2 compressor 4 line 1
Valve 3 compressor 4 line 1
Balancing valve compressor 4 line 1
Line relay compressor 5 line 1
Partwinding/Star relay compressor 5 line 1
Delta relay compressor 5 line 1
Valve 1 compressor 5 line 1
Valve 2 compressor 5 line 1
Valve 3 compressor 5 line 1
Balancing valve compressor 5 line 1
Line relay, compressor 6 line 1
Partwinding/Star relay, compressor 6 line 1
Delta relay, compressor 6 line 1
Valve 1, compressor 6 line 1
Valve 2, compressor 6 line 1
Valve 3, compressor 6 line 1
Balancing valve, compressor 6 line 1
Line relay compressor 7 line 1
Partwinding/Star relay compressor 7 line 1
Delta relay compressor 7 line 1
Valve 1 compressor 7 line 1
Valve 2 compressor 7 line 1
Balancing valve compressor 7 line 1
Line relay compressor 8 line 1
Partwinding/Star relay compressor 8 line 1
Delta relay compressor 8 line 1
Valve 1 compressor 8 line 1
Valve 2 compressor 8 line 1
Balancing valve compressor 8 line 1
Line relay compressor 9 line 1
Partwinding/Star relay compressor 9 line 1
Delta relay compressor 9 line 1
Valve 1 compressor 9 line 1
Balancing valve compressor 9 line 1
Line relay compressor 10 line 1
Partwinding/Star relay compressor 10 line 1
Delta relay compressor 10 line 1
Valve 1 compressor 10 line 1
Balancing valve compressor 10 line 1
Relay line compressor 11 line 1
Partwinding/Star relay compressor 11 line 1
Delta relay compressor 11 line 1
Valve 1 compressor 11 line 1
Balancing valve compressor 11 line 1
Relay line compressor 12 line 1
Partwinding/Star relay compressor 12 line 1
Delta relay compressor 12 line 1
Valve 1 compressor 12 line 1
Balancing valve compressor 12 line 1
Subcooling valve line 1
Fan 1 line 1
Fan 2 line 1
Fan 3 line 1
Fan 4 line 1
Fan 5 line 1
Fan 6 line 1
Fan 7 line 1
Fan 8 line 1
Fan 9 line 1
Fan 10 line 1
Fan 11 line 1
Fan 12 line 1
Fan 13 line 1
Fan 14 line 1
Fan 15 line 1
Fan 16 line 1
Bac03, Caa09
Bac04, Caa10
Bac05, Caa11
Bac07, Caa12
Bac08, Caa22
Bac10, Caa23
Bac11, Caa24
Bac12, Caa25
Bac13, Caa26
Bac15, Caa35
Bac16, Caa36
Bac17, Caa37
Bac18, Caa38
Bac20, Caa39
Bac21, Caa47
Suction
Line 1
Bac22, Caa48
Bac23, Caa49
Bac24, Caa50
Bac26, Caa51
Bac28, Caa60
Bac29, Caa61
Bac30, Caa62
Bac31, Caa63
Bac33, Caa64
Bac34, Caa72
Bac35, Caa73
Bac36, Caa74
Bac37, Caa75
Bac39, Caa76
Bac41, Caa80
Bac42, Caa81
Bac43, Caa82
Bac45, Caa83
Bac46, Caa86
Bac47, Caa87
Bac48, Caa88
Bac50, Caa89
Bac51, Caa92
Bac52, Caa93
Bac55, Caa94
Bac56, Caa96
Bac57, Caa97
Bac60, Caa98
Bac61, Caaaa
Condenser
Line 1
Bac62, Caaab
Bac65, Caaac
Bac66, Caaae
Bac67, Caaaf
Bac70, Caaag
Ebaa01
Bacbt, Daa21
Bacbu, Daa22
Bacbv, Daa23
Bacbw, Daa24
Bacbx, Daa25
Bacby, Daa26
Bacbz, Daa27
Bacca, Daa28
Baccb, Daa29
Baccc, Daa30
Baccd, Daa31
Bacce, Daa32
Baccf, Daa33
Baccg, Daa34
Bacch, Daa35
Bacci, Daa36
Chan. Logic Notes
99
pRack +0300025EN rel. 1.3 - 17.12.2015
Other functions
Line 1
ENG
Mask Index
Description
Bacck, Eeaa03
Baccl, Egaa02
Bacdp, Eaaa11
Bacdq, Eaaa12
Bacdr, Eaaa13
Bacdv, Ecaa07, Edaa07
Bacdw, Ecaa08, Edaa08
Bacdx, Ecaa09, Edaa09
Bacdy, Ecaa10, Edaa10
Bacdz, Ecaa11, Edaa11
Bacea, Ecaa12, Edaa12
Bac01
Bacei
Bacek, Ebaa01
Eaaa15
Eaaa16
Eaaa18
Eaaa19
Eaaa40
Eaaa41
Eaaa42
Eaaa43
Eaaa44
Eaaa45
Bac73, Cba08
Heat recovery pump line 1
ChillBooster line 1
Oil pump 1 line 1
Oil pump 2 line 1
Oil fan line 1
Liquid injection valve/Economizer compressor 1 line 1
Liquid injection valve/Economizer compressor 2 line 1
Liquid injection valve/Economizer compressor 3 line 1
Liquid injection valve/Economizer compressor 4 line 1
Liquid injection valve/Economizer compressor 5 line 1
Liquid injection valve/ Economizer, compressor 6 line 1
Anti liquid return line 1
Force from BMS line 1
Subcooling line 1
Oil cooling pump screw compressor 1 line 1
Oil cooling fan screw compressor 1 line 1
Oil cooling pump screw compressor 2 line 1
Oil cooling fan screw compressor 2 line 1
Oil level valve compressor 1 line 1
Oil level valve compressor 2 line 1
Oil level valve compressor 3 line 1
Oil level valve compressor 4 line 1
Oil level valve compressor 5 line 1
Oil level valve, compressor 6 line 1
Relay line compressor 1 line 2
Partwinding/Star relay compressor 1 line 2
Delta relay compressor 1 line 2
Valve 1 compressor 1 line 2
Valve 2 compressor 1 line 2
Valve 3 compressor 1 line 2
Balancing valve compressor 1 line 2
Line relay compressor 2 line 2
Partwinding/Star relay compressor 2 line 2
Delta relay compressor 2 line 2
Valve 1 compressor 2 line 2
Valve 2 compressor 1 line 2
Valve 3 compressor 1 line 2
Balancing valve compressor 1 line 2
Line relay compressor 3 line 2
Partwinding/Star relay compressor 3 line 2
Delta relay compressor 3 line 2
Valve 1 compressor 3 line 2
Valve 2 compressor 3 line 2
Valve 3 compressor 3 line 2
Balancing valve compressor 3 line 2
Line relay compressor 4 line 2
Partwinding/Star relay compressor 4 line 2
Delta relay compressor 4 line 2
Valve 1 compressor 4 line 2
Valve 2 compressor 4 line 2
Valve 3 compressor 4 line 2
Balancing valve compressor 4 line 2
Line relay compressor 5 line 2
Partwinding/Star relay compressor 5 line 2
Delta relay compressor 5 line 2
Valve 1 compressor 5 line 2
Valve 2 compressor 5 line 2
Valve 3 compressor 5 line 2
Balancing valve compressor 5 line 2
Subcooling valve line 2
Bac74, Cba09
Bac75, Cba10
Bac76, Cba11
Bac78, Cba12
Bac79, Cba22
Suction
Line 2
Bac80, Cba23
Bac81, Cba24
Bac82, Cba25
Bac84, Cba26
Bac86, Cba35
Bac87, Cba36
Bac88, Cba37
Bac89, Cba38
Bac91, Cba39
Bac92, Cba47
Bac94, Cba48
Bac95, Cba49
Bac96, Cba50
Bac98, Cba51
Bacaa, Cba60
Bacab, Cba61
Bacac, Cba62
Bacad, Cba63
Bacaf, Cba64
Ebba01
pRack +0300025EN rel. 1.3 - 17.12.2015
Chan. Logic Notes
100
ENG
Mask Index
Description
Bacag, Cba72
Line relay, compressor 6 line 2
Partwinding/Star relay, compressor 6 line 2
Delta relay, compressor 6 line 2
Valve 1 compressor 6 line 2
Valve 2 compressor 6 line 2
Valve 3 compressor 6 line 2
Balancing valve, compressor 6 line 2
Line relay compressor 7 line 2
Partwinding/Star relay compressor 7 line 2
Delta relay compressor 7 line 2
Valve 1 compressor 7 line 2
Valve 2 compressor 7 line 2
Balancing valve compressor 7 line 2
Line relay compressor 8 line 2
Partwinding/Star relay compressor 8 line 2
Delta relay compressor 8 line 2
Valve 1 compressor 8 line 2
Valve 2 compressor 8 line 2
Balancing valve compressor 8 line 2
Line relay compressor 9 line 2
Partwinding/Star relay compressor 9 line 2
Delta relay compressor 9 line 2
Valve 1 compressor 9 line 2
Balancing valve compressor 9 line 2
Line relay compressor 10 line 2
Partwinding/Star relay compressor 10 line 2
Delta relay compressor 10 line 2
Valve 1 compressor 10 line 2
Balancing valve compressor 10 line 2
Line relay compressor 11 line 2
Partwinding/Star relay compressor 11 line 2
Delta relay compressor 11 line 2
Valve 1 compressor 11 line 2
Balancing valve compressor 11 line 2
Line relay compressor 12 line 2
Partwinding/Star relay compressor 12 line 2
Delta relay compressor 12 line 2
Valve 1 compressor 12 line 2
Balancing valve compressor 12 line 2
Fan1 line 2
Fan 2 line 2
Fan 3 line 2
Fan 4 line 2
Fan 5 line 2
Fan 6 line 2
Fan 7 line 2
Fan 8 line 2
Fan 9 line 2
Fan 10 line 2
Fan 11 line 2
Fan 12 line 2
Fan 13 line 2
Fan 14 line 2
Fan 15 line 2
Fan 16 line 2
Fan inverter line 2
Heat recovery pump line 2
ChillBooster line 2
Oil pump 1 line 2
Oil pump 2 line 2
Oil fan line 2
Liquid injection valve compressor 1 line 2
Liquid injection valve compressor 2 line 2
Liquid injection valve compressor 3 line 2
Liquid injection valve compressor 4 line 2
Liquid injection valve compressor 5 line 2
Liquid injection valve compressor 6 line 2
Anti liquid return line 2
Force from BMS line 2
Subcooling line 2
Oil level valve compressor 1 line 2
Oil level valve compressor 2 line 2
Oil level valve compressor 3 line 2
Oil level valve compressor 4 line 2
Oil level valve compressor 5 line 2
Oil level valve, compressor 6 line 2
Generic stage function 1
Generic stage function 2
Generic stage function 3
Generic stage function 4
Generic stage function 5
Active alarms
Generic alarm function 1
Generic alarm function 2
Generic scheduling function
Sign of life
Minor alarm
Serious alarm
Bacah, Cba73
Bacai, Cba74
Bacaj, Cba75
Bacal, Cba76
Bacan, Cba80
Suction
Line 2
Bacao, Cba81
Bacap, Cba82
Bacar, Cba83
Bacas Cba86
Bacat, Cba87
Bacau, Cba88
Bacaw, Cba89
Bacax, Cba92
Bacay, Cba93
Bacbb, Cba94
Bacbc, Cba96
Bacbd, Cba97
Bacbg, Cba98
Bacbh, Cbaaa
Common
Other functions
Line 2
Condenser
Bacbi, Cbaab
Bacbl, Cbaac
Bacbm, Cbaae
Bacbn, Cbaaf
Bacbq, Cbaag
Baccn, Dba20
Bacco, Dba21
Baccp, Dba22
Baccq, Dba23
Baccr, Dba24
Baccs, Dba25
Bacct, Dba26
Baccu, Dba27
Baccv, Dba28
Baccw, Dba29
Baccx, Dba30
Baccy, Dba31
Baccz, Dba32
Bacda, Dba33
Bacdb, Dba34
Bacdc, Dba35
Bacdd, Dba36
Bacde, Eeba03
Bacdf, Egba02
Bacds, Eaba10
Bacdt, Eaba11
Bacdu, Eaba12
Baceb, Ecba07, Edba07
Bacec, Ebca08, Edba08
Baced, Ecba09, Edba09
Bacee, Ecba10, Edba10
Bacef, Ecba11, Edba11
Baceg, Ecba12, Edba12
Bac72
Bacej
Bacel, Ebbb01
Eaba40
Eaba41
Eaba42
Eaba43
Eaba44
Eaba45
Bacdg, Efe21
Bacdh, Efe22
Bacdi, Efe23
Bacdj, Efe24
Bacdk, Efe25
Bacdl
Bacdm, Efe26
Bacdn, Efe27
Bacdo, Efe28
Baceh
Bacem
Bacen
Chan. Logic Notes
Tab. A.g
101
pRack +0300025EN rel. 1.3 - 17.12.2015
ENG
Common
Other
Line 2
C.
Suct.
Other functions
C.
Suct.
Analogue inputs
Mask Index
Bab01, Caaal
Bab02, Caaam
Bab03, Caaao
Bab04, Daa39
Bab09, Daa40
Bab11, Daa41
Bab12
Bab13, Eeaa05
Bab15, Daa20
Bab16
Bab17, Eaaa04
Bab29, Ecaa01, Edaa01
Bab30, Ecaa02 Edaa02
Bab31, Ecaa03, Edaa03
Bab32, Ecaa04, Edaa04
Bab33, Ecaa05, Edaa05
Bab34, Ecaa06, Edaa06
Bab41, Eaaa05
Bab42, Eaaa06
Bab43, Eaaa07
Bab44, Eaaa08
Bab45, Eaaa09
Bab46, Eaaa10
Bab05, Caal
Bab06, Caaam
Bab07, Caaao
Bab08, Dba39
Bab10, Dba40
Bab48, Dba38
Bab49
Bab14, Eeba05
Bab18, Eaba04
Bab35, Ecba01, Edba01
Bab36, Ecba02, Edba02
Bab37, Ecba03, Edba03
Bab38, Ecba04, Edba04
Bab39, Ecba05, Edba05
Bab40, Ecba06, Edba06
Bab47, Eaba05
Bab19, Efe06
Bab20, Efe07
Bab21, Efe08
Bab22, Efe09
Bab23, Efe10
Bab24, Efe11
Bab25, Efe12
Bab26, Efe13
Bab27, Efe14
Bab28, Efe15
Bab58
Description
Return pressure probe line 1
Return backup pressure probe line 1
Return temperature probe line 1
Condensing pressure probe line 1
Backup condensing pressure probe line 1
Discharge temperature probe line 1
Liquid temperature probe line 1
Heat recovery outlet temperature probe line 1
Outside temperature probe line 1
Room temperature probe line 1
Oil temperature probe line 1
Discharge temperature probe compressor 1 line 1
Discharge temperature probe compressor 2 line 1
Discharge temperature probe compressor 3 line 1
Discharge temperature probe compressor 4 line 1
Discharge temperature probe compressor 5 line 1
Discharge temperature probe, compressor 6 line 1
Oil temperature probe compressor 1 line 1
Oil temperature probe compressor 2 line 1
Oil temperature probe compressor 3 line 1
Oil temperature probe compressor 4 line 1
Oil temperature probe compressor 5 line 1
Oil temperature probe compressor 6 line 1
Return pressure probe line 2
Return backup pressure probe line 2
Return temperature probe line 2
Condensing pressure probe line 2
Backup condensing pressure probe line 2
Discharge temperature probe line 2
Liquid temperature probe line 2
Heat recovery outlet temperature probe line 2
Oil temperature probe line 2
Discharge temperature probe compressor 1 line 2
Discharge temperature probe compressor 2 line 2
Discharge temperature probe compressor 3 line 2
Discharge temperature probe compressor 4 line 2
Discharge temperature probe compressor 5 line 2
Discharge temperature probe, compressor 6 line 2
Oil temperature probe compressor 1 line 2
Generic active probe A
Generic passive probe A
Generic active probe B
Generic passive probe B
Generic active probe C
Generic passive probe C
Generic active probe D
Generic passive probe D
Generic active probe E
Generic passive probe E
Energy meter
Chan.
Logic
Notes
Chan.
Logic
Notes
Tab. A.h
Line 2
Line 1
Analogue outputs
Mask Index
Bad01, Caa14
Bad02, Eaaa14
Bad07, Daa38
Bad08, Eeaa04
Bad12, Efe29
Eaaa17
Bad04
Bad05, Eaba13
Bad10, Dba37
Bad11, Eeba04
Bad13, Efe30
Eaaa20
Description
Compressor inverter output line 1
Oil pump output line 1
Fan inverter output line 1
Heat recovery valve output line 1
Generic modulating output 1
Oil cooling pump output screw compressor 1
Compressor inverter output line 2
Oil pump output line 2
Fan inverter output line 2
Heat recovery valve output line 2
Generic modulating output 2
Oil cooling pump output screw compressor 2
Tab. A.i
CAREL reserves the right to modify or change its products without prior
warning.
pRack +0300025EN rel. 1.3 - 17.12.2015
102
ENG
103
pRack +0300025EN rel. 1.3 - 17.12.2015
CAREL INDUSTRIES - Headquarters
Via dell’Industria, 11 - 35020 Brugine - Padova (Italy)
Tel. (+39) 049.9716611 - Fax (+39) 049.9716600
e-mail: [email protected] - www.carel.com
pRack +0300025EN rel. 1.3 - 17.12.2015
Agenzia / Agency:
">
Hello! I am an AI chatbot specifically trained to assist you with the Carel PRK300M0E0 PRK300M0F0, PRK300M3F0 User Manual. I have thoroughly reviewed the document and can help you locate the exact information you need or explain the content in clear and simple terms. Whether you’re looking for guidance on specific features, troubleshooting steps, or general usage, feel free to ask your questions. The more details you provide about your concerns or needs, the more accurately and effectively I can assist you!
Assistant typing
Assistant terminated
Related

Compressor Rack Controller pRack pR300 User Manual

Carel 2750441 PRK300S3FK User Manual

pRack pR300T User Manual - CAREL

Carel pRack pR300T PRK30TL3FK Manual

Carel pRack pR300T Manual de usuario

Carel pCO5+ User manual

Carel EVD mini User Manual

Ground source heat pump Smart HP FLSTDmHPGE User manual

EVD evolution EVD0000E00 User Manual

EVD evolution Expansion Valve Driver User Manual

Carel 2707315 Driver Panel Kit EVDPN01007 Installation Instructions

EVD evolution universal User Manual
